Перевод: с греческого на все языки

со всех языков на греческий

you+have+set+out

  • 1 παρά

    πᾰρά [pron. full] [ρᾰ], [dialect] Ep. and Lyr. also [full] παραί: shortd. [full] πάρ, in Hom., Lyr. (but rarely in Trag., in lyr. passages, A.Supp. 553, S.Tr. 636), and in all dial ects exc. [dialect] Att., GDI5434.8 ([place name] Paros), IG5(2).3.14 (Tegea, iv B. C.), Inscr.Magn.26.28 (Thess.), etc.:—Prep. c. gen., dat., and acc., prop.
    A beside: hence,
    A WITH GEN. prop. denoting motion from the side of, from beside, from:
    I of Place,

    πὰρ νηῶν ἔλθωμεν Il.13.744

    ;

    παρὰ ναῦφιν ἐλευσόμεθ' 12.225

    , etc.;

    παρ' Ὠκεανοῖο ῥοάων.. ἐπερχομένη Od.22.197

    ;

    πὰρ νηῶν ἀπώσεται Il.8.533

    , etc.;

    δῶρα π. νηὸς ἐνεικέμεν 19.194

    ;

    φάσγανον ὀξὺ ἐρυσσάμενος π. μηροῦ 1.190

    , cf. 21.173;

    σπασσάμενος.. ἄορ παχέος π. μηροῦ 16.473

    ; πλευρὰ παρ' ἀσπίδος ἐξεφαάνθη was exposed beside the shield, 4.468, cf. A.Th. 624.
    II commonly of Persons,
    1 with Verbs of going or coming, bringing, etc.,

    ἦλθε.. πὰρ Διός Il.2.787

    ;

    παρ' Αἰήταο πλέουσα Od.12.70

    , etc.;

    ἀγγελίη ἥκει π. βασιλέος Hdt.8.140

    .

    ά; αὐτομολήσαντες π. βασιλέως X.An.1.7.13

    ;

    ἐξεληλυθὼς παρ' Ἀριστάρχου D.21.117

    ; ὁ π. τινὸς ἥκων his messenger, X.Cyr.4.5.53; so

    οἱ π. τινός Th.7.10

    , Ev.Marc.3.21, etc.;

    ὅστις ἀφικνεῖτο τῶν π. βασιλέως πρὸς αὐτόν X.An.1.1.5

    , etc.; τεύχεα καλὰ φέρουσα παρ' Ἡφαίστοιο from his workshop, Il.18.137, cf. 617, etc.;

    ἀπαγγέλλειν τι π. τινός X.An.2.1.20

    ;

    σὺ δὲ οἰμώζειν αὐτοῖς παρ' ἐμοῦ λέγε Luc.DMort.1.2

    .
    2 issuing from a person, γίγνεσθαι π. τινός to be born from, Pl.Smp. 179b; λόγος (sc. ἐστί) π. Ἀθηναίων c. acc. et inf., Hdt.8.55: freq. following a Noun, δόξα ἡ π. τῶν ἀνθρώπων glory from (given by) men, Pl.Phdr. 232a; ἡ π. τινὸς εὔνοια the favour from, i. e. of, any one, X.Mem.2.2.12; τὸ παρ' ἐμοῦ ἀδίκημα done by me, Id.Cyr.5.5.13; τὰ π. τινός all that issues from any one, as commands, commissions, Id.An.2.3.4, etc.; or promises, gifts, presents, Id.Mem.3.11.13; τὰ παρ' ἐμοῦ my opinions, Pl.Smp. 219a; παρ' ἑωυτοῦ διδούς giving from oneself, i. e. from one's own means, Hdt. 2.129, 8.5;

    παρ' ἑαυτοῦ προσετίθει X.HG6.1.3

    ; νόμον θὲς παρ' ἐμοῦ by my advice, Pl.Prt. 322d; αὐτοὶ παρ' αὑτῶν of themselves, Id.Tht. 150d, cf. Phdr. 235c.
    3 with Verbs of receiving, obtaining, and the like ,

    τυχεῖν τινος π. τινός Od.6.290

    , 15.158;

    πὰρ δ' ἄρα μιν Ταφίων πρίατο 14.452

    ;

    ἀρέομαι πὰρ μὲν Σαλαμῖνος Ἀθαναίων χάριν Pi.P.1.76

    ;

    εὑρέσθαι τι π. τῶν θεῶν Isoc.9.14

    , cf. IG12.40.10; δέχεσθαι, λαμβάνειν, ἁρπάζειν π. τινός, Th.1.20, X.Oec.9.11, Hes.Th. 914; ἀντιάσαι, αἰτήσασθαι π. τινός, S.El. 870 (lyr.), X.HG3.1.4;

    ἀξιοῖ π. τοῦ ἰατροῦ φάρμακον πιὼν ἐξεμέσαι τὸ νόσημα Pl.R. 406d

    ;

    κόσμος τοῖς πράξασι γίγνεται π. τῶν ἀκουσάντων Id.Mx. 236e

    : without Verb,

    ὁ καρπὸς ὁ π. τῶν δημάρχων IG12.76.27

    : with Verbs of learning, etc.,

    μεμαθηκέναι π. τινῶν Hdt.2.104

    , etc.
    4 with [voice] Pass. Verbs,

    πὰρ Διὸς.. μῆνις ἐτύχθη Il.15.122

    ;

    π. θεῶν ἡ τοιαύτη μανία δίδοται Pl.Phdr. 245c

    , etc.; τὰ π. τῶν θεῶν σημαινόμενα, συμβουλευόμενα, X.Cyr.1.6.2; τὰ π. τινὸς λεγόμενα ib.6.1.42; τὰ π. τῆς τύχης δωρηθέντα the presents of.., Isoc.4.26;

    με π. σοῦ σοφίας πληρωθήσεσθαι Pl.Smp. 175e

    .
    III rarely for παρά c. dat., by, near,

    πὰρ ποδός Pi.P.10.62

    , 3.60; παρὰ δὲ κυανέων πελαγέων dub. l. in S.Ant. 966 (lyr.);

    τὸν Ῥειτὸν τὸν παρὰ τοῦ ἄστεως IG12.81.5

    ; πολλοὶ παρ' ἀμφοτέρων ἔπιπτον, = ἀμφοτέρωθεν, D.S.19.42.
    IV π. τῆς συγχωρήσεώς τινος without his consent, BCH46.337 ([place name] Teos).
    B WITH DAT. denoting rest by the side of any person or thing, answering the question where?
    I of Places, κατ' ἂρ ἕζετ'.. πὰρ πυρί, ἔκειτο π. σηκῷ, Od.7.154, 9.319;

    νέμονται π. πέτρῃ 13.408

    ;

    ἑσταότες παρ ὄχεσφιν Il.8.565

    ; πὰρ ποσὶ μαρναμένων ἐκυλίνδετο at their feet, 14.411, etc.; π. θύρῃσι at the door, 7.346;

    π. ῥηγμῖνι θαλάσσης 2.773

    ;

    δεῖπνον.. εἵλοντο παρ' ὄχθῃσιν ποταμοῖο Od.6.97

    , cf. Il.4.475, 20.53, etc.;

    κεῖσθαι παρ' Ἅιδῃ S.OT 972

    ; παρ' οἴνῳ over wine, ib. 780, etc.
    2 at one's house or place, with one,

    μένειν π. τισί 9.427

    ;

    θητευέμεν ἄλλῳ, ἀνδρὶ παρ' ἀκλήρῳ Od.11.490

    ;

    φιλέεσθαι π. τινί Il.13.627

    ; παρ' ἑωυτοῖσι at their own house, Hdt.1.105, cf. 86;

    παιδευθῆναι π. τινί X.Cyr.1.2.15

    ;

    καταλύειν π. τινί D.18.82

     (but

    παρά τινα καταλῦσαι Th.1.136

    ), etc.: hence οἱ παρ' ἐμοί those of my household, X.Mem.2.7.4, etc.; τὰ παρ' ἐμοί life with me, Id.An. 1.7.4; οἱ παρ' ἡμῖν ἄνθρωποι our people, Pl.Phd. 64b; ἡ παρ' ἡμῖν πολιτεία, ὁ παρ' ὑμῖν δῆμος, D.15.19; ὁ παρ' αὑτῷ βίοτος one's own life, S.OT 612;

    τὸ παρ' ἡμῖν πῦρ Pl.Phlb. 29f

    ;

    ὅσος παρ' ὑμῖν ὁ φθόνος φυλάσσεται S.OT 382

    ;

    τὸ παρ' ἡμῖν σῶμα Pl.Phlb. 29f

    ; also, in one's hands,

    τὰ π. τοῖς Ἑλληνοταμίαις ὄντα IG12.91.6

    ;

    ἔχειν παρ' ἑωυτῷ Hdt. 1.130

    , etc.; οὔπω παρ' ἐμοὶ τότ' ἦν λέγειν I had no right to speak then, Men.Epit.98.
    3 before, in the presence of,

    ἤειδε π. μνηστῆρσιν Od. 1.154

    ; before a judge,

    δίκας γίγνεσθαι π. τῷ πολεμάρχῳ IG12.16.9

    ;

    π. Δαρείῳ κριτῇ Hdt.3.160

    ;

    π. τῷ βασιλέϊ Id.4.65

    ;

    παρὰ δικασταῖς Th. 1.73

    ;

    εἰς κρίσιν καθιστάναι τινὰ π. τισί D.18.13

    : hence παρ' ἐμοί in my judgement, Hdt.1.32, cf. S.Tr. 589, E.Heracl. 881, 1 Ep.Cor.3.19; π. τούτῳ μέγα δυνήσεται with him, Pl.Grg. 510e.
    4 in quoting authors, παρ' Ἐφόρῳ, παρ' Αἰσχίνῃ, π. Θουκυδίδῃ, in Ephorus, etc., Plb. 9.2.4, D.H.Comp.9,18.
    III Arc., = π. c. gen., from,

    καθὰ εἶχον τὰς ἰντολὰς π. τᾷ ἰδίᾳ πόλι SIG559.9

     (Megalop., iii B. C.), cf. 558.10 (Ithaca, iii B. C.).
    C WITH ACCUS. in three main senses,
    I beside, near, by,
    II along,
    III past, beyond.
    I beside, near, by:
    1 with Verbs of coming, going, etc., to the side of, to,

    ἴτην π. νῆας Il.1.347

    , cf. 8.220, etc.;

    βῆ.. π. θῖνα 1.34

    , cf. 327, etc.; τρέψας πὰρ ποταμόν to the side of.., 21.603, cf. 3.187: more freq. of persons, εἶμι παρ' Ἥφαιστον to the chamber of H., 18.143, cf. Od.1.285, etc.;

    ἐσιόντες π. τοὺς φίλους Th.2.51

    , etc.;

    φοιτᾶν π. τὸν Σωκράτη Pl.Phd. 59d

    ; πέμπειν ἀγγέλους, πρέσβεις π. τινά, Hdt. 1.141, Th.1.58, etc.;

    ἄγειν π. τινά Hdt.1.86

    ;

    καταφυγὴ π. φίλων τινάς Th.2.17

    .
    2 with Verbs of rest, beside, near, by, sts. with ref. to past motion (expressed in such phrases as

    ἧσο παρ' αὐτὸν ἰοῦσα Il.3.406

    , cf. 11.577),

    ἔς ῥα θρόνους ἕζοντο παρ' Ἀτρεΐδην Μενέλαον Od.4.51

    , cf. 13.372; κεῖται ποταμοῖο παρ' ὄχθας lies stretched beside.., Il.4.487, cf. 12.381; παρ' ἔμ' ἵστασο come and stand by me, 11.314, cf. 592, 20.49, etc.;

    π. πυθμέν' ἐλαίης θῆκαν Od.13.122

    ;

    καταθέτω π. τὰ ἴκρια IG12.94.28

    ; κοιμήσαντο π. πρυμνήσια they lay down by.., Od.12.32, cf. 3.460;

    ὁ παρ' ἐμὲ καθήμενος Pl.Euthd. 271b

    , cf. Phd. 89b; ἐκάθητο π. τὴν πύλην, π. τὴν ὁδόν, LXX Ge.19.1, Ev.Marc. 10.46;

    παρ' αὐτὸν τὸν καλέσαντα κατακείμενος δειπνῆσαι Thphr.Char. 21.2

    , cf. Pl.Smp. 175c;

    ἐκαθέζετο π. τὸν Λύσιν Id.Ly. 211a

    , cf. R. 328c;

    στὰς παρ' αὐτόν Id.Phd. 116c

    ;

    τέμενος νεμόμεσθα.. παρ' ὄχθας Il.12.313

    , cf. 6.34, IG12.943.45;

    τοῦ Εὐρίπου, παρ' ὃν ᾤκει Aeschin.3.90

    ;

    κατελείφθη π. τὸν νηόν Hdt.4.87

    ;

    τὴν παρ' ἐμὲ ἐοῦσαν δύναμιν Id.8.140

    .ά (v.l. ἐμοί)

    ; εἶπεν αὐτῷ μένειν παρ' ἑαυτόν X.Cyr.1.4.18

    , cf. An.1.9.31, Ar.Fr. 451, Is.8.16, Alex.248, Demetr.Com. Nov.1.5, IG22.654.23 (iii B. C.), Plb.3.26.1, 11.14.3, 28.14.3;

    ἡ π. θάλασσαν Μακεδονία Th.2.99

    , cf. S.El. 184 (lyr.), Tr. 636 (lyr.);

    Καρβασυανδῆς π. Καῦνον IG12.204.52

    ;

    τὸ κουρεῖον τὸ π. τοὺς Ἑρμᾶς Lys.23.3

    , cf. And.1.62, Is.6.20, 8.35, Aeschin. 1.182, 3.88, Lycurg.112;

    τᾶς παστάδος τᾶς παρ' Ἀπόλλωνα IG42

     (1).109 iii 146 (Epid.); παρ' ὄμμα before one's eyes, E.Supp. 484; π. πόδας on the spot, Phld.Ir.p.78 W., Rh.2.2 S.; immediately thereafter, Plb.1.7.5, 1.8.2, al.
    b [dialect] Dor., [dialect] Boeot., and Thess., = supr. B. 11.2, at the house of.., with a person, IG7.3171.7 (Orchom. [dialect] Boeot.), GDI 1717 (Delph.); παρ' ἁμὲ πολυτίματος [ὁ σῖτος] Ar.Ach. 759 (Megar.);

    τοῖς κατοικέντεσσι πὰρ ἀμμέ IG9(2).517.18

     (Larissa, iii B. C.); τοῖ πὰρ ἀμμὲ πολιτεύματος ib.13;

    πεπολιτευκὼρ πὰρ ἁμέ Schwyzer 425.5

     (Elis, iii/ii B. C.): so in [dialect] Att., θέμενος π. γυναῖκας depositing with.., Pl. R. 465c.
    3 with Verbs of striking, wounding, etc.,

    βάλε στῆθος π. μαζόν Il.4.480

    , etc.;

    τὸν δ' ἕτερον.. κληῗδα παρ' ὦμον πλῆξε 5.146

    ;

    τύψε κατὰ κληῗδα παρ' αὐχένα 21.117

    , cf. 4.525, 8.325, etc.;

    αἰχμὴ δ' ἐξελύθη παρὰ νείατον ἀνθερεῶνα 5.293

    , cf. 17.310; δησάμενος τελαμῶνι π. σφυρόν ib. 290.
    4 with Verbs of placing, examining, etc., side by side with..,

    ὁ ἔλεγχος π. τὸν ἔλεγχον παραβαλλόμενος Pl.Grg. 475e

    , cf. Hp.Mi. 369c, Smp. 214c, R. 348a;

    ἐξέτασον παρ' ἄλληλα τὰ σοὶ κἀμοὶ βεβιωμένα D.18.265

    ;

    ἄλλα παρ' ἄλλατιθέμενα.. τῶν χρωμάτων Arist.Mete. 375a24

    .
    b Geom., παραβάλλειν π. apply an area to (i. e. along) a finite straight line, Euc.1.44, Archim.Aequil.2.1;

    π. τὴν δοθεῖσαν αὐτοῦ γραμμὴν παρατείναντα Pl. Men. 87a

    ; ἡ [εὐθεῖα] παρ' ἣν δύνανται αἱ καταγόμεναι τεταγμένως the line to which are applied the squares of the or dinates, etc., Apollon. Perg.Con.1.11: hence,
    c Arith., παραβάλλειν τι π. τι divide by.. (v.

    παραβάλλω A.

     VII. 2);

    μερίζω τι π. τι Dioph.4.33

    ; ἐπὶ γ π. ί multiply by 3 and divide by 10, PLond.5.1718.2 (vi A. D.).
    5 Geom., parallel to.., Democr.155, Arist. Top. 158b31, Archim.Sph. Cyl.1.12, al.
    6 metaph. in Gramm., like, as a parody of.., π. τὸ Σοφόκλειον, π. τὰ ἐν Τεύκρῳ Σοφοκλέους, Sch.Ar.Av. 1240, Nu. 584.
    b Gramm., of words which differ as compared with other words, π. τὸ τοῦ ἔρωτος ὄνομα σμικρὸν παρηγμένον ἐστίν.. [τὸ ἥρως] Pl.Cra. 398d, cf. 399a, Lg. 654a: hence, derived from.., π. τὸ ἔδαφος, δάπεδον, A.D. Pron.31.16; π. τὸ δρῶ δρᾶμα Sch.A.R.2.624;

    σύγκειται [τὸ αὐθέντης] π. τὸ εἷναι.. καὶ π. τὸ αὐτός Phryn.PSp.24

     B.
    7 generally, of Comparison, alongside of, compared with, usu. implying superiority,

    δοκέοντες π. ταῦτα οὐδ' ἂν τοὺς σοφωτάτους ἀνθρώπων Αἰγυπτίους οὐδὲν ἐπεξευρεῖν Hdt.2.160

    , cf. 7.20, 103;

    ἡλίου ἐκλείψεις αἳ πυκνότεραι π. τὰ ἐκ τοῦ πρὶν χρόνου μνημονευόμενα ξυνέβησαν Th.1.23

    , cf. 4.6;

    τῶν ἁπάντων ἀπερίοπτοί εἰσι π. τὸ νικᾶν Id.1.41

    ;

    π. τὰ ἄλλα ζῷα ὥσπερ θεοὶ ἄνθρωποι βιοτεύουσι X.Mem.1.4.14

    ;

    φαίνεται π. τὸ ἀλγεινὸν ἡδὺ καὶ π. τὸ ἡδὺ ἀλγεινὸν ἡ ἡσυχία Pl.R. 584a

    , cf. Phdr. 236d, La. 183c, al.;

    εὐδαίμων μᾶλλον π. πάντας BCH26.332

     ([place name] Halae);

    προετέρει π. πάντας PSI 4.422.34

     (iii B. C.): sts. implying inferiority or defect, ἠλάττωσας αὐτὸν βραχύ τι παρ' ἀγγέλους a little lower than the angels, LXX Ps. 8.6; μιᾷ ἡμέρᾳ ὑστεροῦσι π. τὸν ἥλιον lag one day behind the sun, Gem.8.19; so perh. παρ' αὐτόν, ὑπὲρ αὐτόν (has passed the ball?) short of him, beyond him, Antiph.234; μέγα τοι ἡμέρα παρ' ἡμέραν γιγνομένη γνώμην ἐξ ὀργῆς μεταστῆσαι one day compared with another is important.., a day's delay makes a difference, Antipho 5.72; τί γὰρ παρ' ἦμαρ ἡμέρα τέρπειν ἔχει προσθεῖσα κἀναθεῖσα τοῦ γε κατθανεῖν; what joy has one day compared with another to offer, since it only brings us nearer to, or farther from, death (which is neither good nor evil)? S.Aj. 475; ὃς μὲν κρίνει (prefers) ἡμέραν παρ' ἡμέραν, ὃς δὲ κρίνει (approves)

    πᾶσαν ἡμέραν Ep.Rom.14.5

    .
    8 with Verbs of estimating, to set at so and so much, hence π. = equivalent to.., ταρβῶ μὴ.. θῆται παρ' οὐδὲν τὰς ἐμὰς ἐπιστολάς set at nought, E.IT 732, cf. A. Ag. 229 (lyr.);

    παρ' οὐδὲν ἄγειν S.Ant.35

    ; π. μικρὸν ἡγεῖσθαι or ποιεῖσθαί τι hold of small account, Isoc.5.79, D.61.51;

    παρ' ὀλίγον ποιεῖσθαί τινα X.An.6.6.11

    ; so with εἶναι, etc., παρ' οὐδέν ἐστι are as nothing, S.OT 983, cf. Ant. 466;

    παρ' οὐδὲν αὐταῖς ἦν ἂν ὀλλύναι πόσεις E.Or. 569

    ;

    οὐ π. μέγα ἔσεσθαι τὸ πταῖσμα Arr.An.1.18.6

    ; so perh. π. σμικρὰ κεχώρηκε have turned out of little account, have amounted to little, Hdt.1.120.
    b in Accountancy, without a verb, π. τὴν καταλλαγήν on account of κ., PHib.1.100.4 (iii B. C.).
    9 of correspondence, ὀφείλειν στατῆρα π. στατῆρα stater for stater (one to each of two creditors), BCH50.214 (Thasos, v B. C.);

    πληγὴν π. πληγὴν ἑκάτερον Ar.Ra. 643

    ; συνεῖναι ἑκατέρῳ ἡμέραν παρ' ἡμέραν stayed day for day with each, D.59.46; hence of alternation, ποιεῖσθαι ἁγνείας καὶ θυσίας δύο π. δύο, of four priests acting two and two alternately, BGU1198.12 (i B. C.); τοῦ καθημερινοῦ ἢ μίαν π. μίαν (sc. ἡμέραν) [πυρετοῦ] quotidian or tertian fever, ib.956.3 (iii A. D.): sts. without doubling of the Noun, παρ' ἡμέρην, opp. καθ' ἡμέρην, tertian, opp. quotidian, Hp.Aph.1.12; καθ' ἡμέραν, παρ' ἡμέραν, π. δύο, π. τρεῖς every day, every second day, every third (fourth) day, Arr.Epict.2.18.13; π. μίαν every second day, Plb.3.110.4; παρ' ἐνιαυτόν every second year, Plu.Cleom.15; παρ' ἔτος year and year about, Arist.GA 757a7; every second year, Paus.8.15.2; π. μέρος by turns (v. μέρος II. 2);

    ὁ ἀνὰ μέρος παρ' ἓξ μῆνας ὑπὲρ γῆν τε καὶ ὑπὸ γῆν γινόμενος Ἄδωνις Corn. ND28

    ; π. μῆνα τρίτον every third month, Arist.HA 582b4, cf. Plu.2.942e; but π. τρία [ἔτεα] prob. every fourth year, IG5(2).422 ([place name] Phigalea), cf. Arr.Epict. l.c.; ἕνα παρ' ἕνα παραλειπτέον every second one, Nicom.Ar.1.18; ἕνα π. δύο ([etym.] τρεῖς) every third (fourth) one, ibid.; παρὰ δ' ἄλλαν ἄλλα μοῖρα διώκει now one now another, E.Heracl. 611.
    10 precisely at the moment of, παρ' αὐτὰ τἀδικήματα flagrante delicto, D.18.13, 21.26;

    ἀποδώσω π. τὸν εὔθυνον τὸ καθῆκον IG12.188.31

    ; π. τοιοῦτον καιρόν, π. τὰς χρείας, D.20.41,46; π. τὰ δεινά in the midst of danger, Plu.Ant.63;

    π. τὴν πρώτην γένεσιν Jul.Or.1.10b

    ; π. τὴν πρώτην (sc. ἐπίθεσιν) at the first attack, Hld.9.2;

    π. γε τὴν πρώτην ὁρμήν Ael.NA14.10

    .
    b distributively, whether of Time, π. τὰ ἑβδομήκοντα ἔτεα in each complete period of seventy years, Hdt.1.32;

    ἐν ταῖς ὁδοιπορίαις π. στάδια διακόσια.. τοῖς ἑκατὸν σταδίοις διήνεγκαν ἀλλήλων X.Oec.20.18

    ; πὰρ Ϝέτος each year, every year, Tab.Heracl. 1.101;

    π. τὸν ἐνιαυτὸν ἕκαστον IG12(7).5.14

     ([place name] Amorgos); παρ' ἆμάρ τε καὶ νύκτα day and night, B.Fr.7; or more generally, πὰρ τὰν ἐλαίαν in respect of each olive plant, Tab.Heracl.1.122; παρ' ἡμέραν αἱ ἀμίαι πολὺ ἐπιδήλως αὐξάνονται from day to day, per day, Arist.HA 571a21;

    τὸ παρ' ἑκάστην βάσιν γινόμενον μικρὸν πολὺ γίνεται π. πολλάς Id.Pr. 881b26

    ;

    ἡ παρ' ἡμέραν χάρις D.8.70

    ;

    τὸ παρ' ἑκάστην ἡμέραν ἡδύ Pl. Lg. 705a

    .
    c παρ' ἆμαρ on (this) day, to-day, τὸ μὲν πὰρ ἆμαρ, τὸ δέ .. to-day and to-morrow, Pi.P.11.63; but παρ' ἦμαρ to-morrow, S. OC 1455 (lyr.).
    d throughout a period of time,

    π. τὴν ζόην Hdt. 7.46

    ;

    π. τὸν βίον ἅπαντα Pl.Lg. 733a

    ;

    π. πάντα τὸν χρόνον D.18.10

    ; also more loosely, during, π. τὴν πόσιν while they were drinking, Hdt.2.121.

    δ; π. τὸν πότον Aeschin.2.156

    ;

    π. τὴν κύλικα Plu.Ant.24

    ; π. δεῖπνον or π. τὸ δεῖπνον, Id.2.737a,674f.
    II along,

    ὄνος παρ' ἄρουραν ἰών Il.11.558

    ;

    βῆ δὲ θέειν π. τεῖχος 12.352

    ;

    π. ῥόον Ὠκεανοῖο ᾔομεν Od. 11.21

    ;

    ἔπλεον π. τὴν ἤπειρον Hdt.7.193

    ;

    π. πᾶσαν τὴν ὁδόν Isoc.4.148

    ; ὀρθὴν παρ' οἶμον.. τύμβον κατόψει straight along the road, E.Alc. 835;

    παρ' ὅλην τὴν φάραγγα Plb.10.30.3

    ; παρ' αὐτὴν τὴν χαράδραν παραπορευομένων ib.9; for παραβάλλειν π., v. supr. c. 1.4b.
    2 strictly according to, without deviating from,

    εἶμι π. στάθμην ὀρθὴν ὁδόν Thgn. 945

    , cf. S.Fr.474.5; ὠμοί τε δούλοις πάντα καὶ π. στάθμην, i.e. too strict, A.Ag. 1045; π. τὸν λόγον ὃν ἀποφέρουσιν.. ἐπιδείξω I will prove to you strictly according to the accounts which they themselves submit, D.27.34.
    III past, beyond,

    παρὰ σκοπιὴν καὶ ἐρινεὸν ἠνεμόεντα.. ἐσσεύοντο Il.22.145

    , cf. Od.3.172, 24.12;

    βῆ δὲ π. Κρουνούς h.Ap. 425

    ; π. τὴν Βαβυλῶνα παριέναι pass by Babylon, X.Cyr.5.2.29; παρ' αὐτὴν τὴν χύτραν ἄκραν ὁρῶντες looking over the edge of.., Ar.Av. 390.
    2 metaph., over and above, in addition to,

    οὐκ ἔστι π. ταῦτ' ἄλλα Id.Nu. 698

    ;

    π. ταῦτα πάντα ἕτερόν τι Pl.Phd. 74a

    , cf.R. 337d, D.18.139, X.HG 1.5.5; ἑκὼν ἐπόνει π. τοὺς ἄλλους more than the others, Id.Ages.5.3, cf. Mem.4.4.1, Oec.20.16;

    ἃ τῷ ῥαψῳδῷ προσήκει καὶ σκοπεῖσθαι καὶ διακρίνειν π. τοὺς ἄλλους ἀνθρώπους Pl. Ion 539e

    .
    3 metaph., in excess over, πὰρ δύναμιν beyond one's strength, Il.13.787, cf. Th.1.70, Hyp.Lyc.16, Arist.Rh.Al. 1423b29;

    π. τὴν δ. Id.Po. 1451b38

    .
    4 metaph., in transgression or violation of,

    π. μοῖραν Od.14.509

    ;

    π. μοῖραν Δίος Alc.Supp. 14.10

    ; παρ' αἶσαν, παρὰ δίκαν, Pi.P.8.13, O.2.16, etc.;

    π. τὸ δίκαιον Th.5.90

    , etc.; π. τὰς σπονδάς, τὸν νόμον, Id.1.67, X.HG1.7.14;

    π. φύσιν Th.6.17

    , cf. Pl.Lg. 747b; π. τὴν στήλην prob. in IG12.45.20; π. καιρόν out of season, Pi.O.8.24, etc.; π. γνώμαν ib.12.10, cf. A.Supp. 454; π. δόξαν, π. τὸ δοκοῦν ἡμῖν, π. λόγον, Th.3.93, 1.84, Plb.2.38.5; παρ' ἐλπίδα or ἐλπίδας, A.Ag. 899, S.Ant. 392, etc.; πὰρ μέλος out of tune, Pi.N.7.69;

    π. τὴν ἀξίαν Th.7.77

    , etc.; π. τὸ εἰωθός, τὸ καθεστηκός, Id.4.17, 1.98.
    5 π. τοσοῦτον ἦλθε κινδύνου, = παρῆλθε τοσοῦτον κινδύνου, passed over so much ground within the sphere of danger, i.e. incurred such imminent peril, Id.3.49, cf. 7.2; in such phrases the tmesis was forgotten, and the acc. came to be governed by παρά, which thus came to mean 'by such and such a margin', ' with so much to spare', ἐνίκησαν π. πολύ, ἡσσηθέντες π. πολύ, Id.1.29, 2.89, cf. Pl. Ap. 36a; παρὰ δ' ὀλίγον ἀπέφυγες only just, E.IT 870 (lyr.);

    παρ' ὀλίγον ἢ διέφευγον ἢ ἀπώλλυντο Th.7.71

    ; δεινότατον π. πολύ by far, Ar.Pl. 445; παρ' ὅσον quatenus, Luc.Nec.17, etc.; π. δύο ψήφους ἀπέφυγε by two votes, Hyp.Eux.28, cf. D.23.205;

    π. τέτταρας ψήφους μετέσχε τῆς πόλεως Is.3.37

    ; π. τοσοῦτον ἐγένετο αὐτῷ μὴ περιπεσεῖν by so much (= little) he missed falling in with.., Th.8.33; π. πέντε ναῦς πλέον ἀνδρὶ ἑκάστῳ ἢ τρεῖς ὀβολοὶ ὡμολογήθησαν ib.29; οὐ π. μικρὸν ἐποίησαν they made no little difference, Isoc.4.59.
    b in phrases like π. τοσοῦτον ἦλθε κινδύνου, τοσοῦτον was sts. understood of the interval from danger, etc., and παρά came to mean 'by so much short of' (

    τὸ π. μικρὸν ὥσπερ οὐδὲν ἀπέχειν δοκεῖ Arist.Ph. 197a29

    ), within such and such a distance of, so near to, τὴν Ἠϊόνα π. νύκτα ἐγένετο (sc. αὐτῷ) λαβεῖν he was within one night of taking E., Th.4.106; π. μικρὸν ἦλθον ἀποθανεῖν I came within a little of.., Isoc. 19.22, cf. Plb.1.43.7, Plu. Caes. 39; παρ' ἐλάχιστον ἦλθε.. ἀφελέσθαι was within an ace of taking away, Th.8.76; παρ' οὐδὲν μὲν ἦλθον ἀποκτεῖναι (were within a mere nothing, within an ace of killing him),

    ἐξεκήρυξαν δ' ἐκ πόλεως Aeschin. 3.258

    , cf. Plu.Pyrrh. 14, Alex.62; π. τοσοῦτον ἦλθε διαφυγεῖν so near he came to escaping, Luc.Cat.4;

    παρὰ ἓν πάλαισμα ἔδραμε νικᾶν Ὀλυμπιάδα Hdt.9.33

    ;

    παρ' οὐδὲν ἐλθόντες τοῦ ἀποβαλεῖν Plb.1.45.14

    , cf. 2.55.4, D.S.17.42: hence without ἐγένετο or ἐλθεῖν, π. μίαν μονάδα (less) by one, i.e. less one, Nicom.Ar.1.8; τεσσαράκοντα π. μίαν, = 39, 2 Ep.Cor.11.24; παρ' ἕνα τοσοῦτοι the same number less one, Plu. Publ.9; σύ μοι παρ' ἕνα ἥκεις ἄγων you have brought me one too few, Luc.Cat.4;

    δύναται π. δύο συλλαβὰς εἶναι τὸ καταληκτόν Heph.4.2

    ; τὰ ὁλοκόττινα ηὑρέθησαν π. ἑπτὰ κεράτια seven carats short, PMasp.70.2 (vi A. D.); πάντες παρ' ἕνα, πάντες παρ' ὀλίγους, all save one (a few), Plu.Cat.Mi.20, Ant.5;

    ἔτη δύο π. ἡμέρας δύο IG5(1).801

     ([place name] Laconia); of one Μάρκος, θηρίον εἶ π. γράμμα you are a bear ([etym.] ἄρκος) all but a letter, AP11.231 (Ammian.); ὡς π. τι καὶ τὰς ὄψεις ἀφανίσαι so that he all but (lit. less something) lost his sight, Vett.Val.228.6; π. τι βυθίζεσθαι v.l. in Ev.Luc.5.7; τὸ π. τοῦτο the figure less that, i.e. the remainder or difference, PTeb.99.10 (ii B. C.), cf. POxy.264.4 (i A. D.), PAmh.2.148.5 (v A. D.); hence of any difference whether of excess or defect, οὐδὲν π. τοῦτο ποιούμενοι τοὺς.. Λευκανούς τε καὶ τοὺς.. Σαυνίτας making no difference between.., Str.6.1.3, cf. 14.5.11, Plu.2.24c.
    6 hence of the margin by which anything increases or decreases, and so of the cause according to which anything comes into existence or varies,

    τὸ εὖ π. μικρὸν διὰ πολλῶν ἀριθμῶν γίνεται Polyclit.2

     (cf. μικρός III. 5 c); διαφέρει π. τὰς τῶν παθημάτων ἐναντιώσεις according to.., Arist.HA 486b5;

    μεταπίπτει π. τὰ κλίματα Gem. 5.29

    , cf. 11.5, al.; π. τὰ πράγματα cj. in Apollod.Car.11.
    7 more generally of the margin by which an event occurs, i.e. of the necessary and sufficient cause or motive (

    τὸ μὴ π. τοῦτο γίνεσθαι τότε λέγομεν, ὅταν ἀναιρεθέντος τούτου μηδὲν ἧττον περαίνηται ὁ συλλογισμός Arist.APr. 65b6

    , cf. 48a24, al.), κεινὰν π. δίαιταν just for the sake of unsatisfying food, Pi.O.2.65; ἕκαστος οὐ π. τὴν ἑαυτοῦ ἀμέλειαν οἴεται βλάψειν each thinks that his own negligence will not suffice to cause injury, Th.1.141, cf. Isoc.3.48; π. τὴν αὑτοῦ ἁμαρτίαν all through his own fault, Antipho 3.4.5, cf. Isoc.6.52, D.4.11, 18.232; πολλὰ.. ἐστιν αἴτια τούτων, καὶ οὐ παρ' ἓν οὐδὲ δύ' εἰς τοῦτο τὰ πράγματ' ἀφῖκται not from one or two causes only, Id.9.2; οὐ π. τοῦτο οὐκ ἔστι it does not follow that it is not.., 1 Ep.Cor.12.15; π. τὸ τὴν ἀρίθμησιν ποιήσασθαι ἐξ ἑτοίμου τοὺς ἐργώνας οὐκ ὀλίγα χρήματα περιεποίησε τῇ πόλει by the simple fact of prompt payment, IPE12.32B35 (Olbia, iii B. C.);

    οὐδὲν ἂν παρ' ἕνα ἄνθρωπον ἐγένετο τούτων Lycurg.63

    , cf. Plb.3.103.2, 18.28.6, al.; οὐδεὶς παρ' ἑαυτόν ἐστι βασιλεύς thanks to himself alone, Aristeas 224;

    παρ' αὑτὸν ἀτυχεῖ Arr.Epict.3.24.2

    , cf. Phld.Rh.2.16 S.;

    παρ' ἡμᾶς ἡ τῶν ἀγαθῶν ἀπόστασις Hierocl. in CA25p.477M.

    ; εἶναι π. τοῦτο σωτηρίαν τε πόλει καὶ τοὐναντίον, i.e. on this depends.., Pl.Lg. 715d, cf. X.Eq.Mag.1.5, D.C.Fr.36.5;

    π. μίαν ἡμέραν καὶ ἓν πρᾶγμα καὶ ἀπόλλυται προκοπὴ καὶ σῴζεται Epict.Ench.51.2

    ; π. τὸ Ἕλληνά με εἶναι just because I am a Greek, UPZ7.13 (ii B. C.);

    π. τὸ ἀγαπᾶν αὐτὸν αὐτήν LXX Ge.29.20

    , cf. Ex.14.11; later more loosely, because of.., Phld.Rh.1.158 S., Gem.6.24, etc.; οὐδὲν π. σὲ γέγονε it is no fault of yours, PRyl.243.6 (ii A. D.), cf. POxy.1420.7 (ii A. D.).
    8 of a limit of possibility,

    εἴπερ ἐνεδέχετο π. τοὺς παρόντας καιρούς D.18.239

    ; πεῖσαι τό γε παρ' αὑτόν to persuade (the judges) so far as in you lies, Arr.Epict.2.2.20; οἴμωζε παρ' ἐμέ as far as I am concerned, for all I care, Ar.Av. 846.
    D POSITION: παρά may follow its Subst. in all three cases, but then becomes by anastrophe πάρα: when the ult. is elided, the practice varies,

    τῇσι παρ' Il.18.400

    ; but Ἡφαίστοιο πάρ' ib. 191.
    E παρά abs., as ADV., near, together, Il.1.611, al., E.IA 201 (lyr.).
    F πάρα (with anastrophe) stands for πάρεστι and πάρεισι, Il.1.174, Hes.Op. 454, A.Pers. 167, Hdt.1.42, al., S.El. 285, Ar.Ach. 862, etc.
    I alongside of, beside, of rest, παράκειμαι, παράλληλοι, παρέζομαι, πάρειμι (εἰμί), παρίστημι; of motion, παραπλέω, πάρειμι ([etym.] εἶμι).
    II to the side of, to, παραδίδωμι, παρέχω.
    III to one side of, by, past, παρέρχομαι, παροίχομαι, παραπέμπω, παρακμάζω, παρατρέχω.
    IV metaph.,
    1 aside or beyond, i.e. amiss, wrong, παραβαίνω, παράγω, παροράω, παρορκέω, παρακούω, παραγιγνώσκω.
    2 of comparison, as in παραβάλλω, παρατίθημι.
    3 of alteration or change, as in παραλλάσσω, παραπείθω, παραπλάσσω, παρατεκταίνω, παραυδάω, παράφημι.
    4 of a side-issue, παραπόλλυμι. (Cogn. with Goth. faúr 'along', Lat. por-.)

    Greek-English dictionary (Αγγλικά Ελληνικά-λεξικό) > παρά

  • 2 ἵστημι

    ἵστημι (Hom.+, ins, pap [Mayser 353]; LXX [Thackeray 247f]; pseudepigr., Philo, Joseph., apolog. exc. Ar.) and also ἱστάνω (since I B.C. SIG 1104, 26 ἱστανόμενος; pap [Mayser, loc. cit., with ἀνθιστάνω documented here as early as III B.C.]; Epict. 3, 12, 2; LXX [Ezk 17:14; Thackeray, loc. cit.]; later wr. in Psaltes 236) Ro 3:31; Hs 8, 1, 10 (s. Whittaker on 8, 1, 8; s. B-D-F §93; Mlt-H. 202). Fut. στήσω; 1 aor. ἔστησα; 2 aor. ἔστην, impv. στῆθι, inf. στῆναι, ptc. στάς; pf. ἕστηκα ( I stand), ptc. ἑστηκώς, ός and ἑστώς En 12:3; JosAs 7:2; J 12:29,-ῶσα J 8:9 v.l., neut. ἑστώς Rv 14:1 v.l. (s. B-D-F §96; W-S. §14, 5; Mlt-H. 222) and ἑστός, inf. always ἑστάναι; plpf. εἱστήκειν ( I stood) or ἱστήκειν GPt 2:3, third pl. εἱστήκεισαν Mt 12:46; J 18:18; Ac 9:7; Rv 7:11 (W-H. spell it ἱστ. everywhere); ἑστάκαμεν w. act. mng. 1 Macc 11:34; fut. mid. στήσομαι Rv 18:15. Pass.: 1 fut. σταθήσομαι; 1 aor. ἐστάθην (PEg2 65). S. στήκω. Trans.: A. Intr.: B, C, D.
    A. trans. (pres., impf., fut., 1 aor. act.; s. B-D-F §97, 1; Mlt-H. 241) gener. ‘put, place, set’.
    ① to cause to be in a place or position, set, place, bring, allow to come τινά someone, lit. ἐν τῷ συνεδρίῳ Ac 5:27. εἰς αὐτούς before them 22:30. ἐκ δεξιῶν τινος at someone’s right (hand) Mt 25:33. ἐν μέσῳ in the midst, among 18:2; Mk 9:36; J 8:3. ἐνώπιόν τινος before someone Ac 6:6. Also κατενώπιόν τινος Jd 24. ἐπί τι upon someth. Mt 4:5; Lk 4:9. παρά τινι beside someone 9:47.
    ② to propose someone for an obligation, put forward, propose, lit. (e.g. Just., A I, 60, 3 Μωυσέα … τύπον σταυροῦ … στῆσαι ἐπὶ τῇ ἁγίᾳ σκηνῇ) τινά for a certain purpose: the candidates for election to the apostleship Ac 1:23. μάρτυρας ψευδεῖς 6:13 (cp. Mel., P. 93, 700 ψευδομάρτυρες).
    ③ to set up or put into force, establish, fig. ext. of 1 (cp. Gen 26:3 τὸν ὅρκον; Ex 6:4) τὴν ἰδίαν δικαιοσύνην Ro 10:3. τὸ δεύτερον (opp. ἀναιρεῖν τὸ πρῶτον, a ref. to sacrificial system) Hb 10:9.—Of legal enforcement κύριε, μὴ στήσῃς αὐτοῖς ταύτην τ. ἁμαρτίαν Lord, do not hold this sin against them Ac 7:60 (contrast ἀφίημι 1 Macc 13:38f; 15:5; Stephen’s expression=ἄφες Lk 23:34; s. Beginn. IV, ad loc.).
    ④ to validate someth. that is in force or in practice, reinforce validity of, uphold, maintain, validate τὶ someth. fig. ext. of 1 (1 Macc 2:27 τὴν διαθήκην) τὴν παράδοσιν ὑμῶν validate or maintain your own tradition Mk 7:9. νόμον ἱστάνομεν we uphold (the) law Ro 3:31 (s. καταργέω 2).
    ⑤ to cause to be steadfast, make someone stand δυνατεῖ ὁ κύριος στῆσαι αὐτόν Ro 14:4.
    ⓐ set/fix a time a period of time ἡμέραν (s. ἡμέρα 3a) Ac 17:31.
    ⓑ determine a monetary amount οἱ δὲ ἔστησαν αὐτῷ τριάκοντα ἀργύρια Mt 26:15 (=Zech 11:12 ἔστησαν τὸν μισθόν μου τριάκοντα ἀργύρους), presents a special problem for interpreters because of the author’s theological and narrative interests, which prompt him to connect an allusion here to Zech 11:12 in anticipation of a fulfillment statement at Mt 27:9f, which in haggadic fashion draws on Zech 11:13 in the longer form of the Mt and Jer 32 (Mt 39):7–9 (s. JDoeve, Jewish Hermeneutics in the Synoptic Gospels and Acts, ’54, 185–87). Jer 39:9 and Zech 11:12 use the verb ἱ. in the sense weigh out on scales (Hom.; X., Cyr. 8, 2, 21, Mem. 1, 1, 9 al.; GDI p. 870, n49 A [Ephesus VI B.C.] 40 minas ἐστάθησαν; Is 46:6; Jer 39:9; 2 Esdr 8:25), and some (e.g. BWeiss, HHoltzmann, JWeiss; FSchulthess, ZNW 21, 1922, 227f; Field, Notes 19f) interpret Mt 26:15 in this sense. Of course Mt’s readers would know that coinage of their time was not ‘weighed out’ and would understand ἱ. in the sense of striking a bargain (ἵστημι=set a price, make an offer, close a bargain: Herodas 7, 68 pair of shoes; BGU 1116, 8 [I B.C.]; 912, 25 [I A.D.]; PRainer 206, 10 [II A.D.] κεφάλαιον), they set out (=offered, allowed) for him (=paid him) 30 silver coins (Wlh., OHoltzmann, Schniewind), but the more sophisticated among them would readily recognize the obsolete mng. Ac 7:60 is sometimes interpreted in a related sense, but the absence of a direct object of amount paid suggests that the pass. is better placed in 3 above.
    B. intr., aor. and fut. forms
    ① to desist from movement and be in a stationary position, stand still, stop (Hom., Aristot.; Philostrat., Ep. 36, 2 ὁ ποταμὸς στήσεται; TestSol 7:3 οὕτως ἔστη ἡ αὔρα) Lk 24:17. στὰς ὁ Ἰησοῦς ἐφώνησεν αὐτούς Mt 20:32.—Mk 10:49; Lk 7:14; 17:12; 18:40. στῆναι τὸ ἅρμα Ac 8:38. ἀπὸ μακρόθεν ἔστησαν Rv 18:17; cp. vs. 15. ἔστησαν ἐν τῷ τόπῳ τοῦ σπηλαίου GJs 19:2. ἔστη ἐπὶ τόπου πεδινοῦ he took his stand on a level place Lk 6:17. Of a star ἐστάθη ἐπάνω οὗ ἦν τὸ παιδίον Mt 2:9; also ἐπὶ τὴν κεφαλὴν τοῦ παιδίου GJs 21:3. Of a flow of blood come to an end ἔστη ἡ ῥύσις τ. αἵματος Lk 8:44 (cp. Ex 4:25 [though HKosmala, Vetus Test. 12, ’62, 28 renders it as an emphatic εἶναι] Heraclid. Pont., Fgm. 49 W.; POxy 1088, 21 [I A.D.]; Cyranides p. 117 note γυναικὶ … αἷμα ἵστημι παραχρῆμα). στῆθι stand Js 2:3. ἡ χεὶρ αὐτοῦ ἔστη ἄνω his hand remained (motionless) upraised GJs 18:3 (not pap).
    ② to come up in the presence of others, come up, stand, appear ἔμπροσθέν τινος before someone Mt 27:11; Lk 21:36. Also ἐνώπιόν τινος Ac 10:30; GJs 11:2 (κατενώπιον TestSol 22:13; Just., D. 127, 3) or ἐπί τινος: σταθήσεσθε you will have to appear Mt 10:18 v.l.; Mk 13:9; ἐπί τοῦ παλατίου AcPl Ha 9, 20. στῆθι εἰς τὸ μέσον Lk 6:8; cp. vs. 8b; J 20:19, 26 (Vi. Aesopi I c. 6 p. 243, 15 Αἴσωπος στὰς εἰς τὸ μέσον ἀνέκραξεν). Also ἐν μέσῳ Lk 24:36; Ac 17:22; Ox 1 verso, 11 (s. Unknown Sayings, 69–71). ἔστη εἰς τὸ κριτήριον she stood before the court GJs 15:2. Cp. J 21:4; Rv 12:18; Lk 7:38. Step up or stand to say someth. or make a speech Lk 18:11. Cp. 19:8; Ac 2:14; 5:20; 11:13 al. ἔστησαν … προσδοκῶντες τὸν Ζαχαρίαν they stood waiting for Z. GJs 24:1. Pract. in the sense of the pf. δυνάμενοι … ἀλλʼ οὐδὲ στῆναι (the cult images) which could not remain standing AcPl Ha 1, 20 (cp. ἵστατο δένδρον κυπάρισσος TestAbr A 3 p. 79, 17 [Stone p. 6]; ὁ τόπος ἐν ᾧ ἱστάμεθα GrBar 6:13).
    ③ to stand up against, resist, w. πρὸς and acc. offer resistance (Thu. 5, 104) Eph 6:11; abs. resist (Ex 14:13) vs. 13. (Cp. the term στάσις in the sense of ‘rebellion’.)
    ④ stand firm so as to remain stable, stand firm, hold one’s ground (Ps 35:13) in battle (X., An. 1, 10, 1) Eph 6:14. σταθήσεται will stand firm Ro 14:4a. τίς δύναται σταθῆναι; Rv 6:17. εἰς ἣν στῆτε stand fast in it (Goodsp., Probs. 198) 1 Pt:12. Of house, city, or kingdom Mt 12:25f; Mk 3:24f; Lk 11:18. Cp. Mk 3:26. The OT expr. (Dt 19:15) ἵνα ἐπὶ στόματος δύο μαρτύρων ἢ τριῶν σταθῇ πᾶν ῥῆμα Mt 18:16; 2 Cor 13:1.
    ⑤ come to a standing position, stand up ἐπὶ τοὺς πόδας on one’s feet (Ezk 2:1) Ac 26:16; Rv 11:11. Abs. Ac 3:8.
    C. intr., perf. and plupf.
    ① to be in a standing position, I stand, I stood of bodily position, e.g. of a speaker J 7:37; Ac 5:25, of hearers J 12:29 or spectators Mt 27:47; Lk 23:35; Ac 1:11, of accusers Lk 23:10. Cp. J 18:5, 16, 18ab, 25; 19:25; Ac 16:9 al.
    ② to be at a place, stand (there), be (there), w. the emphasis less on ‘standing’ than on ‘being, existing’.
    ⓐ position indicated by adv. of place ἔξω Mt 12:46f; Lk 8:20; 13:25. μακρόθεν Lk 18:13. ἀπὸ μακρόθεν at a distance 23:49; Rv 18:10. ἐκεῖ Mk 11:5. ὅπου 13:14. ὧδε Mt 16:28; 20:6b. αὐτοῦ Lk 9:27; ἀπέναντι AcPl Ha 3, 30.
    ⓑ w. place indicated by a prep. ἐκ δεξιῶν τινος at the right (hand) of someone or someth. Lk 1:11; Ac 7:55f (HOwen, NTS 1, ’54/55, 224–26). ἐν αὐτοῖς among them Ac 24:21; w. ἐν and dat. of place Mt 20:3; 24:15; J 11:56; Rv 19:17. ἐν μέσῳ J 8:9 v.l. μέσος ὑμῶν 1:26 (v.l. στήκει). ἐπί w. gen. (X., Cyr. 3, 3, 66; Apollodorus [II B.C.]: 244 Fgm. 209 Jac. ἐπὶ τ. θύρας) Ac 5:23; 21:40; 24:20; 25:10; Rv 10:5, 8; AcPl Ha 7, 37; w. dat. Ac 7:33; w. acc. Mt 13:2; Rv 3:20; 7:1; 14:1; 15:2; GJs 5:2 (ἕστηκας codd., ἔστης pap). παρά w. acc. of place Lk 5:1f. πέραν τῆς θαλάσσης J 6:22. πρό w. gen. of place Ac 12:14. πρός w. dat. of place J 20:11. σύν τινι Ac 4:14. μετά τινος AcPl Ha 11, 3. κύκλῳ τινός around someth. Rv 7:11. W. ἐνώπιον (functioning as prep.) ἐνώπιόν τινος Rv 7:9; 11:4; 12:4; 20:12.
    ⓒ abs. (Epict. 4, 1, 88 ἑστῶσα of the citadel, simply standing there; Tat. 26, 2 παρατρέχοντας μὲν ὑμᾶς, ἑστῶτα δὲ τὸν αἰῶνα) Mt 26:73; J 1:35; 3:29; 20:14; Ac 22:25. τὰ πρόβατα εἱστήκει the sheep stood still GJs 18:2 (not pap). The verb standing alone in the sense stand around idle (Eur., Iph. Aul. 861; Aristoph., Av. 206, Eccl. 852; Herodas 4, 44) Mt 20:6a. ἀργός can be added (Aristoph., Eccl. 879f, Pax 256 ἕστηκας ἀργός) vs. 6a v.l., 6b (w. the question cp. Eubulus Com., Fgm. 15, 1 K. τί ἕστηκας ἐν πύλαις; Herodas 5, 40). W. modifying words (Pla., Phdr. 275d ἕστηκε ὡς ζῶντα τὰ ἔκγονα) εἱστήκεισαν ἐνεοί they stood there speechless Ac 9:7. ὡς ἐσφαγμένον Rv 5:6. cp. Ac 26:6. εἱστήκει ἀπεκδεχόμενος AcPl Ant 13, 22 (=Aa I, 237, 5).
    ③ to stand in attendance on someone, attend upon, be the servant of Rv 8:2 (RCharles, Rv ICC vol. 1, p. 225).
    ④ stand firm in belief, stand firm of personal commitment in gener. (opp. πεσεῖν), fig. ext. of 1, 1 Cor 10:12; 2 Cl 2:6. τ. πίστει ἕστηκας you stand firm because of your faith Ro 11:20; cp. 2 Cor 1:24. ὸ̔ς ἕστηκεν ἐν τ. καρδίᾳ αὐτοῦ ἑδραῖος one who stands firm in his heart 1 Cor 7:37. ὁ θεμέλιος ἕστηκεν the foundation stands (unshaken) 2 Ti 2:19 (Stob. 4, 41, 60 [vol. V, p. 945]: Apelles, when he was asked why he represented Tyche [Fortune] in a sitting position, answered οὐχ ἕστηκεν γάρ=because she can’t stand, i.e. has no stability; Hierocles 11, 441 ἑστῶτος τοῦ νόμου=since the law stands firm [unchanged]; Procop. Soph., Ep. 47 μηδὲν ἑστηκὸς κ. ἀκίνητον; 75).
    ⑤ to be in a condition or state, stand or be in someth., fig. ext. of 1; grace (Hierocles 12, 446 ἐν ἀρετῇ) Ro 5:2; within the scope of the gospel 1 Cor 15:1; in truth J 8:44.
    D. intr., pres. mid. to have a beginning, begin, calendaric expression (as old as Hom.) μὴν ἱστάμενος the month just beginning (oft. ins) MPol 21—B. 835. DELG. M-M. TW.

    Ελληνικά-Αγγλικά παλαιοχριστιανική Λογοτεχνία > ἵστημι

  • 3 εἰ

    εἰ, [dialect] Att.-[dialect] Ion. and Arc. (for εἰκ, v. infr. 11 ad init.), = [dialect] Dor. and [dialect] Aeol. αἰ, αἰκ (q. v.), Cypr.
    A

    ἤ Inscr.Cypr.135.10

     H., both εἰ and αἰ in [dialect] Ep.:— Particle used interjectionally with imper. and to express a wish, but usu. either in conditions, if, or in indirect questions, whether. In the former use its regular negative is μή; in the latter, οὐ.
    A INTERJECTIONALLY, in Hom., come now! c. imper.,

    εἰ δὲ.. ἄκουσον Il.9.262

    ; εἰ δὲ καὶ αὐτοὶ φευγόντων ib.46; most freq. with ἄγε (q. v.), 1.302, al.
    2 in wishes, c. opt.,

    ἀλλ' εἴ τις.. καλέσειεν 10.111

    , cf. 24.74; so later,

    εἴ μοι ξυνείη μοῖρα S.OT 863

     (lyr.);

    εἴ μοι γένοιτο φθόγγος ἐν βραχίοσιν E.Hec. 836

    : more freq. folld. by

    γάρ, αἲ γὰρ δὴ οὕτως εἴη Il.4.189

    , al.;

    εἰ γὰρ γενοίμην ἀντὶ σοῦ νεκρός E.Hipp. 1410

    ;

    εἰ γὰρ γένοιτο X.Cyr.6.1.38

    ;

    εἰ γὰρ ἐν τούτῳ εἴη Pl.Prt. 310d

    ; of unattained wishes, in Hom. only c. opt.,

    εἰ γὰρ ἐγὼν.. Διὸς πάϊς αἰγιόχοιο εἴην Il.13.825

    ;

    Ζεῦ πάτερ, αἰ γὰρ ἐμὸς πόσις εἴη Alcm.29

    ; later with past tenses of ind.,

    εἰ γάρ μ' ὑπὸ γῆν.. ἧκεν A.Pr. 152

     (anap.); εἰ γὰρ τοσαύτην δύναμιν εἶχον ὥστε .. E.Alc. 1072: twice in Od. c. inf. (cf. the use of inf. in commands),

    αἰ γὰρ τοῖος ἐὼν.. ἐμὸς γαμβρὸς καλέεσθαι 7.311

    , cf. 24.376.
    b εἴθε, [dialect] Ep. αἴθε, is freq. used in wishes in the above constructions,

    εἴθε οἱ αὐτῷ Ζεὺς ἀγαθὸν τελέσειεν 2.33

    ;

    εἴθ' ὣς ἡβώοιμι Il.7.157

    ;

    ἰὼ γᾶ, εἴθ' ἔμ' ἐδέξω A.Ag. 1537

     (lyr.);

    εἴθε σοι, ὦ Περίκλεις, τότε συνεγενόμην X.Mem.1.2.46

    : later c. inf.,

    γαίης χθαμαλωτέρη εἴθε.. κεῖσθαι AP9.284

     (Crin.).
    c εἰ γάρ, εἴθε are also used with ὤφελον ([dialect] Ep. ὤφελλον), of past unattained wishes,

    αἴθ' ὤφελλες στρατοῦ ἄλλου σημαίνειν Il.14.84

    ; εἰ γὰρ ὤφελον [κατιδεῖν] Pl.R. 432c.
    d folld. by a clause expressing a consequence of the fulfilment of the wish, αἰ γὰρ τοῦτο.. ἔπος τετελεσμένον εἴη· τῷ κε τάχα γνοίης .. Od. 15.536, cf. 17.496, al.; sts. hard to distinguish from εἰ in conditions (which may be derived from this use),

    εἴ μοί τι πίθοιο, τό κεν πολὺ κέρδιον εἴη Il.7.28

    .
    B IN CONDITIONS, if:
    I with INDIC.,
    1 with all tenses (for [tense] fut., v. infr. 2), to state a condition, with nothing implied as to its fulfilment, εἰ δ' οὕτω τοῦτ' ἐστίν, ἐμοὶ μέλλει φίλον εἶναι but if this is so, it will be.., Il.1.564: any form of the Verb may stand in apodosi,

    εἰ θεοί τι δρῶσιν αἰσχρόν, οὐκ εἰσὶν θεοί E.Fr.292.7

    ;

    εἰ δοκεῖ, πλέωμεν S.Ph. 526

    ;

    εἰ Φαῖδρον ἀγνοῶ, καὶ ἐμαυτοῦ ἐπιλέλησμαι Pl.Phdr. 228a

    ;

    κάκιστ' ἀπολοίμην, Ξανθίαν εἰ μὴ φιλῶ Ar.Ra. 579

    , cf. Od.17.475;

    εἰ θεοῦ ἦν, οὐκ ἦν αἰσχροκερδής· εἰ δ' αἰσχροκερδής, οὐκ ἦν θεοῦ Pl.R. 408c

    ;

    εἰ ταῦτα λέγων διαφθείρω τοὺς νέους, ταῦτ' ἂν εἴη βλαβερά Id.Ap. 30b

    , cf. 25b; εἰ οὗτοι ὀρθῶς ἀπέστησαν, ὑμεῖς ἂν οὐ χρεὼν ἄρχοιτε if these were right in their revolt, (it would follow that) you rule when you have no right, Th.3.40.
    b to express a general condition, if ever, whenever, sts. with [tense] pres.,

    εἴ τις δύο ἢ καὶ πλείους τις ἡμέρας λογίζεται, μάταιός ἐστιν S.Tr. 943

    : with [tense] impf.,

    εἴ τίς τι ἠρώτα ἀπεκρίνοντο Th.7.10

    : rarely with [tense] aor., D.S.31.26.1, S.E.P.1.84; cf. 111.2.
    2 with [tense] fut. (much less freq. than ἐάν c. subj.), either to express a future supposition emphatically,

    εἰ φθάσομεν τοὺς πολεμίους κατακαίνοντες οὐδεὶς ἡμῶν ἀποθανεῖται X.Cyr.7.1.19

    ;

    εἰ μὴ βοηθήσετε οὐ περιέσται τἀκεῖ Th.6.91

    ; εἰ αὕτη ἡ πόλις ληφθήσεται, ἔχεται ἡ πᾶσα Σικελία ibid.; in threats or warnings,

    εἰ μὴ καθέξεις γλῶσσαν ἔσται σοι κακά E.Fr.5

    ;

    εἰ τιμωρήσεις Πατρόκλῳ, αὐτὸς ἀποθανῇ Pl.Ap. 28c

    , cf. D.28.21: or,
    b to express a present intention or expectation, αἶρε πλῆκτρον εἰ μαχεῖ if you mean to fight, Ar.Av. 759;

    ἐγὼ μὲν οὐκ ἀνήρ.. εἰ ταῦτ' ἀνατεὶ τῇδε κείσεται κράτη S.Ant. 485

    , cf. Il.1.61, E.Hec. 863.
    3 with historical tenses, implying that the condition is or was unfulfilled.
    a with [tense] impf., referring to present time or to continued or repeated action in past time (in Hom. always the latter, Il.24.715, al.): ταῦτα οὐκ ἂν ἐδύναντο ποιεῖν, εἰ μὴ διαίτῃ μετρίᾳ ἐχρῶντο they would not be able to do this (as they do), if they did not live an abstemious life, X.Cyr.1.2.16, cf. Pl.R. 489b; οὐκ ἂν νήσων ἐκράτει, εἰ μή τι καὶ ναυτικὸν εἶχεν he ([place name] Agamemnon) would not have been master of islands, if he had not had also some naval force, Th.1.9;

    αἰ δ' ἦχες ἔσλων ἴμερον ἢ κάλων.. αἴδως κεν.. ἦχεν Sapph.28

    ; εἰ ἦσαν ἄνδρες ἀγαθοὶ.. οὐκ ἄν ποτε ταῦτα ἔπασχον if they had been good men, they would never have suffered as they did, Pl.Grg. 516e, cf. X.Mem.1.1.5; εἰ γὰρ ἐγὼ τάδε ᾔδἐ.. οὐκ ἂν ὑπεξέφυγε if I had known this.., Il.8.366.
    b with [tense] aor. referring to past time,

    εἰ μὴ ἔφυσε θεὸς μέλι.. ἔφασκον γλύσσονα σῦκα πέλεσθαι Xenoph.38

    ; εἰ μὴ ὑμεῖς ἤλθετε, ἐπορευόμεθα ἂν ἐπὶ βασιλέα had you not come, we should be on our way.., X.An.2.1.4;

    καὶ ἴσως ἂν ἀπέθανον, εἰ μὴ ἡ ἀρχὴ διὰ ταχέων κατελύθη Pl.Ap. 32d

    , cf. Il.5.680, Od.4.364, D.4.5, 27.63: with [tense] plpf. in apodosi,

    εἰ τριάκοντα μόναι μετέπεσον τῶν ψήφων, ἀπεπεφεύγη ἄν Pl. Ap. 36a

    .
    c rarely with [tense] plpf. referring to action finished in past or present time, λοιπὸν δ' ἂν ἦν ἡμῖν ἔτι περὶ τῆς πόλεως διαλεχθῆναι, εἰ μὴ προτέρα τῶν ἄλλων τὴν εἰρήνην ἐπεποίητο if she had not (as she has done) made peace before the rest, Isoc.5.56, cf. Pl.Ti. 21c.
    II with SUBJ., εἰ is regularly joined with ἄν ([dialect] Ep. κε, κεν), cf. ἐάν: Arc. εἰκαν in Tegean Inscrr. of iv B. C. (IG5(2).3.16, 31, 6.2, SIG306.34) should be understood as εἰκ ἄν (εἰ: εἰκ = οὐ: οὐκ), since εἰ δ' ἄν is also found in IG5(2).3.2, 6.45, and εἰκ alone, ib.3.21; but ἄν ([etym.] κε, κεν) are freq. absent in Hom. as Od.5.221, 14.373 (and cf. infr. 2), and Lyr., Pi. (who never uses εἰ with ἄν or κε ([etym.] ν)) P.4.266, al.; in dialects,

    αἰ δείλητ' ἀγχωρεῖν IG9(1).334.6

     ([dialect] Locr., v B. C.), cf. Foed.[dialect] Dor. ap. Th.5.79; rarely in Hdt.,

    εἰ μὴ ἀναβῇ 2.13

    ; occasionally in Trag., A.Eu. 234, S.OT 198 (lyr.), etc.; very rarely in [dialect] Att. Prose,

    εἰ ξυστῶσιν αἱ πόλεις Th.6.21

    ;

    εἴ τι που ἄλσος ἢ τέμενος ἀφειμένον ᾖ Pl.Lg. 761c

    : in later Prose,

    εἴ τις θελήσῃ Apoc.11.5

    ;

    εἰ φονεύῃ Plot.2.9.9

    , cf. Procl. Inst.26.
    1 when the apodosis is [tense] fut., to express a future condition more distinctly and vividly than εἰ c. opt., but less so than εἰ c. [tense] fut. ind. (supr. 1.2a); εἰ δέ κεν ὣς ἕρξῃς καί τοι πείθωνται Ἀχαιοί, γνώσῃ ἔπειθ' .. if thou do thus.., thou shalt know, Il.2.364, cf. 1.128, 3.281, Od.17.549;

    ἂν δέ τις ἀνθιστῆται, σὺν ὑμῖν πειρασόμεθα χειροῦσθαι X. An.7.3.11

    ; ἂν μὴ νῦν ἐθέλωμεν ἐκεῖ πολεμεῖν αὐτῷ, ἐνθάδ' ἴσως ἀναγκασθησόμεθα τοῦτο ποιεῖν if we be not now willing, D.4.50, cf. X.Cyr. 5.3.27: folld. by imper., ἢν εἰρήνης δοκῆτε δεῖσθαι, ἄνευ ὅπλων ἥκετε ib.3.2.13, cf. 5.4.30.
    2 when the apodosis is present, denoting customary or repeated action, to express a general condition, if ever, ἤν ποτε δασμὸς ἵκηται, σοὶ τὸ γέρας πολὺ μεῖζον (sc. ἐστί) whenever a division comes, your prize is (always) greater, Il.1.166; ἢν ἐγγὺς ἔλθῃ θάνατος, οὐδεὶς βούλεται θνῄσκειν if death come near, E.Alc. 671; with ἄν omitted,

    εἴ περ γάρ τε χόλον.. καταπέψῃ ἀλλά.. ἔχει κότον Il.1.81

    .
    b with Rhet. present in apodosis, ἐὰν μὴ οἱ φιλόσοφοι βασιλεύσωσιν, οὐκ ἔστι κακῶν παῦλα there is (i.e. can be, will be) no rest.., Pl.R. 473d.
    III with OPTATIVE (never with ἄν in early Gr., later ἐάν c. opt., Dam.Pr. 114, al.),
    1 to express a future condition less definitely than ἐάν c. subj., usu. with opt. with ἄν in apod., ἦ κεν γηθήσαι Πρίαμος Πριάμοιό τε παῖδες.. εἰ σφῶιν τάδε πάντα πυθοίατο μαρναμένοιιν surely they would exult, if they should hear.., Il.1.255, cf. 7.28, Od.3.223;

    εἴης φορητὸς οὐκ ἄν, εἰ πράσσοις καλῶς A.Pr. 979

    ;

    οὐδὲ γὰρ ἄν με ἐπαινοίη, εἰ ἐξελαύνοιμι τοὺς εὐεργέτας X.An.7.7.11

    ;

    οἶκος δ' αὐτός, εἰ φθογγὴν λάβοι, σαφέστατ' ἂν λέξειεν A.Ag.37

    , etc.: [tense] fut. opt. is f.l. in Pl.Tht. 164a: with [tense] pres. ind. in apod., Xenoph.34.3, Democr.253: with [tense] fut.ind., Meliss.5.
    b in Hom.sts. with [tense] pres. opt., to express an unfulfilled present condition, εἰ μὲν νῦν ἐπὶ ἄλλῳ ἀεθλεύοιμεν, ἦ τ' ἂν ἐγὼ τὰ πρῶτα φεροίμην if we were now contending, etc., Il.23.274: rarely in Trag., εἰ μὴ κνίζοι ( = εἰ μὴ ἔκνιζε) E.Med. 568; also

    εἰ ἀναγκαῖον εἴη ἀδικεῖν ἢ ἀδικεῖσθαι, ἑλοίμην ἂν μᾶλλον ἀδικεῖσθαι Pl.Grg. 469c

    .
    2 when the apodosis is past, denoting customary or repeated action, to express a general condition in past time (corresponding to use of subj. in present time, supr. 11.2); once in Hom.,

    εἴ τίς με.. ἐνίπτοι, ἀλλὰ σὺ τόν γ'.. κατέρυκες Il.24.768

    ; εἰ δέ τινας θορυβουμένους αἴσθοιτο.., κατασβεννύναι τὴν ταραχὴν ἐπειρᾶτο if he should see ( whenever he saw) any troops in confusion, he (always) tried, X.Cyr.5.3.55, cf. An.4.5.13, Mem.4.2.40; εἴ τις ἀντείποι, εὐθὺς ἐτεθνήκει if any one made objection, he was a dead man at once, Th. 8.66;

    ἀλλ' εἴ τι μὴ φέροιμεν, ὤτρυνεν φέρειν E.Alc. 755

    . For εἰ c. ind. in this sense v. supr. 1.1: ind. and opt. are found in same sentence,

    ἐμίσει, οὐκ εἴ τις κακῶς πάσχων ἠμύνετο, ἀλλ' εἴ τις εὐεργετούμενος ἀχάριστος φαίνοιτο X.Ages.11.3

    .
    3 in oratio obliqua after past tenses, representing ἐάν c. subj. or εἰ with a primary (never an historical) tense of the ind. in oratio recta, ἐλογίζοντο ὡς, εἰ μὴ μάχοιντο, ἀποστήσοιντο αἱ πόλεις (representing ἐὰν μὴ μαχώμεθα, ἀποστήσονται) X.HG6.4.6, cf. D.21.104, X.HG5.2.2; ἔλεγεν ὅτι, εἰ βλαβερὰ πεπραχὼς εἴη, δίκαιος εἴη ζημιοῦσθαι (representing εἰ βλαβερὰ πέπραχε, δίκαιός ἐστι) ib.32, cf. An.6.6.25; εἰ δέ τινα φεύγοντα λήψοιτο, προηγόρευεν ὅτι ὡς πολεμίψ χρήσοιτο (representing εἴ τινα λήψομαι, χρήσομαι) Id.Cyr.3.1.3; also, where oratio obliqua is implied in the leading clause, οὐκ ἦν τοῦ πολέμου πέρας Φιλίππῳ, εἰ μὴ Θηβαίους.. ἐχθροὺς ποιήσειε τῇ πόλει, i.e. Philip thought there would be no end to the war, unless he should make.. (his thought having been ἐὰν μὴ ποιήσω), D.18.145;

    ἐβούλοντο γὰρ σφίσιν, εἴ τινα λάβοιεν, ὑπάρχειν ἀντὶ τῶν ἔνδον, ἢν ἄρα τύχωσί τινες ἐζωγρημένοι Th.2.5

    .
    4 c. opt. with ἄν, only when the clause serves as apodosis as well as protasis, cf. Pl.Prt. 329b, D.4.18, X.Mem.1.5.3 (v.

    ἄν A. 111

    . d).
    IV c. INF., in oratio obliqua, only in Hdt.,

    εἰ γὰρ δὴ δεῖν πάντως περιθεῖναι ἄλλῳ τέῳ τὴν βασιληΐην, [ἔφη] δικαιότερον εἶναι κτλ. 1.129

    ;

    εἰ εἶναι τοῦτο μὴ φίλον 2.64

    , cf. 172, 3.105, 108.
    V after Verbs denoting wonder, delight, indignation, disappointment, contentment, and similar emotions, εἰ c. ind. is used instead of ὅτι, to express the object of the feeling in a hypothetical form, θαυμάζω εἰ μηδεὶς ὑμῶν μήτ' ἐνθυμεῖται μήτ' ὀργίζεται, ὁρῶν .. I wonder that no one of you is either concerned or angry when he sees.., D.4.43;

    οὐκ ἀγαπᾷ εἰ μὴ δίκην δέδωκεν, ἀλλ' εἰ μὴ καὶ χρυσῷ στεφάνῳ στεφανωθήσεται ἀγανακτεῖ Aeschin.3.147

    : after past tenses,

    ἐθαύμασε δ' εἰ μὴ φανερόν ἐστιν X.Mem.1.1.13

    ;

    δεινὸν εἰσῄει, εἰ μὴ.. δόξει D.19.33

    ;

    ἐθαύμαζον εἴ τι ἕξει τις χρήσασθαι τῷ λόγῳ Pl.Phd. 95a

    ;

    οὐδὲ ᾐσχύνθη εἰ.. ἐπάγει D.21.105

    : in oratio obliqua (expressed or implied) c. opt., ἐπεῖπεν ὡς δεινὸν (sc. εἴη)

    εἰ.. μεγαλόψυχος γένοιτο Aeschin.2.157

    ;

    ᾤκτιρον εἰ ἁλώσοιντο X.An.1.4.7

    ; ἐθαύμαζε δ' εἴ τις ἀρετὴν ἐπαγγελλόμενος ἀργύριον πράττοιτο he wondered that any one should demand money, Id.Mem.1.2.7; ἔχαιρον ἀγαπῶν εἴ τις ἐάσοι I rejoiced, being content if any one should let it pass, Pl.R. 450a:—in this use the neg. οὐ is also found,

    ἀγανακτῶ εἰ ὁ Φίλιππος ἁρπάζων οὐ λυπεῖ D.8.55

    ;

    δεινὸν ἂν εἴη εἰ οἱ ἐκείνων ξύμμαχοι οὐκ ἀπεροῦσιν Th.1.121

    ;

    τέρας λέγεις, εἰ οὐκ ἂν δύναιντο λαθεῖν Pl.Men. 91d

    , etc.
    VI in citing a fact as a ground of argument or appeal, as surely as, since, εἴ ποτ' ἔην γε if there was [as there was], i.e. as sure as there was such an one, Il.3.180, al.;

    εἰ τότε κοῦρος ἔα, νῦν αὖτέ με γῆρας ὀπάζει 4.321

    ; πολλοὺς γὰρ οἶκε εἶναι εὐπετέστερον διαβάλλειν ἢ ἕνα, εἰ Κλεομένεα μὲν μοῦνον οὐκ οἷός τε ἐγένετο διαβαλεῖν, τρεῖς δὲ μυριάδας Ἀθηναίων ἐποίησε τοῦτο it seems easier to deceive many than one, if (as was the fact, i.e. since) he was not able.., Hdt.5.97, cf. 1.60,al.
    VII ELLIPTICAL CONSTRUCTIONS:
    1 with apodosis implied in the context, εἰ having the force of in case, supposing that, πρὸς τὴν πόλιν, εἰ ἐπιβοηθοῖεν, ἐχώρουν they marched towards the city [so as to meet the citizens], in case they should rush out, Th.6.100; ἱκέται πρὸς σὲ δεῦρ' ἀφίγμεθα, εἴ τινα πόλιν φράσειας ἡμῖν εὔερον we have come hither to you, in case you should tell us of some fleecy city (i.e. that we might hear of it), Ar.Av. 120; παρέζεο καὶ λαβὲ γούνων, αἴ κέν πως ἐθέλῃσιν ἐπὶ Τρώεσσιν ἀρῆξαι sit by him and grasp his knees [so as to persuade him], in case he be willing to help the Trojans, Il.1.408, cf. 66, Od.1.94, 3.92; ἄκουσον καὶ ἐμοῦ, ἐάν σοι ἔτι ταὐτὰ δοκῇ hear me also [that you may assent], in case the same opinion please you, Pl.R. 358b; ἰδὲ δή, ἐάν σοι ὅπερ ἐμοὶ συνδοκῇ look now, in case you approve what I do, ib. 434a.
    2 with apodosis suppressed for rhetorical reasons, εἴ περ γάρ κ' ἐθέλῃσιν Ὀλύμπιος.. στυφελίξαι if he wish to thrust him away, [he will do so], Il.1.580; εἰ μὲν δώσουσι γέρας—· εἰ δέ κε μὴ δώωσιν, ἐγὼ δέ κεν αὐτὸς ἕλωμαι if they shall give me a prize, [well and good]; but if they give not, then I will take one for myself, 1.135, cf. 6.150, Ar.Pl. 468; καὶ ἢν μὲν ξυμβῇ ἡ πεῖρα—· εἰ δὲ μή .. and if the attempt succeed, [well]; otherwise.., Th.3.3, cf. Pl.Prt. 325d.
    3 with the Verb of the protasis omitted, chiefly in the following expressions:
    a εἰ μή except,

    οὐδὲν ἄλλο σιτέονται, εἰ μὴ ἰχθῦς μοῦνον Hdt. 1.200

    ; μὰ τὼ θεώ, εἰ μὴ Κρίτυλλά γ' [εἰμί]—nay, if I'm not Critylla! i.e. I am, Ar.Th. 898; εἰ μὴ ὅσον except only,

    ἐγὼ μέν μιν οὐκ εἶδον, εἰ μὴ ὅσον γραφῇ Hdt.2.73

    , cf. 1.45, 2.20;

    εἰ μὴ εἰ Th.1.17

    , Pl.Grg. 480b, etc.; εἰ μή τι οὖν, ἀλλὰ σμικρόν γέ μοι τῆς ἀρχῆς χάλασον if nothing else, yet.., Id.Men. 86e; ironical,

    εἰ μὴ ἄρα ἡ τῆς ἀρετῆς ἐπιμέλεια διαφθορά ἐστιν X.Mem.1.2.8

    ;

    εἰ μή πέρ γε τὸν ὑοσκύαμον χρήματα εἶναι φήσομεν Id.Oec.1.13

    .
    b εἰ δὲ μή but if not, i.e. otherwise,

    προηγόρευε τοῖς Λαμψακηνοῖσι μετιέναι Μιλτιάδεα, εἰ δὲ μή, σφέας πίτυος τρόπον ἀπείλεε ἐκτρίψειν Hdt.6.37

    , cf. 56; after μάλιστα μέν, Th.1.32,35, etc.:—after a preceding neg., μὴ τύπτ'· εἰ δὲ μή, σαυτόν ποτ' αἰτιάσει don't beat me; otherwise, you will have yourself to blame, Ar.Nu. 1433;

    ὦ Κῦρε, μὴ οὕτω λέγε· εἰ δὲ μή, οὐ θαρροῦντά με ἕξεις X.Cyr.3.1.35

    ;

    οὔτ' ἐν τῷ ὕδατι τὰ ὅπλα ἦν ἔχειν· εἰ δὲ μή Id.An.4.3.6

    , cf. Th.1.28, 131, Pl.Phd. 91c.
    c εἰ δέ sts. stands for

    εἰ δὲ μή, εἰ μὲν βούλεται, ἑψέτω· εἰ δ', ὅτι βούλεται, τοῦτο ποιείτω Pl.Euthd. 285c

    , cf. Smp. 212c;

    εἰ δ' οὖν S.Ant. 722

    ;

    εἰ δ' οὕτως Arist.EN 1094a24

    ; εἰ δὲ τοῦτο and if so, Str.2.1.29.
    d εἰ γάρ for if so, Id.7.3.6.
    e εἴ τις if any, i. e. as much as or more than any,

    τῶν γε νῦν αἴ τις ἐπιχθονίων, ὀρθῶς B.5.5

    ;

    ὄτλον ἄλγιστον ἔσχον, εἴ τις Αἰτωλὶς γυνή S.Tr.8

    , cf. OC 734; εἴ τις ἄλλος, siquis alius, E.Andr.6, etc.;

    εἴ τινες καὶ ἄλλοι Hdt.3.2

    , etc.;

    εἴπερ τις ἄλλος Pl.R. 501d

    ; also κατ' εἰ δέ τινα τρόπον in any way, IG 5(2).6.27 ([place name] Tegea).
    f εἴ ποτε or εἴπερ ποτέ now if ever,

    ἡμῖν δὲ καλῶς, εἴπερ ποτέ, ἔχει.. ἡ ξυναλλαγή Th.4.20

    , cf. Ar.Eq. 594;

    αἴ ποτα κἄλλοτα Alc.Supp.7.11

    , cf. X.An.6.4.12, etc.; but in prayers,

    εἴ ποτέ τοι ἐπὶ νηὸν ἔρεψα.. τόδε μοι κρήηνον ἐέλδωρ Il.1.39

    .
    g εἴ ποθεν (sc. δυνατόν ἐστι) if from any quarter, i.e. from some quarter or other, S.Ph. 1204 (lyr.); so εἴ ποθι somewhere, anywhere, Id.Aj. 885 (lyr.);

    εἴ που Od.4.193

    .
    h εἴ πως ib. 388, X.An.2.3.11: in an elliptical sentence (cf. VII. 1),

    πρέσβεις πέμψαντες, εἴ πως πείσειαν Th.1.58

    .
    VIII with other PARTICLES:
    2 for ὡς εἰ, ὡς εἴ τε, ὥσπερ εἰ, etc., v. ὡς and ὥσπερ.
    3 for εἰ ἄρα, v. ἄρα; for εἰ δή, εἴπερ, v. εἰ δή, εἴπερ; for εἴ γε, v. γέ.
    IX in neg. oaths, = Hebr. im, LXXPs.94(95).11, Ev.Marc.8.12, al.
    C IN INDIRECT QUESTIONS, whether, folld. by the ind., subj., or opt., according to the principles of oratio obliqua:
    1 with IND. after primary tenses, representing the same tense in the direct question, σάφα δ' οὐκ οἶδ' εἰ θεός ἐστιν whether he is a god, Il.5.183;

    εἰ ξυμπονήσεις.. σκόπει S.Ant.41

    .
    2 with SUBJ. after primary tenses, representing a dubitative subj. in the direct question, τὰ ἐκπώματα οὐκ οἶδ' εἰ Χρυσάντᾳ τουτῳῒ δῶ whether I should give them, X.Cyr.8.4.16: sts. elliptical,

    ἐς τὰ χρηστήρια ἔπεμπε, εἰ στρατεύηται ἐπὶ τοὺς Πέρσας Hdt.1.75

    .
    3 OPT. after past tenses, representing either of the two previous constructions in the direct question, ἤρετο εἴ τις ἐμοῦ εἴη σοφώτερος he asked whether any one was wiser than I (direct ἔστι τις σοφώτερος;), Pl.Ap. 21a;

    ἐπεκηρυκεύετο Πεισιστράτῳ, εἰ βούλοιτό οἱ τὴν θυγατέρα ἔχειν γυναῖκα Hdt.1.60

    : rarely [tense] aor. opt. for the [tense] aor. ind., ἠρώτων αὐτὸν εἰ ἀναπλεύσειεν I asked him whether he had set sail (direct ἀνέπλευσας;), D.50.55: but [tense] aor. opt. usually represents [tense] aor. subj., τὸν θεὸν ἐπήροντο εἰ παραδοῖεν Κορινθίοις τὴν πόλιν.. καὶ τιμωρίαν τινὰ πειρῷντ' ἀπ' αὐτῶν ποιεῖσθαι they asked whether they should deliver their city to the Corinthians, and should try.., Th.1.25:—in both constructions the ind. or subj. may be retained, ψῆφον ἐβούλοντο ἐπαγαγεῖν εἰ χρὴ πολεμεῖν ib. 119; ἐβουλεύοντο εἴτε κατακαύσωσιν.. εἴτε τι ἄλλο χρήσωνται whether they should burn them or should dispose of them in some other way, Id.2.4; ἀνακοινοῦσθαι αὐτὸν αὑτῷ εἰ δῷ ἐπιψηφίσαι τοῖς προέδροις [he said that] he consulted him whether he should give.., Aeschin.2.68.
    4 with OPT. and ἄν when this was the form of the direct question, ἠρώτων εἰ δοῖεν ἂν τούτων τὰ πιστά they asked whether they would give (direct δοιήτε ἄν;), X.An.4.8.7.
    5 the NEG. used with εἰ in indirect questions is οὐ, when οὐ would be used in the direct question, ἐνετέλλετο.. εἰρωτᾶν εἰ οὔ τι ἐπαισχύνεται whether he is not ashamed, Hdt.1.90, etc.; but if μή would be required in the direct form, it is retained in the indirect, οὐ τοῦτο ἐρωτῶ, ἀλλ' εἰ τοῦ μὲν δικαίου μὴ ἀξιοῖ πλέον ἔχειν μηδὲ βούλεται ὁ δίκαιος, τοῦ δὲ ἀδίκου (the direct question would be μὴ ἀξιοῖ μηδὲ βούλεται; he does not see fit nor wish, does he?) Pl.R. 349b:—in double indirect questions, εἴτε.. εἴτε.. ; εἰ.. εἴτε.. ; εἴτε.. ἢ .., either οὐ or μή can be used in the second clause,

    ὅπως ἴδῃς εἴτ' ἔνδον εἴτ' οὐκ ἔνδον S.Aj.7

    ;

    σκοπῶμεν εἰ ἡμῖν πρέπει ἢ οὔ Pl.R. 451d

    ; εἰ ἀληθὲς ἢ μή, πειράσομαι μαθεῖν ib. 339a;

    πολλὰ ἂν περιεσκέψω, εἴτε ἐπιτρεπτέον εἴτε οὔ·.. οὐδένα λόγον οὐδὲ συμβουλὴν ποιῇ, εἴτε χρὴ ἐπιτρέπειν σαυτὸν αὐτῷ εἴτε μή Id.Prt. 313a

    , 313b;

    ἀνάγκη τὴν ἐμὴν μητέρα, εἴτε θυγάτηρ ἦν Κίρωνος εἴτε μή, καὶ εἰ παρ' ἐκείνῳ διῃτᾶτο ἢ οὔ, καὶ γάμους εἰ διττοὺς ὑπὲρ ταύτης εἱστίασεν ἢ μὴ.. πάντα ταῦτα εἰδέναι τοὺς οἰκέτας Is.8.9

    ; τοὺς νόμους καταμανθάνειν εἰ καλῶς κεῖνται ἢ μή.. τοὺς λόγους εἰ ὀρθῶς ὑμᾶς διδάσκουσιν ἢ οὔ Antipho 5.14.

    Greek-English dictionary (Αγγλικά Ελληνικά-λεξικό) > εἰ

  • 4 προτίθημι

    προτίθημι (also thematic forms, [ per.] 3sg.
    A

    προτιθεῖ Hdt.1.133

    , [ per.] 3pl.

    προτιθεῖσι Id.7.197

    ), [tense] fut.

    - θήσω Th.3.67

    : [tense] aor.

    προὔθηκα Il.24.409

    , etc. (for προθέουσι v. προθέω (B)):—[voice] Med. (v. infr.):—[voice] Pass., [tense] aor. 1

    προὐτέθην E.Ph. 803

    , Pl.Phd. 90b, etc.; but [tense] pres. and [tense] impf. [voice] Pass. are usu. supplied by πρόκειμαι:—set before, set out, esp. of meals, τραπέζας νίζον καὶ πρότιθεν ([dialect] Ep. for προὐτίθεσαν) Od.1.112;

    βοῦν Hes.Th. 537

    ;

    τούτοισι προθεῖναι δαῖτα Hdt.1.207

    , cf. S.Aj. 1294, Ant. 775, Ph. 274, etc.;

    ξείνια στρατῷ Hdt.7.29

    :—[voice] Med., set before oneself, have set before one,

    δαῖτα Id.1.133

    , 4.26;

    κλίνας καὶ τραπέζας Plu.2.99e

    ; also προτίθεσθαί τισι ἄριστον cause it to be set before them, Chionid.7.
    b π. τινὰ κυσίν throw him to the dogs, Il.24.409; τινὰ θηρσὶν ἁρπαγὴν π. E. El. 896.
    2 expose a child, Hdt.1.112;

    π. τινὰ ἔρημον S.Ph. 268

    :—[voice] Pass.,

    ὁ θανάτῳ προτεθείς E.Ph. 803

     (lyr.).
    b set up as a mark or prize,

    στέφανόν τισι τῶν ἀγώνων Th.2.46

    ;

    σκοπὸν κάλλιστον ἐν τῷ ζῆν Plb.7.8.9

    :—[voice] Pass.,

    προὐτέθην ἐγὼ ἆθλον.. δορός E.Hel.42

    .
    4 fix, set, ἐς ἑβδομήκοντα ἔτεα οὖρον τῆς ζόης ἀνθρώπῳ π. Id.1.32:—[voice] Med.; οὖρον π. ἐνιαυτόν ib.74.
    5 appoint as a task or duty,

    τινί τι S.Tr. 1049

    ;

    νεωτέρῳ τοῦτο βαστάζειν πρόθες Id.Ant. 216

    ; δμῳαῖς π. πένθος οἰκεῖον στένειν ib. 1249, cf. Hdt. 9.94:—[voice] Med., propose to oneself as a task or object,

    ὅπερ προὐθέμεθα σκέψασθαι Pl.Phdr. 259e

    , R. 352d, cf. Sph. 221a, Tht. 169c;

    π. ψέγειν αὐτὸ ἢ ἐπαινεῖν Id.Lg. 638c

    , cf. Arist.EN 1142b19 (dub.), Hipparch. 1.1.6, Luc.Nec.19.
    b [voice] Med., c. [tense] fut. inf., propose to oneself, intend,

    προτεθειμένου κατοικήσειν ἐνταῦθα Syr.D. 13.256

     (Seleucia in Pieria, ii B.C.).
    6 [voice] Med., also, put forth on one's own part, display, show,

    εὐλάβειαν S.El. 1334

    ;

    ἀνδραγαθίαν Th.3.64

    ;

    ἔχθραν Id.8.85

    .
    7 [voice] Med., θνητοὺς ἐν οἴκτῳ προθέμενος setting before oneself in pity, feeling compassion for, A.Pr. 241.
    II π. νεκρόν lay out a dead body, let it lie in state, Hdt.5.8:—[voice] Med., E.Alc. 664, Supp.53 (lyr.), Ar.Lys. 611, Th.2.34, Lys.12.18, etc.;

    ποτήρια χρύσεα προθεῖτο Hdt.3.148

    .
    2 set out wares for show or sale, Luc.Nigr.25, al.
    3 display a public notice,

    τὸ λεύκωμα πρὸ τοῦ ναοῦ IG9(2).1109.35

     (Coropa, ii B.C.);

    ἐπ' αὐτῆς τῆς οἰκίας π. ἐν λευκώματι UPZ 106.20

     (ii B.C.);

    τὸ ὑπογεγραμμένον ἔκθεμα OGI664.4

     (Egypt, i A.D.), cf. POxy.2108.8 ([voice] Pass., iii A.D.); notify publicly,

    τοὺς [προέδρους] προτιθέναι περὶ ὧν δεῖ βουλεύεσθαι IG42(1).68.80

     (Epid., iv B.C.); περὶ ὧν.. οἱ ἄρχοντες προτίθεισι Ἀρχ.Δελτ.9 παρ.53 ([place name] Eresus), cf. IG 12(2).526a21 (ibid., iv B.C.), 645b35 (Nesus, iv B.C.); τὰς πράξεις (exactions).. τῶν προτιθεμένων ([voice] Pass.)

    κατὰ τὰς ἐγγραφάς Arist.Pol. 1321b42

    ; call a case for trial by means of a public notice,

    τῶν κατ' αὐτοὺς προτεθέντων UPZ118.18

     (ii B.C.); οἱ προτεθέντες ἐπ' ἐμὲ καὶ μὴ ὑπακούσαντες ἴστωσαν ὅτι .. PHamb.29.6 (i A.D.); advertise for sale or other purpose, BGU 992 i 7 ([voice] Pass., ii B.C.), PLips.64.44 (iv A.D.), etc.; τοῖς συλλημψομένοις ὑμῖν γέρα προτιθέντα advertising rewards to those of you who apprehend (robbers), POxy.1408.16 (iii A.D.).
    4 propose, bring forward a thing to be examined and debated, also give an opportunity for debate, voting,

    ἐς μέσον σφι π. πρῆγμα Hdt.1.206

    ;

    π. τὸν λόγον Id.8.59

    ;

    γνώμας σφίσιν αὐτοῖς Th. 1.139

    ; π. λόγον (sc. εἰς ἐκκλησίαν) Aeschin.2.65;

    λόγον περί τινος X.Mem.4.2.3

    ; γνώμας π. αὖθις Ἀθηναίοις, of the Prytanes, Th.6.14, cf. 3.36; π. τὴν διαγνώμην αὖθις περὶ Μυτιληναίων ib.42, cf. Isoc.8.15; π. βουλὴν εἴτε.. εἴτε .. D.H.6.15;

    τὸν ἐπιμήνιον, ἢν μὴ προθῇ, ἑκατὸν στατῆρας ὀφείλειν SIG58.10

     (Milet., v B.C.), cf. 141.12 (Corc. Nigra, iv B.C.), 167.13 (Mylasa, iv B.C.), al.; προθεῖναι αὖθις περὶ Μυτιληναίων λέγειν propose a discussion about.., Th.3.38;

    τὸ συμφέρον ἡ πόλις προὐτίθει σκοπεῖν D.18.273

    , etc.; π. αὐτοῖς κρίσιν appoint a trial for them, Lys.27.8;

    π. αὐτοῖς ἀγορὰν δικῶν Luc.

    Bis Acc.4; προέθηκε.. λέγειν τὰ ἑκατέροισι.. κατέργασται has proposed (or initiated) a recital of what each has done, Hdt.9.27: c. dat. pers. et inf., Id.3.38: c. acc. et inf.,

    π. γνώμην ἀποφαίνεσθαι τὸν βουλόμενον Id.8.49

    :—[voice] Med.,

    ἤν τις προθῆται ψῆφον, ὥστε μὴ εἶναι τὸν νόμον τοῦτον SIG45.33

     (Halic., v B.C.):—[voice] Pass., οὐ προὐτέθη σφίσι λόγος speech was not allowed them, X.HG1.7.5;

    ψῆφος περὶ ἡμῶν ὑπὲρ ἀνδραποδισμοῦ προτεθεῖσα D.19.65

    .
    III put forward, as one foot before the other,

    βραδύπουν ἤλυσιν ἄρθρων E.Hec.67

     (anap.).
    2 hold out as a pretext,

    αἰτίαν S.Aj. 1051

    :—[voice] Med.,

    τὴν συγγένειαν Plb. 2.19.1

    , etc.
    IV put before or first, προτιθέντι ἀνάγκη.. λέγειν, opp. ἐπιλέγοντι, Arist.Rh. 1394a15, cf. b28;

    π. τοῦ λόγου προοίμιον Pl. Lg. 723c

    ; set down first in writing, προθεὶς ἄρχοντα Νικόμαχόν φησιν οὕτως· ἐπὶ τούτου κτλ." Did. in D.1.19, cf. 8.17, al., Gal.19.183:— [voice] Med., put in front,

    τοὺς γροσφομάχους Plb.1.33.9

    ; premise,

    λόγον Id.3.118.11

    ;

    τὰς προειρημένας αἰτίας Id.4.25.6

    :—[voice] Pass.,

    τὸ μὴ καὶ τὸ οὒ προτιθέμενα τῶν ἐπιόντων ὀνομάτων Pl.Sph. 257c

    : metaph., Th.2.42.

    Greek-English dictionary (Αγγλικά Ελληνικά-λεξικό) > προτίθημι

  • 5 εἰμί

    εἰμί (Hom.+) impv. ἴσθι, ἔσο IPol 4:1, ἔστω—also colloq. ἤτω (BGU 276, 24; 419, 13; POxy 533, 9; Ps 103:31; 1 Macc 10:31) 1 Cor 16:22; Js 5:12; 1 Cl 48:5; Hv 3, 3, 4;—3 pers. pl. ἔστωσαν (ins since 200 B.C. Meisterhans3-Schw. 191; PPetr III, 2, 22 [237 B.C.]) Lk 12:35; 1 Ti 3:12; GJs 7:2. Inf. εἶναι. Impf. 1 pers. only mid. ἤμην (Jos., Bell. 1, 389; 631; s. further below); ἦν only Ac 20:18 D, 2 pers. ἦσθα (Jos., Ant. 6, 104) Mt 26:69; Mk 14:67 and ἦς (Lobeck, Phryn. 149 ‘say ἦσθα’; Jos., Ant. 17, 110 al.; Sb 6262, 16 [III A.D.]) Mt 25:21, 23 al., 3 sg. ἦν, 1 pl. ἦμεν. Beside this the mid. form ἤμην (pap since III B.C.; Job 29:16; Tob 12:13 BA), s. above, gives the pl. ἤμεθα (pap since III B.C.; Bar 1:19) Mt 23:30; Ac 27:37; Eph 2:3. Both forms in succession Gal. 4:3. Fut. ἔσομαι, ptc. ἐσόμενος. The mss. vary in choice of act. or mid., but like the edd. lean toward the mid. (W-S. §14, 1; Mlt-H. 201–3; Rob. index; B-D-F §98; Rdm.2 99; 101f; Helbing 108f; Reinhold 86f). Also s. ἔνι.
    ① be, exist, be on hand a pred. use (for other pred. use s. 3a, 4, 5, 6, 7): of God (Epicurus in Diog. L. 10, 123 θεοί εἰσιν; Zaleucus in Diod S 12, 20, 2 θεοὺς εἶναι; Wsd 12:13; Just., D. 128, 4 angels) ἔστιν ὁ θεός God exists Hb 11:6; cp. 1 Cor 8:5. ὁ ὢν καὶ ὁ ἦν the one who is and who was (cp. SibOr 3, 16; as amulet PMich 155, 3 [II A.D.] ὁ ὢν θεὸς ὁ Ἰάω κύριος παντοκράτωρ=the god … who exists.) Rv 11:17; 16:5. ὁ ὢν καὶ ὁ ἦν καὶ ὁ ἐρχόμενος, in this and the two preceding passages ἦν is treated as a ptc. (for the unusual use of ἦν cp. Simonides 74 D.: ἦν ἑκατὸν φιάλαι) 1:4; 4:8 (cp. Ex 3:14; Wsd 13:1; Paus. 10, 12, 10 Ζεὺς ἦν, Ζ. ἔστι, Ζ. ἔσσεται; cp. Theosophien 18. S. OWeinreich, ARW 19, 1919, 178f). οὐδʼ εἶναι θεὸν παντοκράτορα AcPlCor 1:11. ἐγώ εἰμι (ins in the Athena-Isis temple of Saïs in Plut., Is. et Os. 9, 354c: ἐγώ εἰμι πᾶν τὸ γεγονὸς κ. ὸ̓ν κ. ἐσόμενον. On the role of Isis in Gk. rel. s. IBergman, Ich bin Isis ’68; RMerkelbach, Isis Regina—Zeus Sarapis ’95; for further lit. s. MGustafson in: Prayer fr. Alexander to Constantine, ed. MKiley et al. ’97, 158.) Rv 1:8 (s. ἐγώ beg.). ὁ ὤν, … θεός Ro 9:5 is classed here and taken to mean Christ by JWordsworth ad loc. and HWarner, JTS 48, ’47, 203f. Of the λόγος: ἐν ἀρχῇ ἦν ὁ λ. J 1:1 (for ἦν cp. Herm. Wr. 1, 4; 3, 1b ἦν σκότος, Fgm. IX 1 p. 422, 23 Sc. γέγονεν ἡ ὕλη καὶ ἦν).—Of Christ πρὶν Ἀβραὰμ γενέσθαι, ἐγὼ εἰμί before Abraham was born, I am 8:58 (on the pres. εἰμί cp. Parmenides 8, 5: of the Eternal we cannot say ἦν οὐδʼ ἔσται, only ἔστιν; Ammonius Hermiae [Comm. in Aristotl. IV 5 ed. ABusse 1897] 6 p. 172: in Timaeus we read that we must not say of the gods τὸ ἦν ἢ τὸ ἔσται μεταβολῆς τινος ὄντα σημαντικά, μόνον δὲ τὸ ἔστι=‘was’ or ‘will be’, suggesting change, but only ‘is’; Ps 89:2; DBall, ‘I Am’ in John’s Gospel [JSNT Suppl. 124] ’96).—Of the world πρὸ τοῦ τὸν κόσμον εἶναι before the world existed 17:5. Satirically, of the beast, who parodies the Lamb, ἦν καὶ οὐκ ἔστιν Rv 17:8. Of God’s temple: ἔστιν B 16:6f it exists. τὸ μὴ ὄν that which does not exist, the unreal (Sallust. 17 p. 32, 7 and 9; Philo, Aet. M. 5; 82) Hm 1:1. τὰ ὄντα that which exists contrasted w. τὰ μὴ ὄντα Ro 4:17; cp. 1 Cor 1:28; 2 Cl 1:8. Of God κτίσας ἐκ τοῦ μὴ ὄντος τὰ ὄντα what is out of what is not Hv 1, 1, 6 (on the contrast τὰ ὄντα and τὰ μὴ ὄντα cp. Ps.-Arist. on Xenophanes: Fgm. 21, 28; Artem. 1, 51 p. 49, 19 τὰ μὴ ὄντα ὡς ὄντα; Ocellus Luc. 12; Sallust. 17, 5 p. 30, 28–32, 12; Philo, Op. M. 81; PGM 4, 3077f ποιήσαντα τὰ πάντα ἐξ ὧν οὐκ ὄντων εἰς τὸ εἶναι; 13, 272f τὸν ἐκ μὴ ὄντων εἶναι ποιήσαντα καὶ ἐξ ὄντων μὴ εἶναι; Theoph. Ant. 1, 4 [p. 64, 21] τὰ πάντα ὁ θεὸς ἐποίησεν ἐξ οὐκ ὄντων εἰς τὸ εἶναι).—Of existing in the sense be present, available, provided πολλοῦ ὄχλου ὄντος since a large crowd was present Mk 8:1. ὄντων τῶν προσφερόντων those are provided who offer Hb 8:4. οὔπω ἦν πνεῦμα the Spirit had not yet come J 7:39. ἀκούσας ὄντα σιτία when he heard that grain was available Ac 7:12.—Freq. used to introduce parables and stories (once) there was: ἄνθρωπός τις ἦν πλούσιος there was (once) a rich man Lk 16:1, 19. ἦν ἄνθρωπος ἐκ τ. Φαρισαίων there was a man among the Pharisees J 3:1.—There is, there are ὥσπερ εἰσὶν θεοὶ πολλοί as there are many gods 1 Cor 8:5. διαιρέσεις χαρισμάτων εἰσίν there are various kinds of spiritual gifts 12:4ff; 1J 5:16 al. Neg. οὐκ ἔστι there is (are) not, no (Ps 52:2; Simplicius in Epict. p. 95, 42 as a quot. from ‘tragedy’ οὐκ εἰσὶν θεοί) δίκαιος there is no righteous man Ro 3:10 (Eccl 7:20). ἀνάστασις νεκρῶν οὐκ ἔστιν there is no resurr. of the dead 1 Cor 15:12; οὐδʼ εἶναι ἀνάστασιν AcPlCor 1:12; 2:24; cp. Mt 22:23; Ac 23:8 (cp. 2 Macc 7:14). εἰσὶν οἵ, or οἵτινες there are people who (Hom. et al.; LXX; Just., D. 47, 2 εἰ μήτι εἰσὶν οἱ λέγοντες ὅτι etc.—W. sing. and pl. combined: Arrian, Ind. 24, 9 ἔστι δὲ οἳ διέφυγον=but there are some who escaped) Mt 16:28; 19:12; Mk 9:1; Lk 9:27; J 6:64; Ac 11:20. Neg. οὐδείς ἐστιν ὅς there is no one who Mk 9:39; 10:29; Lk 1:61; 18:29. As a question τίς ἐστιν ὅς; who is there that? Mt 12:11—In an unusual (perh. bureaucratic terminology) participial construction Ac 13:1 ἡ οὖσα ἐκκλησία the congregation there (cp. Ps.-Pla., Eryx. 6, 394c οἱ ὄντες ἄνθρωποι=the people with whom he has to deal; PLond III 1168, 5 p. 136 [18 A.D.] ἐπὶ ταῖς οὔσαις γειτνίαις=on the adjoining areas there; PGen 49; PSI 229, 11 τοῦ ὄντος μηνός of the current month); cp. 14:13.—αἱ οὖσαι (sc. ἐξουσίαι) those that exist Ro 13:1 (cp. UPZ 180a I, 4 [113 B.C.] ἐφʼ ἱερέων καὶ ἱερειῶν τῶν ὄντων καὶ οὐσῶν).
    ② to be in close connection (with), is, freq. in statements of identity or equation, as a copula, the equative function, uniting subject and predicate. On absence of the copula, Mlt-Turner 294–310.
    ⓐ gener. πραΰς εἰμι I am gentle Mt 11:29. ἐγώ εἰμι Γαβριήλ Lk 1:19. σὺ εἶ ὁ υἱὸς τοῦ θεοῦ Mk 3:11; J 1:49 and very oft. ἵνα … ὁ πονηρὸς … ἐλεγχθῇ [το? s. app. in Bodm.] μὴ ὢν θεός AcPlCor 2:15 (Just., D. 3, 3 φιλολόγος οὖν τις εἶ σύ).—The pred. can be supplied fr. the context: καὶ ἐσμέν and we are (really God’s children) 1J 3:1 (Eur., Ion 309 τ. θεοῦ καλοῦμαι δοῦλος εἰμί τε. Dio Chrys. 14 [31], 58 θεοφιλεῖς οἱ χρηστοὶ λέγονται καὶ εἰσίν; Epict. 2, 16, 44 Ἡρακλῆς ἐπιστεύθη Διὸς υἱὸς εἶναι καὶ ἦν.—The ptc. ὤν, οὖσα, ὄν used w. a noun or adj.and serving as an if-, since-, or although-clause sim. functions as a copula πονηροὶ ὄντες Mt 7:11; 12:34.—Lk 20:36; J 3:4; 4:9; Ac 16:21; Ro 5:10; 1 Cor 8:7; Gal 2:3 al.).—W. adv. of quality: οὕτως εἶναι be so preceded by ὥσπερ, καθώς or followed by ὡς, ὥσπερ Mt 13:40; 24:27, 37, 39; Mk 4:26; Lk 17:26. W. dat. of pers. οὕτως ἔσται ὁ υἱὸς τ. ἀ. τῇ γενεᾷ ταύτῃ so the Human One (Son of Man) will be for this generation 11:30. εἰμὶ ὡσ/ὥσπερ I am like Mt 6:5; Lk 18:11. W. dat. ἔστω σοι ὥσπερ τελώνης he shall be to you as a tax-collector Mt 18:17. εἰμὶ ὥς τις I am like someone of outward and inward similarity 28:3; Lk 6:40; 11:44; 22:27 al. καθώς εἰμι as I am Ac 22:3; 1J 3:2, 7; 4:17.—W. demonstr. pron. (Just., A I, 16, 1 ἃ ἔφη, ταῦτά ἐστι: foll. by a quotation; sim. 48, 5 ἔστι δὲ ταῦτα; and oft.) τὰ ὀνόματά ἐστιν ταῦτα Mt 10:2. αὕτη ἐστὶν ἡ μαρτυρία J 1:19. W. inf. foll. θρησκεία αὕτη ἐστίν, ἐπισκέπτεσθαι Js 1:27. W. ὅτι foll. αὕτη ἐστὶν ἡ κρίσις, ὅτι τὸ φῶς ἐλήλυθεν J 3:19; cp. 21:24; 1J 1:5; 3:11; 5:11. W. ἵνα foll. τοῦτό ἐστιν τὸ ἔργον, ἵνα πιστεύητε J 6:29; cp. vs. 39f; 15:12; 17:3; 1J 3:11, 23; 5:3. W. τηλικοῦτος: τὰ πλοῖα, τηλικαῦτα ὄντα though they are so large Js 3:4. W. τοσοῦτος: τοσοῦτων ὄντων although there were so many J 21:11. W. τοιοῦτος: τοιοῦτος ὤν Phlm 9 (cp. Just., A I, 18, 4 ὅσα ἄλλα τοιαῦτά ἐστι).—W. interrog. pron. ὑμεῖς τίνα με λέγετε εἶναι; who do you say I am? Mt 16:15; cp. 21:10; Mk 1:24; 4:41; 8:27, 29; Lk 4:34 al.; σὺ τίς εἶ; J 1:19; 8:25; 21:12 al. (cp. JosAs 14:6 τίς εἶ συ tell me ‘who you are’). σὺ τίς εἶ ὁ κρίνων; (Pla., Gorg. 452b; Strabo 6, 2, 4 σὺ τίς εἶ ὁ τὸν Ὅμηρον ψέγων ὡς μυθογράφον;) Ro 14:4; ἐγὼ τίς ἤμην; (cp. Ex 3:11) Ac 11:17; τίς εἰμι ἐγὼ ὅτι who am I, that GJs 12:2 (Ex 3:11). W. πόσος: πόσος χρόνος ἐστίν; how long a time? Mk 9:21. W. ποταπός of what sort Lk 1:29.—W. relative pron. οἷος 2 Cor 10:11; ὁποῖος Ac 26:29; 1 Cor 3:13; Gal 2:6; ὅς Rv 1:19; ὅστις Gal 5:10, 19.—W. numerals ἦσαν οἱ φαγόντες πεντακισχίλιοι ἄνδρες 6:44 (cp. Polyaenus 7, 25 ἦσαν οἱ πεσόντες ἀνδρῶν μυριάδες δέκα); cp. Ac 19:7; 23:13. Λάζαρος εἷς ἦν ἐκ τῶν ἀνακειμένων L. was one of those at the table J 12:2; cp. Gal 3:20; Js 2:19. τῶν πιστευσάντων ἦν καρδία καὶ ψυχὴ μία Ac 4:32. εἷς εἶναι be one and the same Gal 3:28. ἓν εἶναι be one J 10:30; 17:11, 21ff; 1 Cor 3:8.—οὐδʼ εἶναι τὴν πλάσιν τὴν τῶν ἀνθρώπων τοῦ θεοῦ (that) the creation of humankind is not God’s doing AcPlCor 1:13.—To establish identity the formula ἐγώ εἰμι is oft. used in the gospels (corresp. to Hebr. אֲנִי הוּא Dt 32:39; Is 43:10), in such a way that the predicate must be understood fr. the context: Mt 14:27; Mk 6:50; 13:6; 14:62; Lk 22:70; J 4:26; 6:20; 8:24, 28; 13:19; 18:5f and oft.; s. on ἐγώ.—In a question μήτι ἐγώ εἰμι; surely it is not I? Mt 26:22, 25.
    ⓑ to describe a special connection betw. the subject and a predicate noun ἡμεῖς ναὸς θεοῦ ἐσμεν ζῶντος we are a temple of the living God 2 Cor 6:16. ἡ ἐπιστολὴ ὑμεῖς ἐστε you are our letter (of recommendation) 3:2. σφραγίς μου τῆς ἀποστολῆς ὑμεῖς ἐστε you are the seal of my apostleship 1 Cor 9:2 and oft.
    ⓒ in explanations:
    α. to show how someth. is to be understood is a representation of, is the equivalent of; εἰμί here, too, serves as copula; we usually translate mean, so in the formula τοῦτʼ ἔστιν this or that means, that is to say (Epict., Ench. 33, 10; Arrian, Tact. 29, 3; SIG 880, 50; PFlor 157, 4; PSI 298, 9; PMert 91, 9; Jos., C. Ap. 2, 16; ApcMos 19; Just., D. 56, 23; 78, 3 al.) Mk 7:2; Ac 19:4; Ro 7:18; 9:8; 10:6, 8; Phlm 12; Hb 7:5 al.; in the sense that is (when translated) (Polyaenus 8, 14, 1 Μάξιμος ἀνηγορεύθη• τοῦτο δʼ ἄν εἴη Μέγιστον) Mt 27:46; Ac 1:19. So also w. relative pron.: ὅ ἐστιν Mk 3:17; 7:11, 34; Hb 7:2. After verbs of asking, recognizing, knowing and not knowing (Antiphanes Com. 231, 1f τὸ ζῆν τί ἐστι;) μάθετε τί ἐστιν learn what (this) means Mt 9:13. εἰ ἐγνώκειτε τί ἐστιν 12:7; cp. Mk 1:27; 9:10; Lk 20:17; J 16:17f; Eph 4:9. W. an indir. question (Stephan. Byz. s.v. Ἀγύλλα: τὶς ἠρώτα τί ἂν εἴη τὸ ὄνομα) τί ἂν εἴη ταῦτα Lk 15:26; τί εἴη τοῦτο 18:36. τίνα θέλει ταῦτα εἶναι what this means Ac 17:20; cp. 2:12, where the question is not about the mng. of terms but the significance of what is happening.—Esp. in interpr. of the parables (Artem. 1, 51 p. 48, 26 ἄρουρα οὐδὲν ἄλλο ἐστὶν ἢ γυνή=field means nothing else than woman) ὁ ἀγρός ἐστιν ὁ κόσμος the field means the world Mt 13:38; cp. vss. 19f, 22f; Mk 4:15f, 18, 20; Lk 8:11ff (cp. Gen 41:26f; Ezk 37:11; Ath. 22, 4 [Stoic interpr. of myths]). On τοῦτό ἐστιν τὸ σῶμά μου Mt 26:26; Mk 14:22; Lk 22:19 and its various interpretations, see lit. s.v. εὐχαριστία. Cp. Hipponax (VI B.C.) 45 Diehl αὕτη γάρ ἐστι συμφορή=this means misfortune.
    β. to be of relative significance, be of moment or importance, amount to someth. w. indef. pron. εἰδωλόθυτόν τί ἐστιν meat offered to idols means anything 1 Cor 10:19. Esp. εἰμί τι I mean someth. of pers. 1 Cor 3:7; Gal 2:6; 6:3; and of things vs. 15. εἰμί τις Ac 5:36.—Of no account ἐμοὶ εἰς ἐλάχιστόν ἐστιν (telescoped fr. ἐλάχ. ἐστιν and εἰς ἐλάχ. γίνεται, of which there are many exx. in Schmid, I 398; II 161, 237; III 281; IV 455) it is of little or no importance to me 1 Cor 4:3.
    ③ be in reference to location, persons, condition, or time, be
    ⓐ of various relations or positions involving a place or thing: w. ἀπό: εἶναι ἀπό τινος be or come from a certain place (X., An. 2, 4, 13) J 1:44.—W. ἐν: ἐν τοῖς τ. πατρός μου in my father’s house Lk 2:49 (cp. Jos., Ant. 16, 302 καταγωγὴ ἐν τοῖς Ἀντιπάτρου). ἐν τῇ ὁδῷ on the way Mk 10:32. ἐν τῇ ἐρήμῳ Mt 24:26. ἐν ἀγρῷ Lk 15:25. ἐν δεξιᾷ τ. θεοῦ at God’s right hand Ro 8:34; in heaven Eph 6:9.—W. εἰς: τὴν κοίτην Lk 11:7; τὸν κόλπον J1:18.—W. ἐπὶ w. gen. be on someth. of place, roof Lk 17:31; head J 20:7 (cp. 1 Macc 1:59); also fig., of one who is over someone (1 Macc 10:69; Jdth 14:13 ὁ ὢν ἐπὶ πάντων τῶν αὐτοῦ) Ro 9:5 (of the angel of death Mel., P. 20, 142 ἐπὶ τῶν πρωτοτόκων); also ἐπάνω τινός J 3:31.—W. dat. be at someth. the door Mt 24:33; Mk 13:29.—W. acc. be on someone: grace Lk 2:40; Ac 4:33; spirit (Is 61:1) Lk 2:25; εἶναι ἐπὶ τὸ αὐτό be in the same place, together (Gen 29:2 v.l.) Ac 1:15; 2:1, 44; 1 Cor 7:5.—W. κατά w. acc. εἶναι κατὰ τὴν Ἰουδαίαν be in Judea Ac 11:1; εἶναι ἐν Ἀντιοχείᾳ κατὰ τὴν οὖσαν ἐκκλησίαν were at Antioch in the congregation there 13:1.—W. ὑπό w. acc. τι or τινα of place be under someth. J 1:48; 1 Cor 10:1.—W. παρά w. acc. παρὰ τὴν θάλασσαν by the sea- (i.e. lake-) shore Mk 5:21; Ac 10:6.—W. πρός τι be close to, facing someth. Mk 4:1.—W. adv. of place ἐγγύς τινι near someth. Ac 9:38; 27:8. μακρὰν (ἀπό) Mk 12:34; J 21:8; Eph 2:13; also πόρρω Lk 14:32. χωρίς τινος without someth. Hb 12:8. ἐνθάδε Ac 16:28. ἔσω J 20:26. ἀπέναντί τινος Ro 3:18 (Ps 35:2). ἐκτός τινος 1 Cor 6:18; ἀντίπερά τινος Lk 8:26; ὁμοῦ J 21:2; οὗ Mt 2:9; ὅπου Mk 2:4; 5:40. ὧδε Mt 17:4; Mk 9:5; Lk 9:33. Also w. fut. mng. (ESchwartz, GGN 1908, 161 n.; on the fut. use of the pres. cp. POxy 531, 22 [II A.D.] ἔστι δὲ τοῦ Τῦβι μηνὸς σοὶ ὸ̔ θέλεις) ὅπου εἰμί J 7:34, 36; 12:26; 14:3; 17:24. As pred., to denote a relatively long stay at a place, stay, reside ἴσθι ἐκεῖ stay there Mt 2:13, cp. vs. 15; ἐπʼ ἐρήμοις τόποις in lonely places Mk 1:45; ἦν παρὰ τὴν θάλασσαν he stayed by the lakeside 5:21.
    ⓑ involving humans or transcendent beings: w. adv. ἔμπροσθέν τινος Lk 14:2. ἔναντί τινος Ac 8:21; ἐνώπιόν τινος Lk 14:10; Ac 4:19; 1 Pt 3:4; Rv 7:15; ἐντός τινος Lk 17:21; ἐγγύς τινος J 11:18; 19:20; Ro 10:8 (Dt 30:14).—W. prep. ἐν τινί equiv. to ἔκ τινος εἶναι be among Mt 27:56; cp. Mk 15:40; Ro 1:6. Of God, who is among his people 1 Cor 14:25 (Is 45:14; Jer 14:9); of the Spirit J 14:17. Of persons under Christ’s direction: ἐν θεῷ 1J 2:5; 5:20 (s. Norden, Agn. Th. 23, 1). ἔν τινι rest upon, arise from someth. (Aristot., Pol. 7, 1, 3 [1323b, 1] ἐν ἀρετῇ; Sir 9:16) Ac 4:12; 1 Cor 2:5; Eph 5:18.—εἴς τινα be directed, inclined toward Ac 23:30; 2 Cor 7:15; 1 Pt 1:21.—κατά w. gen. be against someone (Sir 6:12) Mt 12:30; Mk 9:40 and Lk 9:50 (both opp. ὑπέρ); Gal 5:23.—σύν τινι be with someone (Jos., Ant. 7, 181) Lk 22:56; 24:44; Ac 13:7; accompany, associate w. someone Lk 8:38; Ac 4:13; 22:9; take sides with someone (X., Cyr. 5, 4, 37; 7, 5, 77; Jos., Ant. 11, 259 [of God]) Ac 14:4.—πρός τινα be with someone Mt 13:56; Mk 6:3; J 1:1f. I am to be compared w. IMg 12.—μετά and gen. be with someone (Judg 14:11) Mt 17:17; Mk 3:14; 5:18; J 3:26; 12:17; ἔστω μεθʼ ὑμῶν εἰρήνη AcPlCor 2:40; of God, who is with someone (Gen 21:20; Judg 6:13 al.; Philo, Det. Pot. Ins. 4; Jos., Ant. 6, 181; 15, 138) Lk 1:66; J 3:2; 8:29; Ac 10:38 al.; also be with in the sense be favorable to, in league with (Ex 23:2) Mt 12:30; Lk 11:23; of punishment attending a pers. τὸ πῦρ ἐστι μετʼ αὐτοῦ AcPlCor 2:37.—παρά and gen. come from someone (X., An. 2, 4, 15; Just., D. 8, 4 ἔλεος παρὰ θεοῦ) fr. God J 6:46; 7:29; w. dat. be with, among persons Mt 22:25; Ac 10:6. W. neg. be strange to someone, there is no … in someone Ro 2:11; 9:14; Eph 6:9.—ὑπέρ w. gen. be on one’s side Mk 9:4 and Lk 9:50 (both opp. κατά); w. acc. be superior to (Sir 25:10; 30:16) Lk 6:40.
    ⓒ of condition or circumstance: κατά w. acc. live in accordance with (Sir 28:10; 43:8; 2 Macc 9:20) κατὰ σάκρα, πνεῦμα Ro 8:5. οὐκ ἔστιν κατὰ ἄνθρωπον not human (in origin) Gal 1:11.—Fig. ὑπό w. acc. be under (the power of) someth. Ro 3:9; 6:14f; Gal 3:10, 25.—W. ἐν of existing ἐν τῷ θεῷ εἶναι of humankind: have its basis of existence in God Ac 17:28. Of states of being: ἐν δόξῃ 2 Cor 3:8; ἐν εἰρήνῃ Lk 11:21; ἐν ἔχθρᾳ at enmity 23:12; ἐν κρίματι under condemnation vs. 40. ἐν ῥύσει αἵματος suffer from hemorrhages Mk 5:25; Lk 8:43 (cp. Soph., Aj. 271 ἦν ἐν τῇ νόσῳ; cp. TestJob 35:1 ἐν πληγαῖς πολλαῖς). Periphrastically for an adj. ἐν ἐξουσίᾳ authoritative Lk 4:32. ἐν βάρει important 1 Th 2:7. ἐν τῇ πίστει true believers, believing 2 Cor 13:5. Be involved in someth. ἐν ἑορτῇ be at the festival=take part in it J 2:23. ἐν τούτοις ἴσθι devote yourself to these things 1 Ti 4:15 (cp. X., Hell. 4, 8, 7 ἐν τοιούτοις ὄντες=occupied w. such things; Jos., Ant. 2, 346 ἐν ὕμνοις ἦσαν=they occupied themselves w. the singing of hymns).—Fig., live in the light 1J 2:9; cp. vs. 11; 1 Th 5:4; in the flesh Ro 7:5; 8:8; AcPlCor 1:6. ἐν οἷς εἰμι in the situation in which I find myself Phil 4:11 (X., Hell. 4, 2, 1; Diod S 12, 63, 5; 12, 66, 4; Appian, Hann. 55 §228 ἐν τούτοις ἦν=he was in this situation; Jos., Ant. 7, 232 ἐν τούτοις ἦσαν=found themselves in this sit.; TestJob 35:6 ἐν τίνι ἐστίν; s. ZPE VIII 170). ἐν πολλοῖς ὢν ἀστοχήμασι AcPlCor 2:1. Of characteristics, emotions, etc. ἔν τινί ἐστιν, e.g. ἀδικία J 7:18; ἄγνοια Eph 4:18; ἀλήθεια J 8:44; 2 Cor 11:10 (cp. 1 Macc 7:18); ἁμαρτία 1J 3:5.
    ⓓ of time ἐγγύς of καιρός be near Mt 26:18; Mk 13:28. πρὸς ἑσπέραν ἐστίν it is toward evening Lk 24:29 (Just., D. 137, 4 πρὸς δυσμὰς … ὁ ἥλιός ἐστι).
    ④ to be alive in a period of time, live, denoting temporal existence (Hom., Trag., Thu. et al.; Sir 42:21; En 102:5 Philo, De Jos. 17; Jos., Ant. 7, 254) εἰ ἤμεθα ἐν ταῖς ἡμέραις τῶν πατέρων ἡμῶν if we had lived in the days of our fathers Mt 23:30. ὅτι οὐκ εἰσὶν because they were no more 2:18 (Jer 38:15). ἦσαν ἐπὶ χρόνον ἱκανόν (those who were healed and raised by Christ) remained alive for quite some time Qua.
    ⑤ to be the time at which someth. takes place w. indications of specific moments or occasions, be (X., Hell. 4, 5, 1, An. 4, 3, 8; Sus 13 Theod.; 1 Macc 6:49; 2 Macc 8:26; Jos., Ant. 6, 235 νουμηνία δʼ ἦν; 11, 251): ἦν ὥρα ἕκτη it was the sixth hour (=noon acc. to Jewish reckoning) Lk 23:44; J 4:6; 19:14.—Mk 15:25; J 1:39. ἦν ἑσπέρα ἤδη it was already evening Ac 4:3. πρωί̈ J 18:28. ἦν παρασκευή Mk 15:42. ἦν ἑορτὴ τῶν Ἰουδαίων J 5:1. σάββατόν ἐστιν vs. 10 et al. Short clauses (as Polyaenus 4, 9, 2 νὺξ ἦν; 7, 44, 2 πόλεμος ἦν; exc. 36, 8 ἦν ἀρίστου ὥρα; Jos., Ant. 19, 248 ἔτι δὲ νὺξ ἦν) χειμὼν ἦν J 10:22; ἦν δὲ νύξ (sim. Jos., Bell. 4, 64) 13:30; ψύχος it was cold 18:18; καύσων ἔσται it will be hot Lk 12:55.
    ⑥ to take place as a phenomenon or event, take place, occur, become, be, be in (Hom., Thu. et al.; LXX; En 104:5; 106:6.—Cp. Just., D. 82, 2 of Christ’s predictions ὅπερ καὶ ἔστι ‘which is in fact the case’.) ἔσται θόρυβος τοῦ λαοῦ a popular uprising Mk 14:2. γογγυσμὸς ἦν there was (much) muttering J 7:12. σχίσμα there was a division 9:16; 1 Cor 1:10; 12:25. ἔριδες … εἰσίν quarrels are going on 1:11. δεῖ αἱρέσεις εἶναι 11:19. θάνατος, πένθος, κραυγή, πόνος ἔσται Rv 21:4. ἔσονται λιμοὶ κ. σεισμοί Mt 24:7. Hence τὸ ἐσόμενον what was going to happen (Sir 48:25) Lk 22:49. πότε ταῦτα ἔσται; when will this happen? Mt 24:3. πῶς ἔσται τοῦτο; how can this be? Lk 1:34. Hebraistically (הָיָה; s. KBeyer, Semitische Syntax im NT, ’62, 63–65) καὶ ἔσται w. fut. of another verb foll. and it will come about that Ac 2:17 (Jo 3:1); 3:23 (w. δέ); Ro 9:26 (Hos 2:1).—W. dat. ἐστί τινι happen, be granted, come, to someone (X., An. 2, 1, 10; Jos., Ant. 11, 255; Just., D. 8, 4 σοὶ … ἔλεος ἔσται παρὰ θεοῦ) Mt 16:22; Mk 11:24; Lk 2:10; GJs 1:1; 4:3; 8:3; τί ἐστίν σοι τοῦτο, ὅτι what is the matter with you, that GJs 17:2.—Of becoming or turning into someth. become someth. εἰς χολὴν πικρίας εἶναι become bitter gall Ac 8:23. εἰς σάρκα μίαν Mt 19:5; Mk 10:8; 1 Cor 6:16; Eph 5:31 (all Gen 2:24. Cp. Syntipas p. 42, 24 οὐκ ἔτι ἔσομαι μετὰ σοῦ εἰς γυναῖκα); τὰ σκολιὰ εἰς εὐθείας Lk 3:5 (Is 40:4); εἰς πατέρα 2 Cor 6:18; Hb 1:5 (2 Km 7:14; 1 Ch 22:10; 28:6); εἰς τὸ ἕν 1J 5:8.— Serve as someth. (IPriene 50, 39 [c. II B.C.] εἶναι εἰς φυλακὴν τ. πόλεως; Aesop., Fab. 28 H.=18 P.; 26 Ch.; 18 H-H. εἰς ὠφέλειαν; Gen 9:13; s. also εἰς 4d) 1 Cor 14:22; Col 2:22; Js 5:3.—Of something being ἀνεκτότερον ἔσται it will be more tolerable τινί for someone Lk 10:12, 14.
    ⑦ to exist as possibility ἔστιν w. inf. foll. it is possible, one can (Περὶ ὕψους 6; Diog. L. 1, 110 ἔστιν εὑρεῖν=one can find; Just., A I, 59, 10 ἔστι ταῦτα ἀκοῦσαι καὶ μαθεῖν; D. 42, 3 ἰδεῖν al.; Mel., P. 19, 127); neg. οὐκ ἔστιν νῦν λέγειν it is not possible to speak at this time Hb 9:5. οὐκ ἔστιν φαγεῖν it is impossible to eat 1 Cor 11:20 (so Hom. et al.; UPZ 70, 23 [152/151 B.C.] οὐκ ἔστι ἀνακύψαι με πώποτε … ὑπὸ τῆς αἰσχύνης; 4 Macc 13:5; Wsd 5:10; Sir 14:16; 18:6; EpJer 49 al.; EpArist 163; Jos., Ant. 2, 335; Ath. 22, 3 ἔστιν εἰπεῖν).
    ⑧ to have a point of derivation or origin, be,/come from somewhere ἐκ τῆς ἐξουσίας Ἡρῴδου from Herod’s jurisdiction Lk 23:7; ἐκ Ναζαρέτ (as an insignificant place) J 1:46; ἐκ τῆς γῆς 3:31; ἐκ γυναικός 1 Cor 11:8 al. ἐξ οὐρανοῦ, ἐξ ἀνθρώπων be of heavenly (divine), human descent Mt 21:25; Mk 11:30; Lk 20:4. Be generated by (cp. Sb 8141, 21f [ins I B.C.] οὐδʼ ἐκ βροτοῦ ἤεν ἄνακτος, ἀλλὰ θεοῦ μεγάλου ἔκγονος; En 106:6) Mt 1:20. Esp. in Johannine usage ἐκ τοῦ διαβόλου εἶναι originate from the devil J 8:44; 1J 3:8. ἐκ τοῦ πονηροῦ 3:12; ἐκ τοῦ κόσμου J 15:19; 17:14, 16; 1J 4:5. ἐκ τῆς ἀληθείας εἶναι 2:21; J 18:37 etc. Cp. 9 end.
    ⑨ to belong to someone or someth. through association or genetic affiliation, be, belong w. simple gen. (X., Hell. 2, 4, 36; Iambl., Vi. Pyth. 33, 230 τῶν Πυθαγορείων) οἱ τῆς ὁδοῦ ὄντες those who belong to the Way Ac 9:2. εἰμὶ Παύλου I belong to Paul 1 Cor 1:12; 3:4; cp. Ro 8:9; 2 Cor 10:7; 1 Ti 1:20; Ac 23:6. ἡμέρας εἶναι belong to the day 1 Th 5:8, cp. vs. 5. W. ἔκ τινος 1 Cor 12:15f; Mt 26:73; Mk 14:69f; Lk 22:58 al. (cp. X., Mem. 3, 6, 17; oft LXX). ἐκ τοῦ ἀριθμοῦ τῶν δώδεκα belong to the twelve 22:3. ὅς ἐστιν ἐξ ὑμῶν who is a fellow-countryman of yours Col 4:9.—To belong through origin 2 Cor 4:7. Of Mary: ἦν τῆς φυλῆς τοῦ Δαυίδ was of David’s line GJs 10:1. Cp. 8 above.
    ⑩ to have someth. to do with someth. or someone, be. To denote a close relationship ἐξ ἔργων νόμου εἶναι rely on legal performance Gal 3:10. ὁ νόμος οὐκ ἔστιν ἐκ πίστεως the law has nothing to do with faith vs. 12.—To denote a possessor Mt 5:3, 10; l9:14; Mk 12:7; Lk 18:16; 1 Cor 6:19. Esp. of God who owns the Christian Ac 27:23; 1 Cor 3:23; 2 Ti 2:19 (Num 16:5). οὐδʼ εἶναι τὸν κόσμον θεοῦ, ἀλλὰ ἀγγέλων AcPlCor 1:15 (cp. Just., A II, 13, 4 ὅσα … καλῶς εἴρηται, ἡμῶν τῶν χριστιανῶν ἐστι).—W. possess. pron. ὑμετέρα ἐστὶν ἡ βασιλεία Lk 6:20. οὐκ ἔστιν ἐμὸν δοῦναι Mk 10:40 (cp. Just., A I, 4, 2 ὑμέτερον ἀγωνιᾶσαί ἐστι ‘it is a matter for your concern’).—To denote function (X., An. 2, 1, 4) οὐχ ὑμῶν ἐστιν it is no concern of yours Ac 1:7—Of quality παιδεία οὐ δοκεῖ χαρᾶς εἶναι discipline does not seem to be (partake of) joy Hb 12:11.—10:39.
    ⑪ as an auxiliary: very commonly the simple tense forms are replaced by the periphrasis εἶναι and the ptc. (B-D-F §352–55; Mlt. 225–27, 249; Mlt-H. 451f; Rdm.2 102, 105, 205; Kühner-G. I 38ff; Rob. 374–76, 1119f; CTurner, Marcan Usage: JTS 28, 1927 349–51; GKilpatrick, BT 7, ’56, 7f; very oft. LXX).
    ⓐ (as in Hom et al.) w. the pf. ptc. to express the pf., plpf. and fut. pf. act. and pass. (s. Mayser 329; 377) ἦσαν ἐληλυθότες they had come Lk 5:17. ἦν αὐτῶν ἡ καρδία πεπωρωμένη their hearts were hardened Mk 6:52. ἠλπικότες ἐσμέν we have set our hope 1 Cor 15:19. ὁ καιρὸς συνεσταλμένος ἐστίν the time has become short 7:29. ἦν ἑστώς (En 12:3) he was standing (more exactly he took his stand) Lk 5:1.
    ⓑ w. pres. ptc. (B-D-F §353).
    α. to express the pres. ἐστὶν προσαναπληροῦσα τὰ ὑστερήματα supplies the wants 2 Cor 9:12 (Just., A I, 26, 5 Μαρκίων … καὶ νῦν ἔτι ἐστὶ διδάσκων; Mel., P. 61, 441 ἐστὶν … κηρυσσόμενον).
    β. impf. or aor. ἦν καθεύδων he was sleeping Mk 4:38. ἦσαν ἀναβαίνοντες … ἦν προάγων 10:32; cp. Lk 1:22; 5:17; 11:14 al. (JosAs 1:3 ἦν συνάγων τὸν σίτον; Mel., P. 80, 580 ἦσθα εὐφραινόμενος). ἦν τὸ φῶς τὸ ἀλήθινόν … ἐρχόμενον εἰς τὸν κόσμον the true light entered the world J 1:9, w. ἦν introducing a statement in dramatic contrast to the initial phrase of vs. 8.—To denote age (Demetr.: 722 Fgm. 1, 2 al. Jac.; POxy 275, 9 [66 A.D.] οὐδέπω ὄντα τῶν ἐτῶν; Tob 14:11) Mk 5:42; Lk 3:23; Ac 4:22; GJs 12:3.—Mussies 304–6.
    γ. fut. ἔσῃ σιωπῶν you will be silent Lk 1:20; cp. 5:10; Mt 24:9; Mk 13:13; Lk 21:17, 24 al.; 2 Cl 17:7 Bihlm. (the child) shall serve him (God).
    ⓒ w. aor. ptc. as plpf. (Aelian, NA 7, 11; Hippiatr. 34, 14, vol. I p. 185, 3 ἦν σκευάσας; ISyriaW 2070b ἦν κτίσας; AcThom 16; 27 [Aa II/2 p. 123, 2f; p. 142, 10]; B-D-F §355 m.—JVogeser, Z. Sprache d. griech. Heiligenlegenden, diss. Munich 1907, 14; JWittmann, Sprachl. Untersuchungen zu Cosmas Indicopleustes, diss. Munich 1913, 20; SPsaltes, Gramm. d. byzant. Chroniken 1913, 230; Björck [διδάσκω end] 75; B-D-F §355). ἦν βληθείς had been thrown Lk 23:19; J 18:30 v.l.—GPt 6:23; 12:51. (Cp. Just., A II, 10, 2 διʼ εὑρέσεως … ἐστὶ πονηθέντα αὐτοῖς ‘they achieved through investigation’).
    ⓓ Notice esp. the impersonals δέον ἐστίν it is necessary (Pla. et al.; POxy 727, 19; Sir praef. ln. 3; 1 Macc 12:11 δέον ἐστὶν καὶ πρέπον) Ac 19:36; εἰ δέον ἐστίν if it must be 1 Pt 1:6 (s. δεῖ 2a); 1 Cl 34:2; πρέπον ἐστίν it is appropriate (Pla. et al.; POxy 120, 24; 3 Macc 7:13) Mt 3:15; 1 Cor 11:13.
    ⓔ In many cases the usage w. the ptc. serves to emphasize the duration of an action or condition (BGU 183, 25 ἐφʼ ὸ̔ν χρόνον ζῶσα ᾖ Σαταβούς); JosAs 2:1 ἦν … ἐξουθενοῦσα καὶ καταπτύουσα πάντα ἄνδρα). ἦν διδάσκων he customarily taught Mk 1:22; Lk 4:31; 19:47. ἦν θέλων he cherished the wish 23:8. ἦσαν νηστεύοντες they were keeping the fast Mk 2:18. ἦσαν συλλαλοῦντες they were conversing for a while 9:4. ἦν προσδεχόμενος he was waiting for (the kgdm.) 15:43. ἦν συγκύπτουσα she was bent over Lk 13:11.
    ⓕ to emphasize the adjectival idea inherent in the ptc. rather than the concept of action expressed by the finite verb ζῶν εἰμι I am alive Rv 1:18. ἦν ὑποτασσόμενος he was obedient Lk 2:51. ἦν ἔχων κτήματα πολλά he was very rich Mt 19:22; Mk 10:22. ἴσθι ἐξουσίαν ἔχων you shall have authority Lk 19:17 (Lucian, Tim. 35 ἴσθι εὐδαιμονῶν). ἦν καταλλάσσων (God) was reconciling 2 Cor 5:19 (cp. Mel., P. 83, 622 οὗτος ἦν ὁ ἐκλεξάμενός σε; Ath. 15, 2 οὗτός ἐστιν ὁ … καρπούμενος).—LMcGaughy, Toward a Descriptive Analysis of ΕΙΝΑΙ as a Linking Verb in the Gk. NT, diss. Vanderbilt, ’70 (s. esp. critique of treatment of εἰμί in previous edd. of this lexicon pp. 12–15).—Mlt. 228. B. 635. DELG. M-M. EDNT. TW. Sv.

    Ελληνικά-Αγγλικά παλαιοχριστιανική Λογοτεχνία > εἰμί

  • 6 στέλλω

    στέλλω, Il.4.294, etc.: [tense] fut.
    A

    στελῶ S.Ph. 640

    , [dialect] Ep.

    στελέω Od.2.287

    : [tense] aor.

    ἔστειλα Th.7.20

    , [dialect] Ep.

    στεῖλα Od.14.248

    : [tense] pf.

    ἔσταλκα Arr.An.2.11.9

    , ([etym.] ἀπ-, ἐπ-) Isoc.1.2, E.Ph. 863: [tense] plpf.

    ἐστάλκει Arr.An.3.16.6

    , ([etym.] ἐπ-) Th.5.37:—[voice] Med., Il.23.285, etc.: [tense] fut.

    στελοῦμαι Lyc.604

    : [tense] aor. ἐστειλάμην, [dialect] Ep. στειλ-, Il.1.433, S.OT 434, etc.:—[voice] Pass., [tense] fut. στᾰλήσομαι ([etym.] ἀπο-) Aeschin.3.114 (v.l.), D.24.93; simple

    σταλήσομαι J.AJ2.4.2

    : [tense] aor. ἐστάλθην (in compd. ἀποσταλθέντες) GDI5186.4 ([place name] Crete), cf.Sch. Od.8.21; more freq. ἐστάλην [ᾰ], Pi.O.13.49, Hdt.4.159, ([etym.] ἐπ-) Th.1.91, etc.: [tense] pf.

    ἔσταλμαι Hdt.7.62

    , Pl.Lg. 833d, etc.: [tense] plpf.

    ἐστάλμην Philostr. VA3.25

    , [ per.] 3pl.

    ἐστάλατο Hes.Sc. 288

    ; ἐσταλάδατο and ἐστελάδατο dub.ll.in Hdt.7.89 (leg. ἐστάλατο):— make ready,

    οὓς ἑτάρους στέλλοντα καὶ ὀτρύνοντα μάχεσθαι Il.4.294

    ;

    οὔτε κέ σε στέλλοιμι μάχην ἐς κυδιάνειραν 12.325

    ; νῆα ς. rig or fit her out, Od.2.287, cf. 14.247;

    πλοῖον Hdt.3.52

    ;

    ναῦς τριάκοντα Th.7.20

    ;

    τὰ ἐκ νεώς S.Ph. 1077

    : also στρατιήν, στόλον, στρατόν, fit out an armament, get it ready, Hdt.3.141, 5.64, A.Pers. 177, etc.;

    ᾧ δὴ τόνδε πλοῦν ἐστείλαμεν S.Aj. 1045

    : also στέλλειν τινὰ ἐσθῆτι furnish with, array in, a garment, Hdt.3.14;

    χιτῶνι S.Tr. 612

    : c. dupl. acc.,

    στολὴν σ. τινά E.Ba. 827

     sq.;

    σ. τινὰς ὡς δεσποίνας X.HG5.4.5

    ; σ. ἕλκος dress it, Hp.VC14; bury, ἐνὶ γαίῃ ς. A.R.3.205:—[voice] Med., στεῖλαί νυν ἀμφὶ χρωτὶ.. πέπλους put on robes, E.Ba. 821: c. dat., ἐσθῆτι στειλάμενοι having dressed themselves in.., Luc.Philops.32: metaph.,

    σ. κιθάρην Hermesian.7.2

    :—[voice] Pass., fit oneself out, get ready, ἄλλοι δὲ στέλλεσθε do you others prepare (to compete in the games), Il.23.285;

    στρατὸν κάλλιστα ἐσταλμένον Hdt.7.26

    , cf. 3.14, 7.93: c. acc. cogn., τὴν αὐτὴν ταύτην ἐστ. ib.62: c. dat., πρεπούσῃ στολῇ ἐστ. Pl.Lg. 833d: folld. by a Prep.,

    ἐσταλμένος ἐπὶ πόλεμον X.An.3.2.7

    ; ἐς ἄγραν, ἐπ' ἄγρην, Lyc.604, AP 7.535 (Mel.);

    περὶ ὄργια E.Ba. 1000

     (lyr.): c. inf., ἐστέλλετο ἀπιέναι he prepared to go, Hdt.3.124;

    κινεῖν κώπας E.Tr. 181

     (lyr.).
    II dispatch, send,

    ἐς οἶκον πάλιν A.Pr. 389

    , cf. E.IA 119 (lyr.), etc.;

    ἐξ ἑνὸς στείλαντος S.OC 737

    :—[voice] Med. and [voice] Pass., set out, or (esp. in [tense] aor. 2 [voice] Pass.) journey, Hdt.1.165, 3.53, 4.159, 5.92.β: c. acc. cogn.,

    ὁδὸν στέλλεσθαι S.Ph. 1416

     (anap.), cf. A.R.4.296;

    πρὸς θάλασσαν E.Hel. 1527

    ;

    ἐπὶ τὸν χρυσόν Hdt.3.102

    ;

    ἐπὶ πλοῖα X.An.5.1.5

    ;

    τούτων γὰρ οὕνεκ' ἐστάλην S.Aj. 328

    ;

    ἴδιος ἐν κοινῷ σταλείς Pi.O.13.49

    ;

    οἷπερ ἐστάλην ὁδοῦ S.El. 404

    ;

    οἴκαδε Τροίας ἄπο E.Tr. 1264

    ; κατὰ γῆν (v.l. γῆς) X.An.5.6.5: abs.,

    στέλλου, κομίζου

     begone!

    A.Pr. 394

    : c. acc. loci, ὀμφαλὸν γῆς ς. E.Med. 668;

    μέλαθρα Id.HF 109

     (lyr.); of things, to be sent, S.Tr. 776: metaph. of speech,

    ἀέρα ἐκπέμπειν στελλόμενον ὑφ' ἑκάστων τῶν παθῶν Epicur.Ep.1p.27U.

    2 [voice] Act. intr. in sense of the [voice] Pass. (in Hdt. and Trag.), prepare to go, start, set forth,

    ἔστελλε ἐς ἀποικίην Hdt.4.147

    , cf. 148, 5.125, S.Ph. 571, 640: c. acc. cogn.,

    κέλευθον τήνδε.. ἔστειλα A.Pers. 609

    .
    III summon, fetch, bring a person to a place, S.OT 860, cf. OC 298, Ph. 623, 983;

    ὑμᾶς ἔστειλ' ἱκέσθαι Id.Ant. 165

    , cf. Ph.60, 495; [ ἐμπορίαν] Pl.Ep. 313e:—[voice] Med., σ' ἂν οἴκους τοὺς ἐμοὺς ἐστειλάμην I would have sent for thee.., S.OT 434:—[voice] Pass., Id.OC 550 (cj.).
    IV gather up, make compact, esp. as a nautical term, furl, take in,

    ἱστία.. στεῖλαν Od.3.11

    , 16.353;

    στείλασα λαῖφος A.Supp. 723

    :—[voice] Med.,

    ἱστία μὲν στείλαντο Il.1.433

    , cf. Call.Del. 320, Arist.Mech. 851b8: abs., στέλλεσθαι (sc. ἱστία) Teles p.10 H., Plb.6.44.6; so ἐπιστολάδην δὲ χιτῶνας ἐστάλατο they girded up, tucked up their clothes to work, Hes.Sc. 288, cf. A.R.4.45: abs.,

    στειλάμενος σιγᾷς AP11.149

    .
    2 check, Epicur.Ep.1p.7U.; repress, Ph.2.274, etc.:—[voice] Med., Plb.8.20.4; λόγον στειλώμεθα draw in, shorten our words, i.e. not speak out the whole truth, E.Ba. 669; σ. τὸ συμβεβηκός hush it up, Plb.3.85.7; πρόσωπον στέλλεσθαι draw up one's face, look rueful, Phryn.PS p.107 B.
    3 Medic., bind, make costive, τὰ στέλλοντα astringents, opp. τὰ καθαίροντα, Gal.1.221, cf. Alex.Aphr.Pr.Praef.:—[voice] Pass., φλέβες στέλλονται shrink up, Nic.Al. 193.
    4 [voice] Med., restrict one's diet, οὔτ' ἂν ἀπόσχοιντο ὧν ἐπιθυμέουσιν, οὔτε στείλαιντο (v.l. ὑποστ-) Hp.VM5; στελλόμενοι τοῦτο avoiding this, 2 Ep.Cor.8.20;

    στέλλεο Περσεφόνας ζᾶλον Supp.Epigr.2.615

     ([place name] Teos). (Cf. εὔσπολον, κασπολέω, σπολάς, σπόλος, σπελλάμεναι; prob. I.-E. sq[uglide]el-. but not found in cogn. languages; I.-E. st(h)el- is prob. found in OSlav. st[icaron]lati 'spread out', Lat. lātus (fr. *stlātus) 'broad', with which στέλλω may be cogn.)

    Greek-English dictionary (Αγγλικά Ελληνικά-λεξικό) > στέλλω

  • 7 δικαιόω

    δικαιόω fut. δικαιώσω; 1 aor. ἐδικαίωσα. Pass.: 1 fut. δικαιωθήσομαι; 1 aor. ἐδικαιώθην, subj. δικαιωθῶ, ptc. δικαιωθείς; pf. δεδικαίωμαι Ro 6:7; 1 Cor 4:4; ptc. δεδικαιωμένος Lk 18:14 (Soph., Hdt.; Aristot., EN 1136a; et al.; pap, LXX; En 102:10; TestAbr A 13 p. 93, 14 [Stone p. 34]; Test12Patr; ApcSed, 14:8 p. 136, 15 Ja.; Jos., Ant. 17, 206; Just.; Ath., R. 53, 1; 65, 14) to practice δικαιοσύνη.
    ① to take up a legal cause, show justice, do justice, take up a cause τινά (Polyb. 3, 31, 9 ὑμᾶς δὲ αὐτοὺς … δικαιώσεσθε ‘you will (find it necessary to) take up your own cause’ = you will sit in judgment on yourselves; Cass. Dio 48, 46 ‘Antony was not taking Caesar’s side’ in the matter; 2 Km 15:4; Ps 81:3) δικαιῶσαι δίκαιον take up the cause of an upright pers. 1 Cl 16:12 (Is 53:11); τινί χήρᾳ (χήραν v.l.) 8:4 (Is 1:17 ‘take up the cause of the widow’).
    ② to render a favorable verdict, vindicate.
    ⓐ as activity of humans justify, vindicate, treat as just (Appian, Liby. 17 §70; Gen 44:16; Sir 10:29; 13:22; 23:11 al.) θέλων δ. ἑαυτόν wishing to justify himself Lk 10:29; δ. ἑαυτὸν ἐνώπιόν τινος j. oneself before someone=‘you try to make out a good case for yourselves before the public’ 16:15 (δ. ἐαυτόν as En 102:10; but s. JJeremias, ZNW 38, ’39, 117f [against him SAalen, NTS 13, ’67, 1ff]). ὁ δικαιούμενός μοι the one who vindicates himself before (or against) me B 6:1 (cp. Is 50:8). τελῶναι ἐδικαίωσαν τὸν θεόν βαπτισθέντες tax-collectors affirmed God’s uprightness and got baptized i.e. by ruling in God’s favor they admitted that they were in the wrong and took a new direction (opp. τὴν βουλὴν τ. θεοῦ ἀθετεῖν) Lk 7:29 (cp. PsSol 2:15; 3:5; 8:7, 23; 9:2).
    ⓑ of experience or activity of transcendent figures, esp. in relation to humans
    α. of wisdom ἐδικαιώθη ἀπὸ τῶν τέκνων αὐτῆς is vindicated by her children (on δικ. ἀπό cp. Is 45:25. S. also Appian, Basil. 8: δικαιόω=consider someth. just or correct) Lk 7:35; also ἀπὸ τῶν ἔργων αὐτῆς Mt 11:19 (v.l. τέκνων). On this saying s. DVölter, NThT 8, 1919, 22–42; JBover, Biblica 6, 1925, 323–25; 463–65; M-JLagrange, ibid. 461–63. Of an angel Hm 5, 1, 7.
    β. of God be found in the right, be free of charges (cp. TestAbr A 13 p. 93, 14 [Stone p. 34] ‘be vindicated’ in a trial by fire) Mt 12:37 (opp. καταδικάζειν). δεδικαιωμένος Lk 18:14; GJs 5:1; δεδικαιωμένη (Salome) 20:4 (not pap). Ac 13:39 (but s. 3 below); Rv 22:11 v.l; Dg 5:14.—Paul, who has influenced later wr. (cp. Iren. 3, 18, 7 [Harv. II 102, 2f]), uses the word almost exclusively of God’s judgment. As affirmative verdict Ro 2:13. Esp. of pers. δικαιοῦσθαι be acquitted, be pronounced and treated as righteous and thereby become δίκαιος, receive the divine gift of δικαιοσύνη through faith in Christ Jesus and apart from νόμος as a basis for evaluation (MSeifrid, Justification by Faith—The Origin and Development of a Central Pauline Theme ’92) 3:20 (Ps 142:2), 24, 28; 4:2; 5:1, 9; 1 Cor 4:4; Gal 2:16f (Ps 142:2); 3:11, 24; 5:4; Tit 3:7; Phil 3:12 v.l.; B 4:10; 15:7; IPhld 8:2; Dg 9:4; (w. ἁγιάζεσθαι) Hv 3, 9, 1. οὐ παρὰ τοῦτο δεδικαίωμαι I am not justified by this (after 1 Cor 4:4) IRo 5:1. ἵνα δικαιωθῇ σου ἡ σάρξ that your flesh (as the sinful part) may be acquitted Hs 5, 7, 1; δ. ἔργοις by (on the basis of) works, by what one does 1 Cl 30:3; cp. Js 2:21, 24f (ἔργον 1a and πίστις 2dδ); διʼ ἐαυτῶν δ. by oneself=as a result of one’s own accomplishments 1 Cl 32:4. (cp. κατὰ νόμον Hippol., Ref. 7, 34, 1).—Since Paul views God’s justifying action in close connection with the power of Christ’s resurrection, there is sometimes no clear distinction between the justifying action of acquittal and the gift of new life through the Holy Spirit as God’s activity in promoting uprightness in believers. Passages of this nature include Ro 3:26, 30; 4:5 (on δικαιοῦν τὸν ἀσεβῆ cp. the warning against accepting δῶρα to arrange acquittal Ex 23:7 and Is 5:23; δικαιούμενοι δωρεάν Ro 3:24 is therefore all the more pointed); 8:30, 33 (Is 50:8); Gal 3:8; Dg 9:5. For the view (held since Chrysostom) that δ. in these and other pass. means ‘make upright’ s. Goodsp., Probs. 143–46, JBL 73, ’54, 86–91.
    ③ to cause someone to be released from personal or institutional claims that are no longer to be considered pertinent or valid, make free/pure (the act. Ps 72:13) in our lit. pass. δικαιοῦμαι be set free, made pure ἀπό from (Sir 26:29; TestSim 6:1, both δικ. ἀπὸ [τῆς] ἁμαρτίας) ἀπὸ πάντων ὧν οὐκ ἠδυνήθητε ἐν νόμω Μωϋσέως δικαιωθῆναι from everything fr. which you could not be freed by the law of Moses Ac 13:38; cp. vs. 39. ὁ ἀποθανὼν δεδικαίωται ἀπὸ τ. ἁμαρτίας the one who died is freed fr. sin Ro 6:7 (s. KKuhn, ZNW 30, ’31, 305–10; EKlaar, ibid. 59, ’68, 131–34). In the context of 1 Cor 6:11 ἐδικαιώθητε means you have become pure.—In the language of the mystery religions (Rtzst., Mysterienrel.3 258ff) δικαιοῦσθαι refers to a radical inner change which the initiate experiences (Herm. Wr. 13, 9 χωρὶς γὰρ κρίσεως ἰδὲ πῶς τὴν ἀδικίαν ἐξήλασεν. ἐδικαιώθημεν, ὦ τέκνον, ἀδικίας ἀπούσης) and approaches the sense ‘become deified’. Some are inclined to find in 1 Ti 3:16 a similar use; but see under 4.
    ④ to demonstrate to be morally right, prove to be right, pass. of God is proved to be right Ro 3:4; 1 Cl 18:4 (both Ps 50:6). Of Christ 1 Ti 3:16.—Lit. s. on δικαιοσύνη 3c.—HRosman, Iustificare (δικαιοῦν) est verbum causativum: Verbum Domini 21, ’41, 144–47; NWatson, Δικ. in the LXX, JBL 79, ’60, 255–66; CCosgrove, JBL 106, ’87, 653–70.—DELG s.v. δίκη. M-M. EDNT. TW. Spicq.

    Ελληνικά-Αγγλικά παλαιοχριστιανική Λογοτεχνία > δικαιόω

  • 8 ὑποτίθημι

    A place under,

    ὑπὸ κύκλα ἑκάστῳ πυθμένι θῆκεν Il.18.375

    ; τὰ φρύγαν' ὑ. puts the firewood under, Telecl.40; θεοῦ βάσεις ὑποτιθέντος putting legs or feet under them, Pl.Ti. 92a, cf. Arist.PA 686a34;

    σιδηρᾶς κανονίδας ὑ. Ph.Bel.57.11

    , cf. 60.31, al.;

    ὑπὸ ποταμοὺς πολλοὺς.. πόλιν ὑ. Pl.Lg. 682c

    ;

    κύλικα ὑπὸ τὴν κλίνην IG12(5).593.21

     (Iulis, v B. C.); ὀχετὸν ἐκποιήσαντι καὶ ὑποθέντι ib. 12.373.66;

    [φοίνικας] ὑ. X.Cyr.7.5.12

    ;

    ἀλεκτορίδι ὑ. τὰ ᾠά Arist.HA 564b3

    ; ἑαυτὴν [ τῷ ἄρρενι] ib. 540a11;

    ὑ. <τι> ὑπὸ τὸν ὀφθαλμόν Id.Pr. 874a9

    ; of a prancing horse,

    ὑ. τὰ ὀπίσθια σκέλη ὑπὸ τὰ ἐμπρόσθια X.Eq. 11.2

    ; τὰ ὄπισθεν σκέλη διὰ πολλοῦ ὑ. bring up his hind legs far apart from one another, ib.1.14;

    κατακλίνεται [ὁ λαγὼς] ὑποθεὶς τὰ ὑποκώλια ὑπὸ τὰς λαγόνας Id.Cyn.5.10

    : metaph.,

    ὑποχειρίους τοῖς ἐχθροῖς ὑ. τὰς αὑτῶν πατρίδας Pl.Plt. 308a

    ; ἔστε ὑπέθηκε Ἀΐδᾳ until he handed him over to Hades, of a hound attacking a boar, PCair.Zen.532.11 (iii B. C.):—[voice] Med., place under one's feet, τι X.Cyr.8.1.41;

    τοὺς μηροὺς ὑφ' αὑτά Arist.IA 713a23

    .
    2 place under a certain class, γεωργικῇ, θηρευτικῇ, etc., Pl.Plt. 289a.
    b subjoin, enclose, append a document,

    ὑποτέθεικά σοι τὸ ἀντίγραφον PLille4.2

     (iii B. C.), cf. Sammelb.5675.2 (ii B. C.), etc.: so in [voice] Med., PLond.3.921.10 (ii/iii A. D.).
    II set before one, offer, suggest,

    τὴν ἐν φίλοις δικαιοτάτην ὑπόθεσιν ἔχω ὑποτιθέναι X.Cyr.5.5.13

    ; hold out hope,

    ὑποτιθεῖς τίν' ἐλπίδα; E.Or. 1186

    , cf. X.HG4.8.28, D.23.58, Plu.2.256a, Lys. 23, Aristid.1.379 J.;

    τοῦ Ἑλληνικοῦ ἐλπίδα ἣν ὑπετίθει αὐτῷ δουλώσειν Th.1.138

    ;

    ἡ εὐπραγία ὑ. ἰσχὺν τῆς ἐλπίδος Id.4.65

    ; ὑπέθηκας ὀρθῶς τοὺς λόγους, i. e. you have given good advice, E.IA 507; τὸν ὑποθέντα τὰς τέχνας γυναιξὶ τόνδε he who proposed these tricks to the women, Id.Ba. 675:—earlier in [voice] Med., suggest,

    βουλὴν Ἀργείοις ὑποθησόμεθ' ἥ τις ὀνήσει Il.8.36

    ;

    ὄφρα οἱ ἤ τι ἔπος ὑποθήσεαι ἠέ τι ἔργον Od.4.163

    , cf. Il.11.788;

    δόλον ὑπεθήκατο Hes.Th. 175

    ;

    ἄλλα μὲν αὐτὸς ἐνὶ φρεσὶ σῇσι νοήσεις, ἄλλα δὲ καὶ δαίμων ὑποθήσεται Od.3.27

    ;

    Κροῖσος ταῦτά οἱ ὑπετίθετο Hdt. 1.156

    , cf. 3.36;

    ἔπεμψέ με σωτηρίην ὑποθησόμενον ὑμῖν, ἤν περ βούλησθε πείθεσθαι Id.5.98

    , cf. 7.237;

    σμικρὸν ὑποθέσθαι τοῖς κριταῖσι βούλομαι Ar.Ec. 1154

    : c. dat. pers. only, advise, counsel, admonish one, Od.2.194, 5.143, Ar.Av. 1362, Lys. 522 (anap.), Pl.Chrm. 155d: with an Adv.,

    ἀλλά μοι εὖ ὑπόθευ Od. 15.310

    , cf. Hdt.1.90;

    αὐτάρ τοι πυκινῶς ὑποθησόμεθ', αἴ κε πίθηαι Il. 21.293

    .
    2 [voice] Med., in stronger sense, enjoin,

    ταῦτα τοῖσι ὑπολειπομένοισι ὑποθέμενος ὁ Δαρεῖος Hdt.4.135

    ; of a doctor, Pl.Plt. 295c; of Nestor, Id.Hp.Ma.286b; [

    Μέττιος Ῥοῦφος] τῷ στρατηγῷ περὶ τούτου ὑπέθετο POxy. 237 vi 40

     (ii A. D.); gloss on ἐπιστέλλει, Sch.S.OT 106; of Pythagoras,

    τὴν εἰς τὸ σπονδειακὸν μεταβολὴν ὑπέθετο τῷ αὐλητῇ Iamb.VP25.112

    ;

    τοῖς ἀπὸ τοῦ νομοῦ ὑπόδειγμα τῆς ἀπειθίας ὑ. BGU 747 ii 14

     (ii A. D.); δύο σκοποὺς ὑποθέσθαι τῆς φλεβοτομίας prescribe two conditions of (successful) venesection, Gal.15.765.
    3 [voice] Med., instruct, demonstrate,

    γραμματικόν τι ποιῆσαι ἄλλου ὑποθεμένου Arist. EN 1105a23

    ; δεῖ ὑποθέσθαι τί λέγομεν τὸ βαρύ as a preliminary we must explain, Id.Cael. 269b20;

    ὑ. ὡς χρὴ μάχεσθαι Philostr.Her.10.5

    ;

    Φινεὺς.. τοῖς Ἀργοναύταις.. περὶ τῶν συμπληγάδων ὑπέθετο πετρῶν Apollod.1.9.22

    ;

    ὁ ὑποθέμενος αὐτῷ τὴν ἀνάγνωσιν Arr.Epict.1.26.13

    , cf. 2.2.21;

    παλαισμάτων εἴδη ὁπόσα ἐστί, δηλώσει ὁ παιδοτρίβης, καιρούς τε ὑποθέμενος κτλ. Philostr.Gym.14

    : c. acc. et inf.,

    ὑ. τῷ ἐπιεικεῖ παιδὶ ῥᾴδιον πεφυκέναι κτλ. Iamb.VP10.51

    .
    III [voice] Med., propose to oneself as a task,

    πολεμιστήριον [ἵππον] ὑπεθέμεθα ὠνεῖσθαι X.Eq.3.7

    ;

    δεῖ ὑποτίθεσθαι κατ' εὐχήν, μηδὲν μέντοι ἀδύνατον Arist. Pol. 1265a17

    ; make up one's mind, adopt as a policy,

    παρὰ τὸ δίκαιον τὸ ξυμφέρον λέγειν ὑπέθεσθε Th.5.90

    ;

    τοῦθ' ὑπέθετο, δεινότατον πρᾶγμα, οἶμαι, ὅπως ἐν ἐκείνῳ εἴη.. φάναι And.1.39

    ;

    ἕνα τοῦτον ὑποθέμενος τὸν σκοπόν, ἅπαντας ἡμᾶς ἀγορεύειν κακῶς Luc.Pisc.7

    ;

    πρὶν τὴν ἀρχὴν ὀρθῶς ὑποθέσθαι, μάταιον ἡγοῦμαι περὶ τῆς τελευτῆς ὁντινοῦν ποιεῖσθαι λόγον D.3.2

    :—[voice] Pass.,

    ὁ ὑποτεθεὶς σκοπός Arist.EN 1144a24

    .
    2 propose to oneself as a subject of discussion or argument,

    ἀπ' ἐμαυτοῦ ἄρξωμαι καὶ τῆς ἐμαυτοῦ ὑποθέσεως, περὶ τοῦ ἑνὸς αὐτοῦ ὑποθέμενος, εἴτε ἕν ἐστιν εἴτε μή [ἕν], τί χρὴ συμβαίνειν; Pl.Prm. 137b

    , cf. Ti. 26a;

    ἵνα μὴ δοκῶ περὶ τὰ μέρη διατρίβειν, ὑπὲρ ὅλων τῶν πραγμάτων ὑποθέμενος Isoc. 4.51

    , cf. 12.119;

    ὥσπερ ὑπεθέμην Thphr.Char.Prooem.5

    ;

    περὶ ἀέρος εἰπόντες, ὥσπερ ὑπεθέμεθα Arist.Mete. 340a23

    , cf. Rh. 1432b5, Aeschin. 1.37, 2.102;

    ὑποθησόμεθα ταύτης ἀρχὴν τῆς βύβλου τὴν πρώτην διάβασιν ἐξ Ἰταλίας Ῥωμαίων Plb.1.5.1

    :—[voice] Pass.,

    οἱ ὑποτεθέντες λόγοι Pl. Lg. 812a

    .
    IV [voice] Med., assume as a preliminary,

    ταύτην μὲν δὴ πυρὸς ἀρχὴν καὶ τῶν ἄλλων σωμάτων ὑποτιθέμεθα Id.Ti. 53d

    ;

    ὑποθέμενος ἑκάστοτε λόγον.., ἃ μὲν ἄν μοι δοκῇ τούτῳ συμφωνεῖν, τίθημι ὡς ἀληθῆ ὄντα Id.Phd. 100a

    ;

    οἱ περὶ τὰς γεωμετρίας.. ὑποθέμενοι.. τὰ σχήματα,.. ποιησάμενοι ὑποθέσεις αὐτά Id.R. 510c

    ;

    ὑπόθεσιν Id.Phd. 101d

    ;

    ὃ ἐξ ἀρχῆς ὑπετιθέμεθα Id.Chrm. 171d

    ;

    ἐὰν ὡς ὂν ὑποθῇ ὃ ὑπετίθεσο Id.Prm. 136c

    ; ὑ. περί τινος ὡς ὄντος ib. 136b, cf. 137b, Plt. 284c;

    ὑ. ὡς τούτου οὕτως ἔχοντος Id.R. 437a

    : c. acc. et inf., assume or suppose that.., Id.Phd. 100b, Prt. 339d: without inf., [ τὴν ἀρετὴν] διδακτὸν ὑ. assume it to be teachable, ib. 361b;

    τἀναντία οἷς ὑπεθέμην Id.Tht. 165d

    ; ὥσπερ ὑπέθου as you began by requiring, Id.R. 346b (referring to 336d):—[voice] Pass., esp. in [tense] aor. ὑπετέθην (cf.

    ὑπόκειμαι 11.2

    ), Id.Ti. 48e, 61d;

    τὰ ὑποτεθέντα Id.Prm. 136b

    ; τῶν καλῶν τι ἡ σωφροσύνη ὑπετέθη was assumed to be.., Id.Chrm. 160d (referring to 159c);

    τοῦτο δ' ἀδύνατον, ὥστε ψεῦδος τὸ ὑποτεθέν Arist.APr. 61a31

    ; εἰ τοῦτό τις ὑποτεθείη γινώσκειν if it were assumed that one knew this, Phld.Rh.2.17S.
    2 later, assume, suppose, estimate,

    παρέσομαι πρὸς ὑμᾶς, ὡς ὑποτίθεμαι, τῇ ιζ PCair.Zen.247.4

     (iii B. C.); ὑποτιθεμένου τοῦ ποδὸς δραχμῆς the foot being reckoned at one drachma, Supp.Epigr.4.446.14 (Didyma, iii/ii B. C.), cf. PCair.Zen. 15r.34 (iii B. C.); τὸν χιλιάρουρον (sc. ἀμπελῶνα) ὑποτιθέμεθα ἐπὶ τὸ ἔλαττον we assess at the reduced sum, ib.361.9 (iii B. C.); νεώτερον αὐτὸν ὑ. put him down as younger, D.H.4.6; ταῦτα τὸν Ὅμηρον ὡς συστρατιώτην ἔφη εἰρηκέναι καὶ οὐχ ὡς ὑποτιθέμενον not as a composer of fiction, Philostr.Her.4.4.
    V [voice] Act., establish as a preliminary, premise, ταῦθ' ὑποθεὶς ἐπεῖπεν ὡς .. Aeschin.2.157; τοῦθ' ὑποθέντες ἀκούετε τῇ γνώμῃ, τί ἄν, εἴ τις ἔπασχε ταῦθ' ὑμῶν, ἐποίει after deciding in your own minds, D.21.108;

    ῥυθμοὺς καὶ σχῆμα ἐλευθέριον ὑποθεῖσαι μέλος ἢ λόγον ἐναντίον ἀποδοῦναι Pl.Lg. 669c

    .
    VI couch, present,

    τὴν σάρισαν Luc. DMort.27.3

    .
    VII put down as a deposit or stake, pawn, pledge, mortgage,

    τοῦτο τὸ ἐνέχυρον Hdt.2.136

    ; τὴν οἰκίαν, τὴν οὐσίαν, Isoc.21.2, D.28.17, 49.12; ὑπέθεσαν αὐτῷ τοῦ ταλάντου τὰς προσόδους mortgaged their revenues for the talent, Aeschin.3.104;

    τῷ πατρὶ τἀνδράποδα D.27.25

    ;

    δραχμὴν ὑπόθες Diph.73.2

    ;

    ὑποθέμενοι χρυσίον IG12.313.177

    ; τὴν οἰκίαν πωλοῦντα καὶ ὑποτιθέντα selling and mortgaging, i.e. having full ownership of, the house, PCair.Zen.588.1, cf. 9 (iii B. C.), PRyl.162.28 (ii A. D.); cf.

    ὑποθήκη 11

    :—[voice] Med., of the mortgagee, lend money on pledge, D.28.18;

    ὑποθέσθαι τὰ σκεύη τῆς νεώς Id.50.55

    :— but the [voice] Med. is used for the [voice] Act. in later writers, Plu.Cat.Mi.6:— for the [voice] Pass., ὑπόκειμαι is used, except in [tense] aor. 1, πόρους (revenues) ὑποκεῖσθαι αὐτοῖς τούς τε ὑποτεθέντας εἰς τὸ βουλευτήριον .. OGI46.10 (Halic., iii B. C.), cf. AJP56.375 (Colophon, iv B. C., [voice] Med. and [voice] Pass.); cf. τίθημι.
    2 stake, hazard, venture,

    εἰς οἷον κίνδυνον ἔρχῃ ὑποθήσων τὴν ψυχήν Pl.Prt. 313a

    ; τὸν ἴδιον κίνδυνον ὑποθείς at his own risk, D.19.252; also

    ἑαυτὸν ἔγγυον ὑποθείς Plu.Crass.7

    ;

    τὴν ψυχὴν ταῖς τύχαις Luc.Dem.Enc.41

    ;

    τὰ σὰ τοῖς ἐκτός Arr.Epict.2.2.12

    ; τὸν τράχηλον ib.4.1.77; ἑαυτὸν τῷ νόμῳ, i. e. risked the penalties of the law, Philostr.Gym.24;

    οὐδὲ αὑτοὺς ταύταις ὑποθήσομεν ταῖς αἰτίαις Jul.Or.3.112a

    ; νομίμοις ποιναῖς ὑποθεῖναι [ αὐτούς] PMasp.24.50 (vi A. D.); ἑαυτὸν [ ὀργῇ] Plu.Them.24;

    τοῖς κινδύνοις σφᾶς αὐτούς Aristid.1.467

     J.

    Greek-English dictionary (Αγγλικά Ελληνικά-λεξικό) > ὑποτίθημι

  • 9 διηγέομαι

    + V 11-9-8-23-13=64 Gn 24,66; 29,13; 37,9; 40,8.9
    to set out in detail, to describe, to tell [τι] Gn 24,66
    διηγήσησθε εἰς τὰ ὦτα τῶν τέκνων ὑμῶν you may relate to your children Ex 10,2; διηγεῖτο τὴν ἀγωγήν
    *Ps 118(119),85 διηγήσαντο they told me-קראו? for MT כרו they have dug
    Cf. WEVERS 1990, 145; →NIDNTT

    Lust (λαγνεία) > διηγέομαι

  • 10 ἐπί

    ἐπί prep. w. gen., dat., or acc.; s. the lit. on ἀνά, beg. (Hom.+). The basic idea is ‘upon’ (opp. ὑπό) Kühner-G. I 495; s. also Rob 600–605. (In the foll. classifications case use is presented seriatim; in earlier editions of this lexicon all sections, except 13, 17, and 18 [of time], were included under the general rubric ‘Place’.)
    ① marker of location or surface, answering the question ‘where?’ on, upon, near
    ⓐ w. gen., marking a position on a surface ἐ. (τῆς) γῆς on (the) earth (cp. En 9:1; 98:1; ἐ. γῆς 25:6; PsSol 17:2) Mt 6:10, 19; 9:6; 23:9; Mk 6:47 al. (Ar. 12, 1; Just., A I, 54, 7 al.). ἐ. τῆς θαλάσσης on the sea (cp. Job 9:8; Dio Chrys. 10 [11], 129 βαδίζειν ἐ. τῆς θαλ.; Lucian, Philops. 13 βαδίζειν ἐφʼ ὕδατος, VH 2, 4; Artem. 3, 16 ἐ. τ. θαλάσσης περιπατεῖν; schol. on Nicander, Ther. 15 p. 5, 26ff relying on the testimony of Hesiod: Orion was given a gift [δωρεά] by the gods καὶ ἐ. κυμάτων πορεύεσθαι καὶ ἐ. τῆς γῆς) Mt 14:26; Mk 6:48f; J 6:19 (w. acc. P75; s. 4bβ below). ἐ. τῶν νεφελῶν on the clouds Mt 24:30; 26:64 (Da 7:13; cp. Philo, Praem. 8). ἐ. κλίνης 9:2; Lk 17:34. ἐ. τοῦ δώματος on the roof vs. 31; Mt 24:17; 10:27 foll. by pl. W. verbs: κάθημαι ἐ. τινος sit on someth. (Job 2:8; ἐ. τοῦ ἅρματος GrBar 6:2; cp. JosAs 27:1 ἐ. τοῦ ὀχήματος καθεζόμενος; Just., D. 90, 5 ἐ. λίθου καθεζόμενος) Mt 24:3; 27:19; Ac 8:28; Rv 6:16; 9:17 (the same prep. used in Rv w. κάθημαι and dat. s. bα below, and w. acc. cα). ἑστηκέναι ἐ. τινος stand on someth. Ac 21:40; Rv 10:5, 8 (Just., D. 86, 2 ἐστηρίχθαι). With parts of the body: ἐ. χειρῶν αἴρειν carry on (i.e. in/with) their hands Mt 4:6; Lk 4:11 (both Ps 90:12). ἐ. κεφαλῆς on the head (Hdt. 5, 12, 4) J 20:7; 1 Cor 11:10; Rv 12:1. ἐ. τοῦ μετώπου Rv 7:3; 9:4. ἐ. γυμνοῦ on the naked body Mk 14:51. Cp. use of ἐπί w. καθίζω and gen., and ἐπί w. κάθημαι and acc. Mt 19:28.—In a gener. and fig. sense Ac 21:23.
    ⓑ w. dat., gener. suggesting contiguity on, in, above.
    α. answering the question ‘where?’ (Hom. et al.; ins, pap, LXX; Just., D. 105, 5 ἐ. τῷ σταυρῷ; Tat., 9:1 ἐ. τοῖς ὄρεσι; Ath. 20, 1 ἐ. τῷ μετώπῳ; Mel., P. 19, 131 ἐ. σάκκῳ καὶ σποδῷ) ἐ. πίνακι on a platter Mt 14:8, 11; Mk 6:25, 28. ἀνακλῖναι ἐ. τῷ χλωρῷ χόρτῳ on the green grass 6:39. ἐ. τοῖς κραβάττοις vs. 55. ἐπέκειτο ἐπʼ αὐτῷ lay on it (or before it) J 11:38. καθήμενος ἐ. τῷ θρόνῳ Rv 4:9 (cp. gen. w. καθ. 1a above, and acc. cα below) 5:13; 7:10 and oft. ἐφʼ ἵπποις λευκοῖς on white horses 19:14. ἐ. σανίσιν on planks Ac 27:44. ἐ. τῇ στοᾷ in the colonnade 3:11. τὰ ἐ. τοῖς οὐρανοῖς what is above (or in) the heavens Eph 1:10. ἐπʼ αὐτῷ above him, at his head Lk 23:38 (=Mt 27:37 ἐπάνω τ. κεφαλῆς αὐτοῦ).
    β. answering the question ‘whither?’ on, upon (Hom. et al.) w. verbs that indicate a direction: οἰκοδομεῖν ἐ. τινι build upon someth. Mt 16:18. ἐποικοδομεῖν Eph 2:20. ἐπιβάλλειν ἐπίβλημα ἐ. ἱματίῳ παλαιῷ put a patch on an old garment Mt 9:16. ἐπιπίπτειν ἐ. τινι Ac 8:16. ἐκάθισεν ἐ. τῷ θρόνῳ he sat down on the throne GJs 11:1. λίθον ἐπʼ αὐτῇ βαλέτω J 8:7 v.l. (cp. 12a below).
    ⓒ w. acc., answering the question ‘where?’ (Hom. et al.; LXX; JosAs 29:2 φορῶν ἐ. τὸν μηρὸν αὐτοῦ ῥομφαίαν; Just., D. 53, 1 ζυγὸν ἐ. αὐχένα μὴ ἔχων)
    α. on, over someth. καθεύδειν ἐ. τι sleep on someth. Mk 4:38. καθῆσθαι ἐ. τι sit on someth. Mt 19:28 (in the same vs. καθίζω w. gen., s. a above) J 12:15; Rv 4:4; 6:2; 11:16 al.; cp. Lk 21:35b; κεῖσθαι ἐ. τι lie upon someth. 2 Cor 3:15. κατακεῖσθαι Lk 5:25. ἑστηκέναι ἐ. τὸν αἰγιαλόν stand on the shore Mt 13:2; cp. Rv 14:1. ἑστῶτας ἐ. τὴν θάλασσαν standing beside the sea 15:2. ἔστη ἐ. τὴν κεφαλὴν τοῦ παιδίου (the star) remained stationary over the head of the child GJs 21:3. σκηνοῦν ἐ. τινα spread a tent over someone Rv 7:15. ἐ. τὴν δεξιάν at the right hand 5:1. λίθος ἐ. λίθον stone upon stone Mt 24:2.
    β. ἐ. τὸ αὐτό at the same place, together (Ps.-X., Respublica Athen. [The Old Oligarch] 2, 2; Pla., Rep. 329a; SIG 736, 66 [92 B.C.]. In pap=‘in all’: PTebt 14, 20 [114 B.C.]; PFay 102, 6.—2 Km 2:13; En 100:2) εἶναι ἐ. τὸ αὐτό be together Lk 17:35; Ac 1:15; 2:1, 44. In 1 Cor 7:5 it is a euphemistic expr. for sexual union. κατοικεῖν ἐ. τὸ αὐτό live in the same place (Dt 25:5) Hm 5, 1, 4. Also w. verbs of motion (Sus 14 Theod.) συνέρχεσθαι ἐ. τὸ αὐτό come together to the same place 1 Cor 11:20; 14:23; cp. B 4:10 (Just., A I, 67, 3 συνέλευσις γίνεται). συνάγεσθαι (Phlegon of Tralles [Hadr.]: 257 Fgm. 36 III 9 Jac.; PsSol 2:2; TestJob 28:5 Jos., Bell. 2, 346) Mt 22:34; Ac 4:26 (Ps 2:2); 1 Cl 34:7. ἐ. τὸ αὐτὸ μίγνυσθαι be mixed together Hm 10, 3, 3. προσετίθει ἐ. τὸ αὐτό added to their number Ac 2:47.
    γ. at, by, near someone or someth. καθῆσθαι ἐ. τὸ τελώνιον sit at the tax-office Mt 9:9 (ἐ. τὰς ὡραίας πύλας GrBar prol. 2); Mk 2:14. ἑστηκέναι ἐ. τὴν θύραν stand at the door Rv 3:20. σὺ ἔστης ἐ. τὸ θυσιαστήριον you are standing (ἕστηκας deStrycker) as priest at the altar GJs 8:2. ἐφʼ ὑμᾶς among you 2 Th 1:10; cp. Ac 1:21.—Of pers., over whom someth. is done ὀνομάζειν τὸ ὄνομα Ἰησοῦ ἐ. τινα speak the name of Jesus over someone Ac 19:13. ἐπικαλεῖν τὸ ὄνομά τινος ἐ. τινα=to claim someone for one’s own (Jer 14:9; 2 Ch 7:14; 2 Macc 8:15) Ac 15:17 (Am 9:12); Js 2:7; Hs 8, 6, 4. προσεύχεσθαι ἐ. τινα pray over someone Js 5:14.
    ② marker of presence or occurrence near an object or area, at, near
    ⓐ w. gen., of immediate proximity to things at, near (Hdt. 7, 115; X., An. 4, 3, 28 al.; LXX, Just.) ἐ. τ. θυρῶν at the gates (Plut., C. Gracch. 841 [14, 3]; PRyl 127, 8f [29 A.D.] κοιμωμένου μου ἐ. τῆς θύρας; 1 Macc 1:55; Just., D. 111, 4) Ac 5:23 (s. b below for dat. in 5:9). ἐ. τῆς θαλάσσης near the sea (Polyb. 1, 44, 4; Ex 14:2; Dt 1:40; 1 Macc 14:34) J 21:1. ἐ. τῆς ὁδοῦ by the road Mt 21:19. ἐσθίειν ἐ. τῆς πραπέζης τινός eat at someone’s table Lk 22:30 (cp. POxy 99, 14 [55 A.D.] τράπεζα, ἐφʼ ἧς Σαραπίων καὶ μέτοχοι; Da 11:27 LXX ἐ. μιᾶς τραπέζης). ἐ. τοῦ (τῆς) βάτου at the thornbush = in the passage about the thornbush (i.e. Ex 3:1ff) Mk 12:26; Lk 20:37.
    ⓑ with dat., of immediate proximity at, near by (Hom.+) ἦν ἔτι ἐ. τῷ τόπῳ ὅπου was still at the place, where J 11:30 v.l. (for ἐν; cp. Just., D. 402). ἐ. τῇ θύρᾳ (ἐ. θύραις) at the door (Hom. et al.; Wsd 19:17; Jos., Ant. 17, 90; Just., D. 32, 3) Mt 24:33; Mk 13:29; Ac 5:9 (s. a above). ἐ. τοῖς πυλῶσιν Rv 21:12. ἐ. τῇ πηγῇ J 4:6 (Jos., Ant. 5, 58 ἐ. τινι πηγῇ; Just., A I, 64, 1 ἐ. ταῖς … πηγαῖς). ἐ. τῇ προβατικῇ (sc. πύλῃ) near the sheepgate 5:2; cp. Ac 3:10. ἐ. τῷ ποταμῷ near the river (since Il. 7, 133; Jos., Ant. 4, 176 ἐ. τ. Ἰορδάνῳ) Rv 9:14.—Of pers. (Diod S 14, 113, 6; Just., A I, 40, 7) ἐφʼ ὑμῖν among you 2 Cor 7:7; cp. Ac 28:14 v.l.
    ③ marker of involvement in an official proceeding, before, w. gen., of pers., esp. in the language of lawsuits (Pla., Leg. 12, 943d; Isaeus 5, 1 al.; UPZ 71, 15; 16 [152 B.C.]; POxy 38, 11; Mitt-Wilck. I/2, 382, 23=BGU 909, 23; Jos., Vi. 258; Just., A II, 1, 1 ἐ. Οὐρβίκου). ἐ. τοῦ ἡγεμόνος in the governor’s presence Mt 28:14. ἐ. ἡγεμόνων καὶ βασιλέων Mk 13:9. ἐ. σου before you (the procurator) Ac 23:30. ἐ. Τερτούλλου Phlm subscr. v.l.; στάντος μου ἐ. τοῦ συνεδρίου Ac 24:20 (cp. Diod S 11, 55, 4 ἐ. τοῦ κοινοῦ συνεδρίου τ. Ἑλλήνων). γυναικὸς … διαβληθείσης ἐ. τοῦ κυρίου Papias (2:17). κρίνεσθαι ἐ. τῶν ἀδίκων go to law before the unrighteous 1 Cor 6:1. κριθήσεται ἐφʼ ὑμῶν before your tribunal D 11:11. μαρτυρεῖν ἐ. Ποντίου Πιλάτου testify before Pontius Pilate 1 Ti 6:13 (s. μαρτυρέω 1c). ἐ. τοῦ βήματος (POxy 37 I, 3 [49 A.D.]) ἑστὼς ἐ. τοῦ βήματος Καίσαρός εἰμι I am standing before Caesar’s tribunal Ac 25:10 (Appian says Prooem. c. 15 §62 of himself: δίκαις ἐν Ῥώμῃ συναγορεύσας ἐ. τῶν βασιλέων=I acted as attorney in lawsuits in Rome before the emperors).—Gener. in someone’s presence (Appian, Syr. 61 §324 ἐφʼ ὑμῶν=in your presence) ἐ. Τίτου before Titus 2 Cor 7:14. Cp.10 below.
    ④ marker of movement to or contact w. a goal, toward, in direction of, on
    ⓐ w. gen., marking contact with the goal that is reached, answering the question ‘whither?’ toward, on, at w. verbs of motion (Appian, Iber. 98 §427 ἀπέπλευσεν ἐπʼ οἴκου=he sailed [toward] home; PGM 4, 2468f ἀναβὰς ἐ. δώματος; JosAs 27:1 ἀνέδραμε … ἐ. πέτρας; Jos., Ant. 4, 91 ἔφευγον ἐ. τ. πόλεων; Tat. 33:3 Εὐρώπην ἐ. τοῦ ταύρου καθιδρύσαντος) βάλλειν τὸν σπόρον ἐ. τῆς γῆς Mk 4:26; also σπείρειν vs. 31. πίπτειν (Wsd 18:23; TestAbr A 3 p. 80, 11 [Stone p. 8]; JosAs 9:1) 9:20; 14:35. καθιέναι Ac 10:11. τιθέναι (Sir 17:4) Lk 8:16; J 19:19; Ac 5:15. ἔρχεσθαι Hb 6:7; Rv 3:10; γίνεσθαι ἐ. reach, be at J 6:21. γενόμενος ἐ. τοῦ τόπου when he reached the place Lk 22:40. καθίζειν take one’s seat ἐ. θρόνου (JosAs 7:1 al.) Mt 19:28 (s. 1a end); 23:2; 25:31; J 19:13 (ἐ. βήματος of Pilate as Jos., Bell. 2, 172; of Jesus Just., A I, 35, 6). κρεμαννύναι ἐ. ξύλου hang on a tree (i.e. cross) (Gen 40:19; cp. Just., D. 86, 6 σταυρωθῆναι ἐ. τοῦ ξύλου) Ac 5:30; 10:39; cp. Gal 3:13 (Dt 21:23).
    ⓑ w. acc.
    α. specifying direction (En 24:2 ἐ. νότον ‘southward’ of position of the mountain) of motion that takes a particular direction, to, toward ἐκτείνας τ. χεῖρα ἐ. τοὺς μαθητάς Mt 12:49; cp. Lk 22:53 (JosAs 12:8). πορεύεσθαι ἐ. τὸ ἀπολωλός go after the one that is lost 15:4. ἐ. τὴν ῏Ασσον in the direction of Assos Ac 20:13. ἐπιστρέφειν ἐ. τι turn to someth. 2 Pt 2:22 (cp. Pr 26:11; En 99:5). ὡς ἐ. λῃστήν as if against a robber Mt 26:55; Mk 14:48; Lk 22:52.
    β. from one point to another across, over w. motion implied (Hom.+; LXX) περιπατεῖν, ἐλθεῖν ἐ. τ. θάλασσαν or ἐ. τ. ὕδατα Mt 14:25, 28f; J 6:19 P75. Of spreading across the land (PsSol 17:10): famine Ac 7:11; 11:28; darkness Mt 27:45; Lk 23:44. ἐ. σταδίους δώδεκα χιλιάδων across twelve thousand stades Rv 21:16 v.l. (Polyaenus 5, 44, 4 ἐ. στάδια δέκα); ἐ. πλεῖον further (1 Esdr 2:24; 2 Macc 10:27) Ac 4:17.
    γ. of goal attained (Hom. et al.; LXX) on, upon someone or someth. πέσατε ἐφʼ ἡμᾶς Lk 23:30 (Hos 10:8). ἔπεσεν ἐ. τὰ πετρώδη Mt 13:5; cp. Lk 13:4. ἔρχεσθαι ἐ. τινα come upon someone Mt 3:16; also καταβαίνειν fr. above J 1:33; cp. Rv 16:21. ἀναβαίνειν (Jos., Ant. 13, 138; Just., A II, 12, 7) Lk 5:19. ἐπιβαίνειν Mt 21:5 (Zech 9:9).—Ac 2:3; 9:4 al.; διασωθῆναι ἐ. τ. γῆν be brought safely to the land 27:44; cp. vs. 43; Lk 8:27. ἐ. τὸ πλοῖον to the ship Ac 20:13. ἀναπεσεῖν ἐ. τὴν γῆν lie down or sit down on the ground Mt 15:35. ἔρριψεν αὐτὸν χαμαὶ ἐ. τὸν σάκκον he threw himself down on the sackcloth GJs 13:1. τιθέναι τι ἐ. τι put someth. on someth. (JosAs 16:11) Mt 5:15; Lk 11:33; Mk 8:25 v.l.; likew. ἐπιτιθέναι (JosAs 29:5) Mt 23:4; Mk 8:25; Lk 15:5; J 9:6, 15; Ac 15:10. ἐπιβάλλειν τ. χεῖρας ἐ. τινα (Gen 22:12 al.) Mt 26:50; Lk 21:12; Ac 5:18. Mainly after verbs of placing, laying, putting, bringing, etc. on, to: ἀναβιβάζω, ἀναφέρω, βάλλω, γράφω, δίδωμι, ἐγγίζω, ἐπιβιβάζω, ἐπιγράφω, ἐποικοδομέω, ἐπιρ(ρ)ίπτω, θεμελιόω, ἵστημι, κατάγω, οἰκοδομέω, σωρεύω; s. these entries. Sim. βρέχειν ἐ. τινα cause rain to fall upon someone Mt 5:45 (cp. PsSol 17:18); also τ. ἥλιον ἀνατέλλειν ἐ. τινα cause the sun to rise so that its rays fall upon someone *ibid. τύπτειν τινὰ ἐ. τὴν σιαγόνα strike on the cheek Lk 6:29. πίπτειν ἐ. (τὸ) πρόσωπον (Jdth 14:6) on the face Mt 17:6; 26:39; Lk 5:12; 17:16; 1 Cor 14:25; Rv 7:11.—To, upon w. acc. of thing πορεύεσθαι ἐ. τὴν ὁδόν go to the road Ac 8:26; cp. 9:11. ἐ. τὰς διεξόδους Mt 22:9. ἵνα μὴ πνέῃ ἄνεμος ἐ. πᾶν δένδρον so that no wind should blow upon any tree Rv 7:1.
    δ. of closeness to someth. or someone to, up to, in the neighborhood of, on ἐ. τὸ μνημεῖον up to the tomb Mk 16:2; Lk 24:1 v.l., 22, 24; cp. ἐ. τὸ μνῆμα Mk 16:2 v.l.; Lk 24:1. ἔρχεσθαι ἐ. τι ὕδωρ come to some water Ac 8:36. ἐ. τὴν πύλην τὴν σιδηρᾶν to the iron gate 12:10. καταβαίνειν ἐ. τὴν θάλασσαν go down to the sea J 6:16. ἐ. τὸν Ἰορδάνην Mt 3:13 (Just., D. 88, 3 al.). ἀναπίπτειν ἐ. τὸ στῆθος he leaned back on (Jesus’) breast J 13:25; 21:20. πίπτειν ἐ. τοὺς πόδας fall at (someone’s) feet Ac 10:25 (JosAs 14:10 ἔπεσεν ἐ πρόσωπον ἐ. τοὺς πόδας αὐτοῦ). ἐ. τ. ἀκάνθας among the thorns Mt 13:7.—W. acc. of pers. to someone ἐ. τὸν Ἰησοῦν ἐλθόντες they came to Jesus J 19:33; cp. Mt 27:27; Mk 5:21.
    ε. in imagery of goal or objective to, toward (Just., A II, 7, 6 ἐπʼ ἀμφότερα τρέπεσθαι) ἐπιστρέφειν, ἐπιστρέφεσθαι ἐ. τινα turn to (Dt 30:10; 31:20 al.; Ar. 2, 1 ἔλθωμεν καὶ ἐ. τὸ ἀνθρώπινον γένος ‘let us now turn to …’; Just., D. 56, 11 ἐ. τὰς γραφὰς ἐπανελθών) Lk 1:17; Ac 9:35; 11:21; 14:15; 26:20; Gal 4:9; 1 Pt 2:25.
    ⑤ marker of manner, corresponding to an adv., w. dat. (Aeschyl., Suppl. 628 ἐπʼ ἀληθείᾳ; UPZ 162 VI, 3 [117 B.C.] κακοτρόπως καὶ ἐ. ῥαδιουργίᾳ; POxy 237 VI, 21 ἐ. τῇ τῶν ἀνθρ. σωτηρίᾳ; ἐφʼ ὁράσει En 14:8; Just., A I, 9, 3 ἐφʼ ὕβρει; 55, 7 ἐ. τούτῳ τῷ σχήματι ‘in this form’; Tat. 17, 1 ἐπʼ ἀκριβείᾳ; Ath. 33, 2 ἐφʼ ἑνὶ γάμῳ) ὁ σπείρων ἐπʼ εὐλογίαις (in contrast to ὁ σπείρων φειδομένως one who sows sparingly) one who sows in blessing (i.e. generously) 2 Cor 9:6. ἐπʼ εὐλογίαις θερίζειν reap generously ibid.
    ⑥ marker of basis for a state of being, action, or result, on, w. dat. (Hom. et al.)
    ⓐ ἐπʼ ἄρτῳ ζῆν live on bread Mt 4:4; Lk 4:4 (both Dt 8:3. cp. Ps.-Pla., Alcib. 1, 105c; Plut., Mor. 526d; Alciphron 3, 7, 5; SibOr 4, 154). ἐ. τῷ ῥήματί σου depending on your word Lk 5:5. οὐ συνῆκαν ἐ. τοῖς ἄρτοις they did not arrive at an understanding (of it) (by reflecting) on (the miracle of) the loaves Mk 6:52 (cp. Demosth. 18, 121 τί σαυτὸν οὐκ ἐλλεβορίζεις ἐ. τούτοις [sc. λόγοις];=why do you not come to an understanding concerning these words?). ἐ. τῇ πίστει on the basis of faith Ac 3:16; Phil 3:9. ἐπʼ ἐλπίδι on the basis of hope, supporting itself on hope Ac 2:26 (? s. ἐλπίς 1bα); Ro 4:18; 8:20; 1 Cor 9:10; Tit 1:2.—Ac 26:6 ἐπʼ ἐλπίδι gives the basis of the trial at law, as does ἐ. εὐεργεσίᾳ 4:9. ἀπολύειν τ. γυναῖκα ἐ. πορνείᾳ Mt 19:9 (cp. Dio Chrys. 26 [43], 10 ἀπολύειν ἐπʼ ἀργυρίῳ; Ath. 2, 3 κρίνεσθαι … μὴ ἐ. τῷ ὀνόματι, ἐ. δὲ τῷ ἀδικήματι). γυναικὸς ἐ. πόλλαις ἁμαρτίαις διαβληθείσης Papias (2:17). On the basis of the testimony of two witnesses (cp. Appian, Iber. 79 §343 ἤλεγχον ἐ. μάρτυσι) Hb 10:28 (Dt 17:6); sim. use of ἐ. τινί on the basis of someth.: 8:6; 9:10, 15 (here it may also be taken in the temporal sense; s. 18 below), 17. ἁμαρτάνειν ἐ. τῷ ὁμοιώματι τ. παραβάσεως Ἀδάμ Ro 5:14 (ὁμοίωμα 1). δαπανᾶν ἐ. τινι pay the expenses for someone Ac 21:24. ἀρκεῖσθαι ἐ. τινι be content w. someth. 3J 10.
    ⓑ w. verbs of believing, hoping, trusting: πεποιθέναι (Wsd 3:9; Sus 35; 1 Macc 10:71; 2 Macc 7:40 and oft.) Lk 11:22; 18:9; 2 Cor 1:9; Hb 2:13 (2 Km 22:3). πιστεύειν Lk 24:25; Ro 9:33; 10:11; 1 Pt 2:6 (the last three Is 28:16). ἐλπίζειν (2 Macc 2:18; Sir 34:7) Ro 15:12 (Is 11:10); 1 Ti 4:10; 6:17; cp. 1J 3:3. παρρησιάζεσθαι Ac 14:3.
    ⓒ after verbs which express feelings, opinions, etc.: at, because of, from, with (Hom. et al.) διαταράσσεσθαι Lk 1:29. ἐκθαυμάζειν Mk 12:17. ἐκπλήσσεσθαι Mt 7:28; Mk 1:22; Lk 4:32; Ac 13:12. ἐξίστασθαι (Jdth 11:16; Wsd 5:2 al.) Lk 2:47. ἐπαισχύνεσθαι (Is 1:29) Ro 6:21. εὐφραίνεσθαι (Sir 16:1; 18:32; 1 Macc 11:44) Rv 18:20. θαμβεῖσθαι Mk 10:24; cp. Lk 5:9; Ac 3:10. θαυμάζειν (Lev 26:32; Jdth 10:7 al.; Jos., Ant. 10, 277) Mk 12:17 v.l. μακροθυμεῖν (Sir 18:11; 29:8; 35:19) Mt 18:26, 29; Lk 18:7; Js 5:7. μετανοεῖν (Plut., Ag. 803 [19, 5]; Ps.-Lucian, Salt. 84; Prayer of Manasseh [=Odes 12] 7; Just., A I, 61, 10; D. 95, 3 al.) 2 Cor 12:21. ὀδυνᾶσθαι (cp. Tob 6:15) Ac 20:38. ὀργίζεσθαι Rv 12:17. σπλαγχνίζεσθαι Mt 14:14; Lk 7:13. συλλυπεῖσθαι Mk 3:5. στυγνάζειν 10:22. χαίρειν (PEleph 13, 3; Jos., Ant. 1, 294; Tob 13:15; Bar 4:33; JosAs 4:2; Ar. 15, 7) Mt 18:13; Lk 1:14; 13:17; Ro 16:19 al. χαρὰν καὶ παράκλησιν ἔχειν Phlm 7. χαρὰ ἔσται Lk 15:7; cp. vs. 10 (Jos., Ant. 6, 116 ἡ ἐ. τῇ νίκῃ χαρά). Also w. verbs that denote aroused feelings παραζηλοῦν and παροργίζειν make jealous and angry at Ro 10:19 (Dt 32:21). παρακαλεῖν 1 Th 3:7a (cp. Just., D. 78:8 παράκλησιν ἐχουσῶν ἐ.), as well as those verbs that denote an expression of the emotions ἀγαλλιᾶσθαι (cp. Tob 13:15; Ps 69:5) Lk 1:47; Hs 8, 1, 18; 9, 24, 2. καυχᾶσθαι (Diod S 16, 70; Sir 30:2) Ro 5:2. κοπετὸν ποιεῖν (cp. 3 Macc 4:3) Ac 8:2. ὀλολύζειν Js 5:1. αἰνεῖν (cp. X., An. 3, 1, 45 al.) Lk 2:20. δοξάζειν (Polyb. 6, 53, 10; cp. Diod S 17, 21, 4 δόξα ἐ. ἀνδρείᾳ=fame because of bravery) Ac 4:21; 2 Cor 9:13. εὐχαριστεῖν give thanks for someth. (s. εὐχαριστέω 2; UPZ 59, 10 [168 B.C.] ἐ. τῷ ἐρρῶσθαί σε τ. θεοῖς εὐχαρίστουν) 1 Cor 1:4; cp. 2 Cor 9:15; 1 Th 3:9.—ἐφʼ ᾧ = ἐπὶ τούτῳ ὅτι for this reason that, because (Diod S 19, 98; Appian, Bell. Civ. 1, 112 §520; Ael. Aristid. 53 p. 640 D.; Synes., Ep. 73 p. 221c; Damasc., Vi. Isid. 154; Syntipas p. 12, 9; 127, 8; Thomas Mag. ἐφʼ ᾧ ἀντὶ τοῦ διότι; cp. W-S. §24, 5b and 12f. S. WKümmel, D. Bild des Menschen im NT ’48, 36–40) Ro 5:12 (SLyonnet, Biblica 36, ’55, 436–56 [denies a causal sense here]. On the probability of commercial idiom s. FDanker, FGingrich Festschr. ’72, 104f, also Ro 5:12, Sin under Law: NTS 14, ’68, 424–39; against him SPorter, TynBull 41, ’90, 3–30, also NTS 39, ’93, 321–33; difft. JFitzmyer, Anchor Bible Comm.: Romans, ad loc. ‘w. the result that all have sinned’); 2 Cor 5:4; Phil 3:12; for, indeed 4:10.
    ⑦ marker of addition to what is already in existence, to, in addition to. W. dat. (Hom. et al.; PEleph 5, 17 [284/283 B.C.] μηνὸς Τῦβι τρίτῃ ἐπʼ εἰκάδι; Tob 2:14; Sir 3:27; 5:5) προσέθηκεν τοῦτο ἐ. πᾶσιν he added this to everything else Lk 3:20 (cp. Lucian, Luct. [On Funerals], 24). ἐ. τ. παρακλήσει ἡμῶν in addition to our comfort 2 Cor 7:13. λύπη ἐ. λύπῃ grief upon grief Phil 2:27 v.l. (cp. Soph., Oed. C. 544, also Polyb. 1, 57, 1 πληγὴ ἐ. πληγῇ; Plut., Mor. 123f; Polyaenus 5, 52 ἐ. φόνῳ φόνον; Quint. Smyrn. 5, 602 ἐ. πένθει πένθος=sorrow upon sorrow; Sir 26:15). ἐ. τῇ σῇ εὐχαριστίᾳ to your prayer of thanks 1 Cor 14:16. So perh. also Hb 8:1. ἐ. πᾶσι τούτοις to all these Col 3:14; Lk 16:26 v.l. (X., Mem. 1, 2, 25 al.; Sir 37:15; cp. 1 Macc 10:42; Just., D. 133, 1 ἐ. τούτοις πᾶσι).—W. acc.: addition to someth. of the same kind Mt 6:27; Lk 12:25; Rv 22:18a. λύπην ἐ. λύπην sorrow upon sorrow Phil 2:27 (cp. Is 28:10, 13; Ezk 7:26; Ps 68:28).
    ⑧ marker of perspective, in consideration of, in regard to, on the basis of, concerning, about, w. gen. (Antig. Car. 164 ἐ. τῶν οἴνων ἀλλοιοῦσθαι; 4 Macc. 2:9 ἐ. τῶν ἑτέρων … ἔστιν ἐπιγνῶναι τοῦτο, ὅτι …; Ath. 29, 2 τὰ ἐ. τῆς μανίας πάθη) ἐ. δύο ἢ τριῶν μαρτύρων on the evidence of two or three witnesses 1 Ti 5:19 (cp. TestAbr A 13 p. 92, 22ff. [Stone p. 32]). Sim. in the expr. ἐ. στόματος δύο μαρτύρων (Dt 19:15) Mt 18:16; 2 Cor 13:1. ἐπʼ αὐτῆς on the basis of it Hb 7:11. ἐπʼ ἀληθείας based on truth = in accordance w. truth, truly (Demosth. 18, 17 ἐπʼ ἀληθείας οὐδεμιᾶς εἰρημένα; POxy 255, 16 [48 A.D.]; Da 2:8; Tob 8:7; En 104:11) Mk 12:14, 32; Lk 4:25; 20:21; Ac 4:27. ἐφʼ ἑαυτοῦ based on himself = to or by himself (X., An. 2, 4, 10; Demosth. 18, 224 ἐκρίνετο ἐφʼ ἑαυτοῦ; Dionys. Hal., Comp. Verb. 16 ἐ. σεαυτοῦ. Cp. Kühner-G. I 498e) 2 Cor 10:7.—To introduce the object which is to be discussed or acted upon λέγειν ἐ. τινος speak of, about someth. (Pla., Charm., 155d, Leg. 2, 662d; Isocr. 6, 41; Aelian, VH 1, 30; Jer 35:8; EpArist 162; 170; Ath. 5:1 ἐ. τοῦ νοητοῦ … δογματίζειν) Gal 3:16. Do someth. on, in the case of (cp. 1 Esdr 1:22) σημεῖα ποιεῖν ἐ. τῶν ἀσθενούντων work miracles on the sick J 6:2.—On B 13:6 s. τίθημι 1bζ.—In ref. to someth. (Aristot., Pol. 1280a, 17; 4 Macc 12:5 τῶν ἐ. τῆς βασιλείας … πραγμάτων; Just., A I, 5, 1 ἐφʼ ἡμῶν ‘in our case’, D. 131, 4; Ath. 15, 3 ἐ. τῆς ὕλης καὶ τοῦ θεοῦ ‘as respects God and matter, so …’) ἐ. τινων δεῖ ἐγκρατεύεσθαι in certain matters one must practice self-control Hm 8:1. οὔτε … οἴδασι τὸν ἐ. τοῦ πυροῦ σπόρον nor do they comprehend (the figurative sense of) the sowing of wheat AcPlCor 2:26 (cp. 1 Cor 15:36f).
    ⑨ marker of power, authority, control of or over someone or someth., over
    ⓐ w. gen. (Hdt. 5, 109 al.; Mitt-Wilck. I/1, 124, 1=BGU 1120, 1 [5 B.C.] πρωτάρχῳ ἐ. τοῦ κριτηρίου; 287, 1; LXX; AscIs 2:5 τοῦ ἐ. τῶν πραγματε[ι] ῶν=Denis p. 109) βασιλεύειν ἐ. τινος (Judg 9:8, 10; 1 Km 8:7) Rv 5:10. ἔχειν βασιλείαν ἐ. τῶν βασιλέων 17:18. ἐξουσίαν ἔχειν ἐ. τινος have power over someone 20:6. διδόναι ἐξουσίαν ἐ. τινος 2:26. καθιστάναι τινὰ ἐ. τινος set someone over, put someone in charge, of someth. or someone (Pla., Rep. 5, 460b; Demosth. 18, 118; Gen 39:4f; 1 Macc 6:14; 10:37; 2 Macc 12:20 al.; EpArist 281; τεταγμένος En 20:5) Mt 24:45; Lk 12:42; Ac 6:3. εἶναι ἐ. τινος (Synes., Ep. 79 p. 224d; Tob 1:22; Jdth 14:13; 1 Macc 10:69) ὸ̔ς ἦν ἐ. πάσης τῆς γάζης αὐτῆς who was in charge of all her treasure 8:27. Of God ὁ ὢν ἐ. πάντων (Apollonius of Tyana [I A.D.] in Eus., PE 4, 13) Ro 9:5; cp. Eph 4:6. ὁ ἐ. τινος w. ὤν to be supplied (Demosth. 18, 247 al.; Diod S 13, 47, 6; Plut., Pyrrh. 385 [5, 7], Aemil. Paul. 267 [23, 6]; PTebt 5, 88 [118 B.C.] ὁ ἐ. τ. προσόδων; 1 Macc 6:28; 2 Macc 3:7; 3 Macc 6:30 al.; EpArist 110; 174) ὁ ἐ. τοῦ κοιτῶνος the chamberlain Ac 12:20.
    ⓑ w dat. (X., Cyr. 1, 2, 5; 2, 4, 25 al., An. 4, 1, 13; Demosth. 19, 113; Aeschines 2, 73; Esth 8:12e; Just., A II, 5, 2 ἀγγέλοις οὓς ἐ. τούτοις ἔταξε; cp. Ath. 24, 3; Ath. 6, 4 τὸν ἐ. τῇ κινήσει τοῦ σώματος λόγον) Mt 24:47; Lk 12:44.
    ⓒ w. acc. (X., Hell. 3, 4, 20 al.; Dionys. Byz. §56 θεῷ ἐ. πάντα δύναμις; LXX; PsSol 17:3, 32) βασιλεύειν ἐ. τινα rule over someone (Gen 37:8; Judg 9:15 B al.) Lk 1:33; 19:14, 27; Ro 5:14. καθιστάναι τινὰ ἐ. τινα set someone over someone (X., Cyr. 4, 5, 58) κριτὴν ἐφʼ ὑμᾶς as judge over you Lk 12:14; ἡγούμενον ἐπʼ Αἴγυπτον Ac 7:10; cp. Hb 2:7 v.l. (Ps 8:7); 3:6; 10:21. ἐξουσίαν ἔχειν ἐ. τι Rv 16:9. ἐξουσίαν διδόναι ἐ. τι (Sir 33:20) Lk 9:1; 10:19; Rv 6:8; cp. 22:14. φυλάσσειν φυλακὰς ἐ. τι Lk 2:8 (cp. En 100:5). ὑπεραίρεσθαι ἐ. τινα exalt oneself above someone 2 Th 2:4 (cp. Da 11:36); but here the mng. against is also poss. (s. 12b below). πιστὸς ἐ. τι faithful over someth. Mt 25:21, 23.
    ⑩ marker of legal proceeding, before, w. acc. in the lang. of the law-courts ἐ. ἡγεμόνας καὶ βασιλεῖς ἄγεσθαι be brought before governors and kings Mt 10:18; cp. Lk 21:12 (cp. BGU 22, 36 [114 A.D.] ἀξιῶ ἀκθῆναι [=ἀχθῆναι] τ. ἐνκαλουμένους ἐ. σὲ πρὸς δέουσαν ἐπέξοδον; Just., A II, 2, 12 ἐ. Οὔρβικον). ὑπάγεις ἐπʼ ἄρχοντα you are going before the magistrate Lk 12:58; cp. Ac 16:19. ἤγαγον αὐτὸν ἐ. τὸν Πιλᾶτον Lk 23:1. ἐ. τοὺς ἀρχιερεῖς Ac 9:21. ἐ. Καίσαρα πορεύεσθαι come before the emperor 25:12. ἐ. τὰς συναγωγάς Lk 12:11. ἐ. τὸ βῆμα Ac 18:12. Cp. 3 above. Here the focus is on transfer to the judiciary.
    ⑪ marker of purpose, goal, result, to, for, w. acc. (Demetr.: 722 Fgm. 2, 3 Jac. ἐ. κατοικίαν) ἐ. τὸ βάπτισμα for baptism=to have themselves baptized Mt 3:7 (cp. Just., A I, 61, 10 ἐ. τὸ λουτρόν; D. 56, 1 ἐ. τὴν … κρίσιν πεμφθεῖσι). ἐ. τὴν θεωρίαν ταύτην for (i.e. to see) this sight Lk 23:48 (sim. Hom. et al.; POxy 294, 18 [22 A.D.]; LXX; Tat. 23, 2 ἐ. τὴν θέαν). ἐ. τὸ συμφέρον to (our) advantage Hb 12:10 (cp. Tat. 6, 1; 34, 2 οὐκ ἐ. τι χρήσιμον ‘to no purpose’). ἐ. σφαγήν Ac 8:32 (Is 53:7); cp. Mt 22:5; ἐ. τ. τελειότητα Hb 6:1. ἐ. τοῦτο for this (X., An. 2, 5, 22; Jos., Ant. 12, 23) Lk 4:43. ἐφʼ ὅ; for what (reason)? Mt 26:50 v.l. (s. ὅς 1bα and 1iβ). Cp. 16.
    ⑫ marker of hostile opposition, against
    ⓐ w. dat. (Hom. et al.; 2 Macc 13:19; Sir 28:23 v.l.; fig. Ath. 22, 7 τοὺς ἐπʼ αὐτοῖς λόγους ‘counter-evidence’) Lk 12:52f (s. use of acc. b below); Ac 11:19. Cp. J 8:7 v.l. (1bβ above).
    ⓑ w. acc. (Hdt. 1, 71; X., Hell. 3, 4, 20 al.; Jos., Ant. 13, 331; LXX; En; TestJud 3:1 al.; JosAs 19:2; Just., D. 103, 7; Tat. 36, 2) ὥρμησαν ἐ. αὐτόν Ac 7:57. ἔρχεσθαι Lk 14:31. ἐπαναστήσονται τέκνα ἐ. γονεῖς Mt 10:21; Mk 13:12; cp. ἔθνος ἐ. ἔθνος Mt 24:7; Mk 13:8. ἐφʼ ἑαυτόν divided against himself Mt 12:26; Mk 3:24f, 26; Lk 11:17f; cp. J 13:18 (s. Ps 40:10); Ac 4:27; 13:50 al.—Lk 12:53 (4 times; the first and third occurrences w. the acc. are prob. influenced by usage in Mic 7:6; the use of the dat. Lk 12:52f [s. a above] w. a verb expressing a circumstance is in accord with older Gk. [Il. et al.], which prefers the acc. with verbs of motion in ref. to hostility). Cp. 15.
    ⑬ marker of number or measure, w. acc. (Hdt. et. al.; LXX; GrBar 3:6) ἐ. τρίς (CIG 1122, 9; PHolm α18) three times Ac 10:16; 11:10. So also ἐ. πολύ more than once Hm 4, 1, 8. ἐ. πολύ (also written ἐπιπολύ) in a different sense to a great extent, carefully (Hdt., Thu. et al.; Lucian, D. Deor. 6, 2; 25, 2; 3 Macc 5:17; Jos., Ant. 17, 107) B 4:1. ἐ. πλεῖον to a greater extent, further (Hdt., Thu. et al.; Diod S 11, 60, 5 al.; prob. 2 Macc 12:36; TestGad 7:2; Ar. 4, 3; Ath. 7, 1 ἐ. το πλεῖστον) 2 Ti 3:9; 1 Cl 18:3 (Ps 50:4). ἐ. τὸ χεῖρον 2 Ti 3:13. ἐφʼ ὅσον to the degree that, in so far as (Diod S 1, 93, 2; Maximus Tyr. 11, 3c ἐφʼ ὅσον δύναται; Hierocles 14 p. 451) Mt 25:40, 45; B 4:11; 17:1; Ro 11:13.
    ⑭ marker indicating the one to whom, for whom, or about whom someth. is done, to, on, about
    ⓐ w. dat. πράσσειν τι ἐ. τινι do someth. to someone Ac 5:35 (thus Appian, Bell. Civ. 3, 15 §51; cp. δρᾶν τι ἐ. τινι Hdt. 3, 14; Aelian, NA 11, 11); about γεγραμμένα ἐπʼ αὐτῷ J 12:16 (cp. Hdt. 1, 66). προφητεύειν ἐ. τινι Rv 10:11. μαρτυρεῖν bear witness about Hb 11:4; Rv 22:16. ἐ. σοὶ … φανερώσει κύριος τὸ λύτρον the Lord will reveal the salvation to you GJs 7:2.
    ⓑ w. acc.
    α. ὁ ἄνθρωπος ἐφʼ ὸ̔ν γεγόνει τὸ σημεῖον the man on whom the miracle had been performed Ac 4:22 (cp. Just., D. 128, 1 κρίσεως γεγενημένης ἐ. Σόδομα). ἐφʼ ὸ̔ν λέγεται ταῦτα the one about whom this was said Hb 7:13 (cp. ἐ. πόρρω οὖσαν [γενεὰν] ἐγὼ λαλῶ En 1:2). γέγραπται ἐπʼ αὐτόν Mk 9:12f; cp. Ro 4:9; 1 Ti 1:18; βάλλειν κλῆρον ἐ. τι for someth. Mk 15:24; J 19:24 (Ps 21:19). ἀνέβη ὁ κλῆρος ἐ. Συμεών the lot came up in favor of Simeon GJs 24:4.
    β. of powers, conditions, etc., which come upon someone or under whose influence someone is: on, upon, to, over ἐγένετο ῥῆμα θεοῦ ἐ. Ἰωάννην the word of God came to John Lk 3:2 (cp. Jer 1:1). Of divine blessings (cp. En 1:8; ParJer 5:28) Mt 10:13; 12:28; Lk 10:6; 11:20; cp. 10:9; Ac 10:10. ἵνα ἐπισκηνώσῃ ἐπʼ ἐμὲ ἡ δύναμις τ. Χριστοῦ that the power of Christ may rest upon me 2 Cor 12:9. χάρις θεοῦ ἦν ἐπʼ αὐτό Lk 2:40. Various verbs are used in ref. to the Holy Spirit, either in pass. or act. role, in connection w. ἐ. τινα: ἐκχεῖν Ac 2:17f (Jo 3:1f); cp. 10:45; Tit 3:6. ἀποστέλλειν (ἐξαποστέλλειν v.l.) Lk 24:49. ἐπέρχεσθαι 1:35; Ac 1:8 (Just., D. 87, 3; cp. ἔρχεσθαι A I, 33, 6; D. 49, 7 ἀπὸ τοῦ Ἠλίου ἐ. τὸν Ἰωάννην ἐλθεῖν). ἐπιπίπτειν 10:44. καταβαίνειν Lk 3:22; J 1:33. τίθεσθαι Mt 12:18 (cp. Is 42:1). Also εἶναι Lk 2:25. μένειν J 1:32f. ἀναπαύεσθαι 1 Pt 4:14. Of unpleasant or startling experiences Lk 1:12, 65; 4:36; Ac 13:11; 19:17; Rv 11:11.—Lk 19:43; 21:35, cp. vs. 34; J 18:4; Eph 5:6; cp. Rv 3:3.—Ro 2:2, 9; 15:3 (Ps 68:10). Of the blood of the righteous, that comes over or upon the murderers Mt 23:35; 27:25; Ac 5:28. Of care, which one casts on someone else 1 Pt 5:7 (Ps 54:23).
    ⑮ marker of feelings directed toward someone, in, on, for, toward, w. acc., after words that express belief, trust, hope: πιστεύειν ἐ. τινα, w. acc. (Wsd 12:2; Just., D. 16:4 al.) Ac 9:42; 11:17; 16:31; 22:19; Ro 4:24. πίστις Hb 6:1. πεποιθέναι (Is 58:14) Mt 27:43; 2 Th 3:4; 2 Cor 2:3. ἐλπίζειν (1 Ch 5:20; 2 Ch 13:18 al.; PsSol 9:10; 17:3; Just., D. 16:4 al.) 1 Pt 1:13; 1 Ti 5:5. After words that characterize an emotion or its expression: for κόπτεσθαι (Zech 12:10) Rv 1:7; 18:9. κλαίειν Lk 23:28; Rv 18:9 (cp. JosAs 15:9 χαρήσεται ἐ. σέ). σπλαγχνίζεσθαι Mt 15:32; Mk 8:2; 9:22; Hm 4, 3, 5; Hs 9, 24, 2. χρηστός toward Lk 6:35. χρηστότης Ro 11:22; Eph 2:7; cp. Ro 9:23. Esp. also if the feelings or their expressions are of a hostile nature: toward, against (cp. λοιδορεῖν Just., D. 137, 2) ἀποτομία Ro 11:22. μαρτύριον Lk 9:5. μάρτυς ἐ. τ. ἐμὴν ψυχήν a witness against my soul (cp. Dssm., LO 258; 355 [LAE 304; 417]) 2 Cor 1:23. ἀσχημονεῖν 1 Cor 7:36. μοιχᾶσθαι Mk 10:11. τολμᾶν 2 Cor 10:2 (En 7:4). βρύχειν τ. ὀδόντας Ac 7:54. Cp. 12.
    ⑯ marker of object or purpose, with dat. in ref. to someth. (Hom., Thu. et al.; SIG 888, 5 ἐ. τῇ τῶν ἀνθρ. σωτηρίᾳ; PTebt 44, 6 [114 B.C.] ὄντος μου ἐ. θεραπείᾳ ἐν τῷ Ἰσιείω; LXX; TestJob 3:5 ὁ ἐ. τῇ σωτηρίᾳ τῆς ἐμῆς ψυχῆς ἐλθών; Jos., Ant. 5, 101; Just., A I, 29, 1 ἐ. παίδων ἀναστροφῇ; D. 91, 4 ἐ. σωτηρίᾳ τῶν πιστευόντων) καλείν τινα ἐ. τινι call someone for someth. Gal 5:13 (on ἐπʼ ἐλευθερίᾳ cp. Demosth. 23, 124; [59], 32); ἐ. ἀκαθαρσίᾳ for impurity, i.e. so that we should be impure 1 Th 4:7. κτισθέντες ἐ. ἔργοις ἀγαθοῖς for good deeds Eph 2:10. λογομαχεῖν ἐ. καταστροφῇ τῶν ἀκουόντων for the ruin of those who hear 2 Ti 2:14 (cp. Eur., Hipp. 511; X., Mem. 2, 3, 19 ἐ. βλάβη; Hdt. 1, 68 ἐ. κακῷ ἀνθρώπου; Polyb. 27, 7, 13 and PGM 4, 2440 ἐπʼ ἀγαθῷ=‘for good’). Cp. 11.
    ⑰ marker in idiom of authorization, w. dat.: the formula ἐ. τῷ ὀνοματί τινος, in the name of someone, used w. many verbs (Just., D. 39, 6 w. γίνεσθαι, otherw. ἐ. ὀνόματος, e.g. A I, 61, 13; w. διὰ τοῦ ὀ. and in oaths κατὰ τοῦ ὀ. A II, 6, 6, D. 30, 3; 85, 2.—Ath. 23, 1 ἐ. ὀνόματι εἰδώλων.—ἐν τῷ ὀνόματι LXX; JosAs 9:1), focuses on the authorizing function of the one named in the gen. (cp. WHeitmüller [‘Im Namen Jesu’ 1903, 13ff], ‘in connection with, or by the use of, i.e. naming, or calling out, or calling upon the name’ [88]): βαπτίζειν Ac 2:38. δέχεσθαί τινα Mt 18:5; Mk 9:37; Lk 9:48. διδάσκειν Ac 4:18; 5:28. δύναμιν ποιεῖν Mk 9:39. ἐκβάλλειν δαιμόνια Lk 9:49 v.l. ἔρχεσθαι Mt 24:5; Mk 13:6; Lk 21:8. κηρύσσειν 24:47. λαλεῖν Ac 4:17; 5:40. Semantically divergent from the preceding, but formulaically analogous, is καλεῖν τινα ἐ. τῷ ὀν. τινος name someone after someone (2 Esdr 17:63) Lk 1:59.—ὄνομα 1dγג.—M-M.
    ⑱ marker of temporal associations, in the time of, at, on, for
    ⓐ w. gen., time within which an event or condition takes place (Hom.+) in the time of, under (kings or other rulers): in the time of Elisha Lk 4:27 (cp. Just., D. 46, 6 ἐ. Ἠλίου). ἐ. τῆς μετοικεσίας at the time of the exile Mt 1:11. Under=during the rule or administration of (Hes., Op. 111; Hdt. 6, 98 al.; OGI 90, 15; PAmh 43, 2 [173 B.C.]; UPZ 162 V, 5 [117 B.C.]; 1 Esdr 2:12; 1 Macc 13:42; 2 Macc 15:22; Jos., Ant. 12, 156 ἐ. ἀρχιερέως Ὀ.) ἐ. Ἀβιαθὰρ ἀρχιερέως under, in the time of, Abiathar the high priest Mk 2:26. ἐ. ἀρχιερέως Ἅννα καὶ Καιάφα Lk 3:2. ἐ. Κλαυδίου Ac 11:28 (Just., A I, 26, 2). ἐ. τῶν πατέρων in the time of the fathers 1 Cl 23:3. ἐπʼ ἐσχάτων τῶν ἡμερῶν in the last days (Gen 49:1; Num 24:14; Mi 4:1; Jer 37:24; Da 10:14) 2 Pt 3:3; Hs 9, 12, 3; cp. Hb 1:2. ἐπʼ ἐσχάτου τοῦ χρόνου in the last time Jd 18. ἐπʼ ἐσχάτου τῶν χρόνων at the end of the times/ages 1 Pt 1:20. ἐ. τῶν προσευχῶν μου when I pray, in my prayers (cp. PTebt 58, 31 [111 B.C.] ἐ. τ. διαλόγου, ‘in the discussion’; 4 Macc 15:19 ἐ. τ. βασάνων ‘during the tortures’; Sir 37:29; 3 Macc 5:40; Demetr.: 722, Fgm. 1, 14 Jac. ἐ. τοῦ ἀρίστου; Synes., Ep. 121 p. 258c ἐ. τῶν κοινῶν ἱερῶν) Ro 1:10; Eph 1:16; 1 Th 1:2; Phlm 4.
    ⓑ w. dat., time at or during which (Hom. et al.; PTebt 5, 66 [118 B.C.]; PAmh 157; LXX; Just., A I, 13, 3 ἐ. χρόνοις Τίερίου) at, in, at the time of, during: ἐ. τοῖς νῦν χρόνοις in these present times 2 Cl 19:4. ἐ. τῇ πρώτῃ διαθήκῃ at the time of the first covenant Hb 9:15. ἐ. συντελείᾳ τ. αἰώνων at the close of the age 9:26 (Tat. 13, 1 ἐ. ς. τοῦ κόσμου; cp. Sir 22:10 and PLond III, 954, 18 p. 154 [260 A.D.] ἐ. τέλει τ. χρόνου; POxy 275, 20 [66 A.D.] ἐ. συνκλεισμῷ τ. χρόνου; En 27:3 ἐπʼ ἐσχάτοις αἰώσιν). ἐ. τῇ θυσίᾳ at the time of, together with, the sacrifice Phil 2:17. ἐ. πάσῃ τῇ μνείᾳ ὑμῶν at every remembrance of you Phil 1:3. ἐ. παροργισμῷ ὑμῶν during your wrath, i.e. while you are angry Eph 4:26. ἐ. πάσῃ τῇ ἀνάγκῃ in all (our) distress 1 Th 3:7b. ἐ. πάσῃ τῇ θλίψει 2 Cor 1:4. ἐ. τούτῳ in the meanwhile J 4:27 (Lucian, Dial. Deor. 17, 2, cp. Philops. 14 p. 41; Syntipas p. 76, 2 ἐφʼ ἡμέραις ἑπτα; 74, 6).
    ⓒ w. acc.
    α. answering the question ‘when?’ on: ἐ. τὴν αὔριον (Sb 6011, 14 [I B.C.]; PRyl 441 ἐ. τὴν ἐπαύριον) (on) the next day Lk 10:35; Ac 4:5. ἐ. τὴν ὥραν τ. προσευχῆς at the hour of prayer 3:1 (Polyaenus 8, 17 ἐ. ὥραν ὡρισμένην).
    β. answering the qu. ‘how long?’ for, over a period of (Hom. et al.; Mitt-Wilck. II/2, 170, 8=BGU 1058, 9 [13 B.C.]; POxy 275, 9; 15 ἐ. τὸν ὅλον χρόνον; PTebt 381, 19 ἐφʼ ὸ̔ν χρόνον περίεστιν ἡ μήτηρ; LXX; En 106:15; TestJob 30:2 ἐ. ὥρας τρεῖς; TestJud 3:4; TestGad 5:11; Jos., Ant. 11, 2; Just., D. 142, 1 ἐ. ποσόν ‘for awhile’) ἐ. ἔτη τρία for three years (Phlegon: 257 Fgm. 36, 2, 1 Jac.) Lk 4:25. ἐ. τρεῖς ἡμέρας for three days (Diod S 13, 19, 2; Arrian, Anab. 4, 9, 4; GDI 4706, 119 [Thera] ἐπʼ ἀμέρας τρεῖς) GPt 8:30 al. ἐ. ἡμέρας πλείους over a period of many days (Jos., Ant. 4, 277) Ac 13:31.—16:18 (ἐ. πολλὰς ἡμέρας as Appian, Liby. 29 §124; cp. Diod S 3, 16, 4); 17:2; 19:8, 10, 34; 27:20; Hb 11:30. ἐ. χρόνον for a while (cp. Il. 2, 299; Hdt. 9, 22, 1; Apollon. Rhod. 4, 1257; Jos., Vi. 2) Lk 18:4. ἐ. πλείονα χρόνον (Diod S 3, 16, 6; Hero Alex. I p. 344, 17) Ac 18:20. ἐφʼ ὅσον χρόνον as long as Ro 7:1; 1 Cor 7:39; Gal 4:1. Also ἐφʼ ὅσον as long as Mt 9:15; 2 Pt 1:13 (for other mngs. of ἐφʼ ὅσον s. above under 13). ἐφʼ ἱκανόν (sc. χρόνον) for a considerable time (EpArist 109) Ac 20:11. ἐ. χρόνον ἱκανόν Qua. ἐ. πολύ for a long time, throughout a long period of time (Thu. 1, 7; 1, 18, 1; 2, 16, 1 al.; Appian, Liby. 5 §21; Arrian, Cyneg. 23, 1; Lucian, Toxar. 20; Wsd 18:20; Sir 49:13; JosAs 19:3; Jos., Vi. 66: Just., A I, 65, 3) Ac 28:6. ἐ. πλεῖον the same (schol. on Pind., N. 7, 56b; PLille 3, 16 [III B.C.]; Jdth 13:1; Sir prol. l. 7; Jos., Ant. 18, 150) Ac 20:9; any longer (Lucian, D. Deor. 5, 3; Appian, Hann. 54 §227; 3 Macc 5:8; Wsd 8:12; Ath. 12, 3) Ac 24:4; 1 Cl 55:1.

    Ελληνικά-Αγγλικά παλαιοχριστιανική Λογοτεχνία > ἐπί

  • 11 ἀπό

    ἀπό (Hom.+) prep. w. gen. (see the lit. on ἀνά, beg., also for ἀπό: KDieterich, IndogF 24, 1909, 93–158; LfgrE s.v.). Basic sense ‘separation from’ someone or someth., fr. which the other uses have developed. In the NT it has encroached on the domain of Att. ἐκ, ὑπό, παρά, and the gen. of separation; s. Mlt. 102; 246; Mlt-Turner 258f.
    ① a marker to indicate separation from a place, whether person or thing, from, away from
    ⓐ w. all verbs denoting motion, esp. those compounded w. ἀπό: ἀπάγεσθαι, ἀπαλλάσσεσθαι, ἀπελαύνειν, ἀπέρχεσθαι, ἀπολύεσθαι, ἀποπλανᾶσθαι, ἀποστέλλειν, ἀποφεύγειν, ἀποχωρεῖν, ἀποχωρίζεσθαι; but also w. ἀνίστασθαι, διαστῆναι, διέρχεσθαι, ἐκδημεῖν, ἐκκινεῖν, ἐκπλεῖν, ἐκπορεύεσθαι, ἐξέρχεσθαι, ἐξωθεῖν, ἐπιδιδόναι, μεταβαίνειν, μετατίθεσθαι, νοσφίζειν, παραγίνεσθαι, πλανᾶσθαι, πορεύεσθαι, ὑπάγειν, ὑποστρέφειν, φεύγειν; s. the entries in question.
    ⓑ w. all verbs expressing the idea of separation ἐκβάλλειν τὸ κάρφος ἀ. τοῦ ὀφθαλμοῦ remove the splinter fr. the eye Mt 7:4 v.l. (for ἐκ). ἐξέβαλον ἀπὸ τῆς πήρας αὐτῶν δῶρα they set forth gifts out of their travel bags GJs 21:3. ἀπολύεσθαι ἀ. ἀνδρός be divorced fr. her husband Lk 16:18, cp. Ac 15:33. ἀποκυλίειν, ἀπολαμβάνεσθαι, ἀποστρέφειν, ἐπιστρέφεσθαι, ἐπανάγειν, αἴρειν, ἀφαιρεῖν, ἀπολέσθαι, μερίζειν et al., s. the pertinent entries. So also κενὸς ἀ. τινος Hs 9, 19, 2. ἔρημος ἀ. τινος (Jer 51:2) 2 Cl 2:3. W. verbs which express the concept of separation in the wider sense, like loose, free, acquit et al. ἀπορφανίζειν, ἀποσπᾶν, διεγείρεσθαι, δικαιοῦν, ἐκδικοῦν, ἐλευθεροῦν, λούειν, λύειν, λυτροῦν, ῥαντίζειν, σαλεύειν, στέλλειν, σῴζειν, φθείρειν, s. the entries; hence also ἀθῷος (Sus 46 Theod. v.l.) Mt 27:24. καθαρὸς ἀ. τινος (Tob 3:14; but s. Dssm. NB 24 [BS 196; 216]) Ac 20:26; cp. Kuhring 54.
    ⓒ verbs meaning be on guard, be ashamed, etc., take ἀπό to express the occasion or object of their caution, shame, or fear; so αἰσχύνεσθαι, βλέπειν, μετανοεῖν, προσέχειν, φοβεῖσθαι, φυλάσσειν, φυλάσσεσθαι; s. 5 below.
    ⓓ w. verbs of concealing, hiding, hindering, the pers. from whom someth. is concealed is found w. ἀπό; so κρύπτειν τι ἀπό τινος, παρακαλύπτειν τι ἀπό τινος, κωλύειν τι ἀπό τινος; s. the entries.
    ⓔ in pregnant constr. like ἀνάθεμα εἶναι ἀ. τοῦ Χριστοῦ be separated fr. Christ by a curse Ro 9:3. μετανοεῖν ἀ. τ. κακίας (Jer 8:6) Ac 8:22. ἀποθνῄσκειν ἀ. τινος through death become free from Col 2:20. φθείρεσθαι ἀ. τ. ἁπλότητος be ruinously diverted from wholehearted commitment 2 Cor 11:3. Cp. Hs 6, 2, 4.
    ⓕ as a substitute for the partitive gen. (Hdt. 6, 27, 2; Thu. 7, 87, 6; PPetr III, 11, 20; PIand 8, 6; Kuhring 20; Rossberg 22; Johannessohn, Präp. 17) τίνα ἀ. τῶν δύο; Mt 27:21, cp. Lk 9:38; 19:39 (like PTebt 299, 13; 1 Macc 1:13; 3:24; Sir 6:6; 46:8). τὰ ἀ. τοῦ πλοίου pieces of the ship Ac 27:44. ἐκχεῶ ἀ. τοῦ πνεύματός μου Ac 2:17f (Jo 3:1f). λαμβάνειν ἀ. τ. καρπῶν get a share of the vintage Mk 12:2 (cp. Just., A I, 65, 5 μεταλαβεῖν ἀπὸ τοῦ … ἄρτου).—Of foods (as in Da 1:13, 4:33a; 2 Macc 7:1) ἐσθίειν ἀ. τ. ψιχίων eat some of the crumbs Mt 15:27; Mk 7:28. χορτάζεσθαι ἀ. τινος eat one’s fill of someth. Lk 16:21. αἴρειν ἀ. τῶν ἰχθύων pick up the remnants of the fish Mk 6:43. ἐνέγκατε ἀ. τ. ὀψαρίων bring some of the fish J 21:10 (the only instance of this usage in J; s. M-EBoismard, Le chapitre 21 de Saint Jean: RB 54 [’47] 492).—Of drink (cp. Sir 26:12) πίνειν ἀπὸ τ. γενήματος τῆς ἀμπέλου drink the product of the vine Lk 22:18.
    ② to indicate the point from which someth. begins, whether lit. or fig.
    ⓐ of place from, out from (Just., D. 86, 1 ἀπὸ τῆς πέτρας ὕδωρ ἀναβλύσαν ‘gushing out of the rock’) σημεῖον ἀ. τ. οὐρανοῦ a sign fr. heaven Mk 8:11. ἀ. πόλεως εἰς πόλιν from one city to another Mt 23:34. ἀπʼ ἄκρων οὐρανῶν ἕως ἄκρων αὐτῶν (Dt 30:4; Ps 18:7) from one end of heaven to the other 24:31, cp. Mk 13:27. ἀπʼ ἄνωθεν ἕως κάτω from top to bottom Mt 27:51. ἀρξάμενοι ἀ. Ἰερουσαλήμ beginning in Jerusalem Lk 24:47 (s. also Lk 23:5; Ac 1:22; 10:37). ἀφʼ ὑμῶν ἐξήχηται ὁ λόγος τ. κυρίου the word of the Lord has gone out from you and sounded forth 1 Th 1:8. ἀπὸ βορρᾶ, ἀπὸ νότου in the north, in the south (PCairGoodsp 6, 5 [129 B.C.] ἐν τῷ ἀπὸ νότου πεδίῳ; Mitt-Wilck. I/2, 11A col. 1, 12f [123 B.C.] τὸ ἀπὸ νότου τῆς πόλεως χῶμα; ln. 7 ἀπὸ βορρᾶ τῆς πόλεως; 70, 16 al.; Josh 18:5; 19:34; 1 Km 14:5) Rv 21:13.
    ⓑ of time from … (on), since (POxy 523, 4; Mel., HE 4, 26, 8; s. Kuhring 54ff).
    α. ἀ. τῶν ἡμερῶν Ἰωάννου from the days of John Mt 11:12. ἀ. τῆς ὥρας ἐκείνης 9:22. ἀπʼ ἐκείνης τ. ἡμέρας (Jos., Bell. 4, 318, Ant. 7, 382) Mt 22:46; J 11:53. ἔτη ἑπτὰ ἀ. τῆς παρθενίας αὐτῆς for seven years fr. the time she was a virgin Lk 2:36. ἀ. ἐτῶν δώδεκα for 12 years 8:43. ἀ. τρίτης ὥρας τῆς νυκτός Ac 23:23. ἀ. κτίσεως κόσμου Ro 1:20. ἀ. πέρυσι since last year, a year ago 2 Cor 8:10; 9:2.—ἀπʼ αἰῶνος, ἀπʼ ἀρχῆς, ἀπʼ ἄρτι (also ἀπαρτί and ἄρτι), ἀπὸ καταβολῆς κόσμου, ἀπὸ τότε, ἀπὸ τοῦ νῦν; s. the pertinent entries.
    β. w. the limits defined, forward and backward: ἀπὸ … ἕως (Jos., Ant. 6, 364) Mt 27:45. ἀπὸ … ἄχρι Phil 1:5. ἀπὸ … μέχρι Ac 10:30; Ro 5:14; 15:19.
    γ. ἀφʼ ἧς (sc. ὥρας or ἡμέρας, which is found Col 1:6, 9; but ἀφʼ ἧς became a fixed formula: ParJer 7:28; Plut., Pelop. [285] 15, 5; s. B-D-F §241, 2) since Lk 7:45 (Renehan ’75, 36f); Ac 24:11; 2 Pt 3:4 (cp. X., Hell. 4, 6, 6; 1 Macc 1:11). ἀφʼ οὗ (sc.—as in X., Cyr. 1, 2, 13—χρόνου; Att. ins in Meisterhans.3-Schw. and s. Witkowski, index 163; ἀφʼ οὗ is also a formula) since, when once (X., Symp. 4, 62; Demetr.: 722 Fgm. 1, 16 Jac.; Lucian, Dial. Mar. 15, 1; Ex 5:23 GrBar 3:6) Lk 13:25; 24:21; Rv 16:18 (cp. Da 12:1; 1 Macc 9:29; 16:24; 2 Macc 1:7; TestAbr B 13 p. 117, 23; GrBar; Jos., Ant. 4, 78). τρία ἔτη ἀφʼ οὗ (cp. Tob 5:35 S) Lk 13:7. ἀφότε s. ὅτε 1aγ end.
    ⓒ the beg. of a series from … (on).
    α. ἀρξάμενος ἀ. Μωϋσέως καὶ ἀ. πάντων τ. προφητῶν beginning w. Moses and all the prophets Lk 24:27. ἕβδομος ἀ. Ἀδάμ Jd 14 (Diod S 1, 50, 3 ὄγδοος ὁ ἀπὸ τοῦ πατρός [ancestor]; Appian, Mithrid. 9 §29 τὸν ἕκτον ἀπὸ τοῦ πρώτου Μιθριδάτην; Arrian, Anab. 7, 12, 4; Diog. L. 3, 1: Plato in the line of descent was ἕκτος ἀπὸ Σόλωνος; Biogr. p. 31: Homer δέκατος ἀπὸ Μουσαίου). ἀ. διετοῦς καὶ κατωτέρω Mt 2:16 (cp. Num 1:20; 2 Esdr 3:8).
    β. w. both beg. and end given ἀπὸ … ἕως (Sir 18:26; 1 Macc 9:13) Mt 1:17; 23:35; Ac 8:10. Sim., ἀ. δόξης εἰς δόξαν fr. glory to glory 2 Cor 3:18.
    ③ to indicate origin or source, from
    ⓐ lit., with verbs of motion
    α. down from πίπτειν ἀ. τραπέζης Mt 15:27. καθεῖλεν δυνάστας ἀ. θρόνων God has dethroned rulers Lk 1:52.
    β. from ἔρχεσθαι ἀ. θεοῦ J 3:2; cp. 13:3; 16:30. παραγίνεται ἀ. τῆς Γαλιλαίας Mt 3:13; ἀ. ἀνατολῶν ἥξουσιν 8:11 (Is 49:12; 59:19); ἀ. τοῦ ἱεροῦ ἐπορεύετο 24:1; ἀ. Παμφυλίας Ac 15:38. ἐγείρεσθαι ἀ. τ. νεκρῶν be raised from the dead Mt 14:2.
    ⓑ lit., to indicate someone’s local origin from (Hom. et al.; Soph., El. 701; Hdt. 8, 114; ins [RevArch 4 sér. IV 1904 p. 9 ἀπὸ Θεσσαλονίκης]; pap [HBraunert, Binnenwanderung ’64, 384, s.v.; PFlor 14, 2; 15, 5; 17, 4; 22, 13 al.]; Judg 12:8; 13:2; 17:1 [all three acc. to B]; 2 Km 23:20 al.; Jos., Bell. 3, 422, Vi. 217; Just., A I, 1 τῶν ἀπὸ Φλαουί̈ας Νέας πόλεως; s. B-D-F §209, 3; Rob. 578) ἦν ἀ. Βηθσαϊδά he was from B. J 1:44; cp. 12:21. ὄχλοι ἀ. τῆς Γαλιλαίας crowds fr. Galilee Mt 4:25. ἄνδρες ἀ. παντὸς ἔθνους Ac 2:5. ἀνὴρ ἀ. τοῦ ὄχλου a man fr. the crowd Lk 9:38. ὁ προφήτης ὁ ἀ. Ναζαρέθ Mt 21:11. οἱ ἀ. Κιλικίας the Cilicians Ac 6:9. οἱ ἀδελφοὶ οἱ ἀ. Ἰόππης 10:23 (Musaeus 153 παρθένος ἀπʼ Ἀρκαδίας; Just., A I, 58, 1 Μακρίωνα … τὸν ἀπὸ Πόντου). οἱ ἀ. Θεσσαλονίκης Ἰουδαῖοι 17:13. οἱ ἀ. τῆς Ἰταλίας the Italians Hb 13:24, who could be inside as well as outside Italy (cp. Dssm., Her. 33, 1898, 344, LO 167, 1 [LAE 200, 3]; Mlt. 237; B-D-F §437).—Rather denoting close association οἱ ἀ. τῆς ἐκκλησίας members of the church Ac 12:1; likew. 15:5 (cp. Plut., Cato Min. 4, 2 οἱ ἀπὸ τ. στοᾶς φιλόσοφοι; Ps.-Demetr. c. 68 οἱ ἀπʼ αὐτοῦ=his [Isocrates’] pupils; Synes., Ep. 4 p. 162b; 66 p. 206c; PTebt 33, 3 [112 B.C.], Ῥωμαῖος τῶν ἀπὸ συγκλήτου; Ar. 15, 1 Χριστιανοὶ γενεαλογοῦνται ἀπὸ … Ἰησοῦ Χριστοῦ; Ath.).—To indicate origin in the sense of material fr. which someth. is made (Hdt. 7, 65; Theocr. 15, 117; IPriene 117, 72 ἀπὸ χρυσοῦ; 1 Esdr 8:56; Sir 43:20 v.l.) ἔνδυμα ἀ. τριχῶν καμήλου clothing made of camel’s hair Mt 3:4.
    ⓒ fig., w. verbs of asking, desiring, to denote the pers. of or from whom a thing is asked (Ar. 11, 3): δανίσασθαι ἀπό τινος borrow fr. someone Mt 5:42. ἐκζητεῖν ἀ. τῆς γενεᾶς ταύτης Lk 11:51. ἀπαιτεῖν τι ἀπό τινος Lk 12:20. ζητεῖν τι ἀπό τινος 1 Th 2:6. λαμβάνειν τι ἀπό τινος Mt 17:25f; 3J 7.
    ⓓ fig., w. verbs of perceiving, to indicate source of the perception (Lysias, Andoc. 6; Ps.-Aristot., De Mundo 6, 399b ἀπʼ αὐτῶν τῶν ἔργων θεωρεῖται ὁ θεός; Appian, Liby. 104 §493 ἀπὸ τῆς σφραγῖδος=[recognize a corpse] by the seal-ring; Demetr.: 722 Fgm. 2, 1 στοχάζεσθαι ἀπὸ τῶν ὀνομάτων; Just., D. 60, 1 τοῦτο νοοῦμεν ἀπὸ τῶν λόγων τῶν προλελεγμένων; 100, 2 ἀπὸ τῶν γραφῶν): ἀ. τῶν καρπῶν αὐτῶν ἐπιγνώσεσθε αὐτούς by their fruits you will know them Mt 7:16, 20. μανθάνειν παραβολὴν ἀ. τῆς συκῆς learn a lesson from the fig tree 24:32; Mk 13:28. ἀπὸ τῶν σπερμάτων μὴ ποιεῖσθαι τὴν παραβολήν if we are not to derive our parable solely from reference to seeds (cp. 1 Cor 15:37) AcPlCor 2:28.—Also μανθάνειν τι ἀπό τινος learn someth. fr. someone Gal 3:2; Col 1:7.
    ⓔ γράψαι ἀφʼ ὧν ἠδυνήθην, lit., write from what I was able, i.e. as well as I could B 21:9 (cp. Tat. 12, 5 οὐκ ἀπὸ γλώττης οὐδὲ ἀπὸ τῶν εἰκότων οὐδὲ ἀπʼ ἐννοιῶν etc.).
    ④ to indicate distance fr. a point, away from, for μακρὰν ἀ. τινος far fr. someone, ἀπὸ μακρόθεν fr. a great distance s. μακράν, μακρόθεν. ἀπέχειν ἀπό τινος s. ἀπέχω 4. W. detailed measurements (corresp. to Lat. ‘a’, s. B-D-F §161, 1; Rob. 575; WSchulze, Graeca Latina 1901, 15ff; Hdb. on J 11:18; Appian, Bell. Civ. 3, 12 §42; CB I/2, 390 no. 248) ἦν Βηθανία ἐγγὺς τῶν Ἱεροσολύμων ὡς ἀπὸ σταδίων δεκατέντε Bethany was near Jerusalem, about 15 stades (less than 3 km.) away J 11:18. ὡς ἀπὸ πηχῶν διακοσίων about 200 cubits (c. 90 meters) 21:8. ἀπὸ σταδίων χιλίων ἑξακοσίων about 1600 stades (c. 320 km.) Rv 14:20; cp. Hv 4, 1, 5 (for other examples of this usage, s. Rydbeck 68).—Hebraistically ἀπὸ προσώπου τινός (Gen 16:6; Jer 4:26; Jdth 2:14; Sir 21:2; 1 Macc 5:34; En 103:4; Just., A I, 37, 1 ἀπὸ προσώπου τοῦ πατρὸς ἐλέχθησαν διὰ Ἠσαίου … οἵδε οἱ λόγοι ‘in the name of the father … through Isaiah’; 38, 1 al.)=מִפְּנֵי פ׳ ( away) from the presence of someone 2 Th 1:9 (Is 2:10, 19, 21); Rv 12:14 (B-D-F §140; 217, 1; Mlt-H. 466).
    ⑤ to indicate cause, means, or outcome
    ⓐ gener., to show the reason for someth. because of, as a result of, for (numerous ref. in FBleek on Hb 5:7; PFay 111, 4; POxy 3314, 7 [from falling off a horse]; Jdth 2:20; 4 [6] Esdr [POxy 1010]; AscIs 3:13; Jos., Ant. 9, 56) οὐκ ἠδύνατο ἀ. τοῦ ὄχλου he could not because of the crowd Lk 19:3; cp. Mk 2:4 D. οὐκ ἐνέβλεπον ἀπὸ τῆς δόξης τοῦ φωτός I could not see because of the brilliance of the light Ac 22:11. ἀ. τοῦ πλήθους τ. ἰχθύων J 21:6 (M-EBoismard, ad loc.: s. 1f end). ἀ. τοῦ ὕδατος for the water Hs 8, 2, 8. ἀ. τῆς θλίψεως because of the persecution Ac 11:19. οὐαὶ τῷ κόσμῳ ἀ. τ. σκανδάλων Mt 18:7 (s. B-D-F §176, 1; Mlt. 246). εἰσακουσθεὶς ἀ. τῆς εὐλαβείας heard because of his piety Hb 5:7 (but the text may be corrupt; at any rate it is obscure and variously interpr.; besides the comm. s. KRomaniuk, Die Gottesfürchtigen im NT: Aegyptus 44, ’64, 84; B-D-F §211; Rob. 580; s. on εὐλάβεια).
    ⓑ to indicate means with the help of, with (Hdt. et al.; Ael. Aristid. 37, 23 K.=2 p. 25 D.; PGM 4, 2128f σφράγιζε ἀπὸ ῥύπου=seal with dirt; En 97:8) γεμίσαι τὴν κοιλίαν ἀ. τ. κερατίων fill one’s stomach w. the husks Lk 15:16 v.l. (s. ἐκ 4aζ; cp. Pr 18:20). οἱ πλουτήσαντες ἀπʼ αὐτῆς Rv 18:15 (cp. Sir 11:18).
    ⓒ to indicate motive or reason for, from, with (Appian, Bell. Civ. 5, 13 §52 ἀπʼ εὐνοίας=with goodwill; 1 Macc 6:10; pap exx. in Kuhring 35) κοιμᾶσθαι ἀ. τῆς λύπης sleep from sorrow Lk 22:45. ἀ. τῆς χαρᾶς αὐτοῦ Mt 13:44; cp. Lk 24:41; Ac 12:14. ἀ. τοῦ φόβου κράζειν Mt 14:26, ἀ. φόβου καὶ προσδοκίας with fear and expectation Lk 21:26. Hence verbs of fearing, etc., take ἀ. to show the cause of the fear (s. above 1c) μὴ φοβεῖσθαι ἀ. τ. ἀποκτεννόντων τὸ σῶμα not be afraid of those who kill only the body Mt 10:28; Lk 12:4 (cp. Jdth 5:23; 1 Macc 2:62; 3:22; 8:12; En 106:4).
    ⓓ to indicate the originator of the action denoted by the verb from (Trag., Hdt. et al.) ἀ. σοῦ σημεῖον ἰδεῖν Mt 12:38. γινώσκειν ἀπό τινος learn fr. someone Mk 15:45. ἀκούειν ἀ. τοῦ στόματός τινος hear fr. someone’s mouth, i.e. fr. him personally Lk 22:71 (Dionys. Hal. 3, 8 ἀ. στόματος ἤκουσεν); cp. Ac 9:13; 1J 1:5. τὴν ἀ. σοῦ ἐπαγγελίαν a promise given by you Ac 23:21 (cp. Ath. 2, 3 ταῖς ἀπὸ τῶν κατηγόρων αἰτίαις ‘the charges made by the accusers’). ἀφʼ ἑνὸς ἐγενήθησαν Hb 11:12. Prob. παραλαμβάνειν ἀ. τοῦ κυρίου 1 Cor 11:23 is to be understood in the same way: Paul is convinced that he is taught by the Lord himself (for direct teaching s. EBröse, Die Präp. ἀπό 1 Cor 11:23: StKr 71, 1898, 351–60; Dssm.; BWeiss; Ltzm.; H-DWendland. But for indirect communication: Zahn et al.). παραλαβὼν ἀπὸ τῶν θυγατέρων Φιλίππου, ὅτι Papias (11:2); opp. παρειληφέναι ὑπὸ τῶν θ. Φ. (2:9).—Of the more remote cause ἀπʼ ἀνθρώπων from human beings (as opposed to transcendent revelation; w. διʼ ἀνθρώπου; cp. Artem. 1, 73 p. 66, 11 ἀπὸ γυναικῶν ἢ διὰ γυναικῶν; 2, 36 p. 135, 26) Gal 1:1. ἀ. κυρίου πνεύματος fr. the Lord, who is the Spirit 2 Cor 3:18. ἔχειν τι ἀπό τινος have (received) someth. fr. someone 1 Cor 6:19; 1 Ti 3:7; 1J 2:20; 4:21.—In salutation formulas εἰρήνη ἀ. θεοῦ πατρός ἡμῶν peace that comes from God, our father Ro 1:7; 1 Cor 1:3; 2 Cor 1:2; Gal 1:3; Eph 1:2; cp. 6:23; Phil 1:2; Col 1:2; 1 Th 1:1 v.l.; 2 Th 1:2; 1 Ti 1:2; 2 Ti 1:2; Tit 1:4; Phlm 3. σοφία ἀ. θεοῦ wisdom that comes fr. God 1 Cor 1:30. ἔπαινος ἀ. θεοῦ praise fr. God 4:5. καὶ τοῦτο ἀ. θεοῦ and that brought about by God Phil 1:28. The expr. εἰρήνη ἀπὸ ‘ὁ ὢν καὶ ὁ ἦν καὶ ὁ ἐρχόμενος’ Rv 1:4 is quite extraordinary. It may be an interpretation of the name Yahweh already current, or an attempt to show reverence for the divine name by preserving it unchanged, or simply one more of the grammatical peculiarities so frequent in Rv (Meyer6-Bousset 1906, 159ff; Mlt. 9, note 1; cp. PParis 51, 33 ἀπὸ ἀπηλιότης; Mussies 93f, 328).
    ⓔ to indicate responsible agents for someth., from, of
    α. the self, st. Gk. usage (Thu. 5, 60, 1; X., Mem. 2, 10, 3; Andoc., Orat. 2, 4 οὗτοι οὐκ ἀφʼ αὑτῶν ταῦτα πράττουσιν; Diod S 17, 56; Num 16:28; 4 Macc 11:3; En 98:4; TestAbr A 15 p. 95, 26 [Stone p. 38]; 18 p. 101, 6 [Stone p. 50]; Just., A I, 43, 8) the expr. ἀφʼ ἑαυτοῦ (pl. ἀφʼ ἑαυτῶν) of himself and ἀπʼ ἐμαυτοῦ of myself are common Lk 12:57; 21:30; 2 Cor 3:5, esp. so in J: 5:19, 30; 8:28; 10:18; 15:4.—7:17f; 11:51; 14:10; 16:13; 18:34. So also ἀπʼ ἐμαυτοῦ οὐκ ἐλήλυθα I did not come of myself (opp. the Father sent me) 7:28; 8:42.
    β. fr. others. W. verbs in the pass. voice or pass. mng. ὑπό is somet. replaced by ἀπό (in isolated cases in older Gk. e.g. Thu. 1, 17 et al. [Kühner-G. II/1 p. 457f]; freq. in later Gk.: Polyb. 1, 79, 14; Hero I 152, 6; 388, 11; Nicol. Dam.: 90 Fgm. 130, 130 Jac.; IG XII/5, 29, 1; SIG 820, 9; PLond III, 1173, 12 p. 208; BGU 1185, 26; PFlor 150, 6 ἀ. τῶν μυῶν κατεσθιόμενα; PGM 4, 256; Kuhring 36f; 1 Macc 15:17; Sir 16:4; ParJer 1:1 ᾐχμαλωτεύθησαν … ἀπὸ τοῦ βασιλέως; Philo, Leg. All. 3, 62; Just., A I, 68, 6 ἐπιστολὴν … γραφεῖσάν μοι ἀπὸ Σερήνου, D. 121, 3 ἀπὸ παντὸς [γένους] μετάνοιαν πεποιῆσθαι. See B-D-F §210; Rob. 820; GHatzidakis, Einl. in d. neugriech. Gramm. 1892, 211; AJannaris, An Histor. Gk. Grammar 1897, §1507). Yet just at this point the textual tradition varies considerably, and the choice of prep. is prob. at times influenced by the wish to express special nuances of mng. Lk 8:29b v.l. (ὑπό text); 43b (ὑπό v.l.); 10:22 D; ἀποδεδειγμένος ἀ. τ. θεοῦ attested by God Ac 2:22. ἐπικληθεὶς Βαρναβᾶς ἀ. (ὑπό v.l.) τ. ἀποστόλων named B. by the apostles 4:36. κατενεχθεὶς ἀ. τοῦ ὕπνου overcome by sleep 20:9. ἀθετούμενος ἀπὸ τῶν παραχαρασσόντων τὰ λόγια αὐτοῦ inasmuch as (Jesus) is being rejected by those who falsify his words AcPlCor 2:3. νεκροῦ βληθέντος ἀπὸ τῶν υἱῶν Ἰσραὴλ ἐπʼ αὐτά when a corpse was cast upon them (the bones of Elisha) 2:32. In such cases ἀπό freq. denotes the one who indirectly originates an action, and can be transl. at the hands of, by command of: πολλὰ παθεῖν ἀ. τ. πρεσβυτέρων suffer much at the hands of the elders Mt 16:21; cp. Lk 9:22; 17:25, where the emphasis is to be placed on παθεῖν, not on ἀποδοκιμασθῆναι. In ἀ. θεοῦ πειράζομαι the thought is that the temptation is caused by God, though not actually carried out by God Js 1:13. ἡτοιμασμένος ἀ. τοῦ θεοῦ prepared by God’s command, not by God in person Rv 12:6.
    ⑥ In a few expr. ἀπό helps to take the place of an adverb. ἀπὸ μέρους, s. μέρος 1c.—ἡμέρᾳ ἀφʼ ἡμέρας day by day GJs 12:3.—ἀπὸ μιᾶς (acc. to Wlh., Einl.2 26, an Aramaism, min ḥădā˒=at once [s. MBlack, An Aramaic Approach3, ’67, 113]; but this does not explain the fem. gender, found also in the formulaic ἐπὶ μιᾶς Maxim. Tyr. 6, 3f En 99:9 [s. SAalen, NTS 13, ’67, 3] and in Mod. Gk. μὲ μιᾶς at once [Thumb §162 note 2]. PSI 286, 22 uses ἀπὸ μιᾶς of a payment made ‘at once’; on the phrase s. New Docs 2, 189. Orig. γνώμης might have been a part of the expr. [Philo, Spec. Leg. 3, 73], or ὁρμῆς [Thu. 7, 71, 6], or γλώσσης [Cass. Dio 44, 36, 2], or φωνῆς [Herodian 1, 4, 8]; cp. ἀπὸ μιᾶς φωνῆς Plut., Mor. 502d of an echo; s. B-D-F §241, 6) unanimously, alike, in concert Lk 14:18. Sim. ἀπὸ τ. καρδιῶν fr. (your) hearts, sincerely Mt 18:35.—Himerius, Or. 39 [=Or. 5], 6 has as a formula διὰ μιᾶς, probably = continuously, uninterruptedly, Or. 44 [=Or. 8], 2 fuller διὰ μιᾶς τῆς σπουδῆς=with one and the same, or with quite similar zeal.—M-M.

    Ελληνικά-Αγγλικά παλαιοχριστιανική Λογοτεχνία > ἀπό

  • 12 τίθημι

    τίθημι (Hom.+) and its by-form τιθέω (Hv 1, 1, 3 and 2, 1, 2 as historical present; B-D-F §321; s. Rob. 318); impf. 3 sg. ἐτίθει, 3 pl. ἐτίθεσαν Mk 6:56 and ἐτίθουν as v.l.; Ac 3:2; 4:35; Hv 3, 2, 7 (B-D-F §94, 1; Mlt-H. 202); fut. θήσω; 1 aor. ἔθηκα (B-D-F §95, 1; Rob. 308; 310); 2 aor. subj. θῶ, impv. 2 pl. θέτε, inf. θεῖναι, ptc. θείς; pf. τέθεικα.; plpf. ἐτεθείκει (Just., D. 78, 5). Mid.: fut. θήσομαι; 2 aor. ἐθέμην. Pass.: fut. 3 pl. τεθήσονται Jer 13:16; 1 aor. ἐτέθην; pf. τέθειμαι, ptc. τεθειμένος (Nicol. Dam.: 90 Fgm. 130, 18 p. 401, 3 Jac.) J 19:41; Hs 9, 15, 4 (on the pf. s. B-D-F §97, 2). The middle is gener. not different in mng. fr. the act. (B-D-F §316, 1; s. Rob. 804f). The semantic boundaries of this multivalent verb are quite flexible.
    ① to put or place in a particular location, lay, put
    ⓐ act. and pass.: gener.
    α. w. acc. lay (away), set up, put (away) ποῦ τεθείκατε αὐτόν; where have you laid him? J 11:34 (as early as Hom. τιθέναι has the special sense lay away, bury); cp. Mk 16:6; J 19:42; 20:2, 13, 15. Pass. (ApcMos 42 ποῦ μέλλοι τεθῆναι τὸ σῶμα αὐτῆς) Mk 15:47; Lk 23:55. ὅπου ἦν τεθείς GPt 12:51. λίθον Ro 9:33 (Is 28:16 ἐμβαλῶ); 1 Pt 2:6; pass. B 6:2. θεμέλιον lay a foundation Lk 14:29; 1 Cor 3:10f (in imagery).—Of stones ἐξώτεροι ἐτέθησαν they were placed on the outside Hs 9, 8, 3; 5a (cp. c); 7. ἐν ἰσχύι τέθεικεν τὴν σάρκα αὐτοῦ κύριος the Lord (God) has set his (Christ’s) flesh in strength B 6:3a; cp. b (Is 50:7).
    β. w. the acc., oft. supplied fr. the context, and a prepositional expr. closely related to the verb (Herodas 4, 34 τιθέναι εἰς τοὺς λίθους ζοήν [ sic]) εἰς κρύπτην put someth. in a cellar Lk 11:33. εἰς μνημεῖον lay in a tomb Ac 13:29; cp. Rv 11:9. Of stones τιθ. εἰς τ. οἰκοδομήν put into the building Hv 3, 2, 7. Pass. Hs 9, 4, 5; 9, 6, 8; cp. 9, 5, 4. Opp. ἐκ τῆς οἰκοδομῆς ἐτέθησαν they were put out of the building 9, 8, 1. ἔμπροσθέν τινος GPt 4:12. ἔν τινι (Gen 50:26; Jos., Ant. 14, 124; TestJob 20:9): ἐν μνημείῳ Mt 27:60; cp. Mk 6:29; 15:46; Lk 23:53; Ac 7:16. Pass. J 19:41.—Mk 6:56; Ac 9:37. ἐνώπιόν τινος (1 Km 10:25) Lk 5:18. ἐπί τινος (X., Cyr. 8, 8, 16; Ezk 40:2; JosAs 3:11; Jos., Ant. 6, 15) 8:16b; J 19:19; Ac 5:15; Rv 10:2; GPt 3:8; 6:21; 12:53. ἐπί τινι 8:32. ἐπί τι (Ps 20:4; 1 Km 6:8; TestAbr B 5 p. 109, 18 [Stone p. 66]; JosAs 16:11; ParJer 9:32; Mel., P. 14, 90) Mk 4:21b; Lk 6:48 (θεμέλιον; s. α above); 2 Cor 3:13. Esp. τὰς χεῖρας ἐπί τι or ἐπί τινα (cp. Ps 138:5) Mk 8:25 v.l.; 10:16: τὴν δεξιάν Rv 1:17. θήσω τὸ πνεῦμά μου ἐπʼ αὐτόν Mt 12:18 (=ἔδωκα Is 42:1; τ. τὸ πνεῦμα as Is 63:11). παρά τι (Plut., Mor. 176e; 3 Km 13:31) Ac 4:35, 37 v.l.; 5:2. πρός τι (JosAs 8:4 πρὸς τὸ στῆθος) 3:2; 4:37. ὑπό τι Mt 5:15; Mk 4:21; cp. 1 Cor 15:25 (s. 5aα). ὑποκάτω τινός (Jer 45:12) Lk 8:16a.—Mt 22:44 (Ps 109:1); Mk 12:36.
    ⓑ special expressions
    α. act. explain in what figure of speech can we present (the Reign of God)? (i.e., how shall I put it?) Mk 4:30.
    β. act. take off, give up in Joh. lit. take off, remove τὰ ἱμάτια (Hdt 1, 10, 1 τ. τὰ εἵματα; cp. Herodas 5, 62; Plut., Alc. 195 [8, 2]; Jos., Bell. 1, 390 τ. τὸ διάδημα and s. ἱμάτιον 3) J 13:4. τὴν (ἑαυτοῦ) ψυχήν lay down or give (up) one’s life 10:11 and 15 (both v.l. δίδωμι), 17, 18ab (ApcSed 1:5 τὴν ψυχὴν θῇ ὑπὲρ τῶν φίλων; EFascher, Z. Auslegg. v. J 10:17, 18: Deutsche Theol. ’41, 37–66); 13:37f; 15:13; 1 J 3:16ab (Appian, Bell. Civ. 4, 68 §289 δεξιάς; SibOr 5, 157 τ. simply=δίδωμι).
    γ. act. show deference to τιθέναι τὰ γόνατα (σοι γόνυ τίθημι γαίᾳ Eur., Troad. 1307; also in Lat.: genua ponere Ovid, Fasti 2, 438; Curt. 8, 7, 13; B-D-F §5, 3b) bend the knee, kneel down Mk 15:19; Lk 22:41; Ac 7:60; 9:40; 20:36; 21:5; Hv 1, 1, 3; 2, 1, 2.
    δ. act. place before someone, serve (X., Mem. 3, 14, 1; JosAs 15:14 τράπεζαν καὶ ἄρτον Just., A I, 66, 4) οἶνον J 2:10 (Bel 11 Theod. οἶνον θές).
    ε. act. and mid. have (in mind) θέτε ἐν ταῖς καρδίαις w. inf. foll. make up (your) minds Lk 21:14. Mid. ἔθεντο ἐν τῇ καρδίᾳ αὐτῶν they kept in mind (the obj. acc. is supplied by the immediate context) Lk 1:66 (1 Km 21:13). The same expr.= come to think of someth., contrive someth. in one’s mind 21:14 v.l.; Ac 5:4. Likew. ἔθετο ὁ Παῦλος ἐν τῷ πνεύματι w. inf. foll. Paul resolved 19:21. θέσθε εἰς τὰ ὦτα ὑμῶν τοὺς λόγους τούτους Lk 9:44.
    ζ. act. and mid. effect someth., arrange for someth. τ. ἐπί τινος foll. by the acc. and inf. ordain by means of someone that … B 13:6.—τὸ μέρος αὐτοῦ μετὰ τῶν ὑποκριτῶν θήσει (μέρος 2) Mt 24:51; cp. Lk 12:46. Mid. w. acc. (GrBar 2:1 [of God]; Appian, Bell. Civ. 2, 106 §442 εὐχὰς τίθεσθαι=offer prayers) βουλήν reach a decision (βουλή 2a) Ac 27:12.
    η. mid. put (in custody) τίθεσθαί τινα ἐν τηρήσει Ac 5:18; ἐν (τῇ) φυλακῇ (Gen 41:10; 42:17) Mt 14:3 v.l.; Ac 5:25; εἰς φυλακήν (PPetr II, 5a, 3 [III B.C.]) 12:4; εἰς τήρησιν (w. the acc. easily supplied) 4:3. ἐν σωτηρίῳ place in safety, cause to share salvation (w. acc. to be supplied) 1 Cl 15:6 (Ps 11:6).
    θ. act. provide (an example) ὑπόδειγμά τινος τιθ. set up an example of someth. 2 Pt 2:6 (cp. Jos., Ant. 17, 313 παράδειγμα τῆς ἀρετῆς τιθέναι). Those persons are added, in the dat., to whose advantage or disadvantage the example is given: τιθέναι πρόσκομμα τῷ ἀδελφῷ Ro 14:13 (πρόσκομμα 2b). σκοπὸν τοῖς νέοις θήσομεν 2 Cl 19:1.
    ② act. to lay aside/deposit (money), put aside, store up, deposit a t.t. term of commercial life (Demosth. 52, 3 ἀργύριον al.; Hyperid. 5, 4; Theocr., Epigr. 14, 2; Plut., Mor. 829b; pap) opp. αἴρειν you withdraw what you did not deposit Lk 19:21; cp. vs. 22. ἕκαστος παρʼ ἑαυτῷ τιθέτω each one is to put aside at home 1 Cor 16:2.
    ③ to assign to some task or function, appoint, assign
    ⓐ τιθέναι τινὰ εἴς τι place/appoint someone to or for ( to function as) someth. (for the construction cp. Ael. Aristid. 53 p. 636 D.: τοὺς οὐκ ὄντας νόμους εἰς νόμους τ.) τέθεικά σε εἰς φῶς ἐθνῶν Ac 13:47 (Is 49:6); pass.: εἰς ὸ̔ ἐτέθην ἐγὼ κῆρυξ 1 Ti 2:7; 2 Ti 1:11. Also τιθ. τινὰ ἵνα appoint someone to … J 15:16.
    ⓑ mid. τίθεσθαι τινὰ εἴς τι appoint someone to or for someth. Dg 6:10. W. acc. easily supplied 1 Ti 1:12.
    ⓐ establish, give, of a law (τιθέναι νόμον since Soph., El. 580; IAndrosIsis, Kyme 4; the mid. τίθεσθαι νόμον since Hdt. 1, 29. Both oft. in Pla.; likew. Diod S 5, 83, 5, where the act. as well as the mid. is used of law. The act. also EpArist 15; Jos., C. Ap. 1, 316, Ant. 16, 1; Ath. 34, 2. The mid. also Appian, Bell. Civ. 3, 55 §228; Jos., C. Ap. 1, 269; 2, 273; Ar. 13, 7) only in the pass. (as Pla., Leg.; 4, 705d al.; Jos., C. Ap. 2, 184; Just., D. 11, 2; Ath. 33, 1) ὁ νόμος ἐτέθη Gal 3:19 D.
    ⓑ mid. w. acc. fix, establish, set καιροὺς οὓς ὁ πατὴρ ἔθετο times which the Father has fixed Ac 1:7. θέμενος ἐν ἡμῖν τὸν λόγον τῆς καταλλαγῆς as he established among us the word of reconciliation (=entrusted to us … ; cp. Ps 104:27 ἔθετο ἐν αὐτοῖς τ. λόγους) 2 Cor 5:19. ὁ θεὸς ἔθετο τὰ μέλη God has arranged the parts of the body 1 Cor 12:18.
    ⑤ to cause to undergo a change in experience/condition, make, consign
    ⓐ act. or pass., either w. a double acc. of the obj. and of the pred. (Hom.+; X., Cyr. 4, 6, 3; Lucian, Dial. Marin. 14, 2; Aelian, VH13, 6; Lev 26:31; Is 5:20; Wsd 10:21; Jos., Ant. 11, 39) or in the form τιθέναι τινὰ εἴ τι (cp. 3a).
    α. make someone ὸ̔ν ἔθηκεν κληρονόμον πάντων Hb 1:2. πατέρα πολλῶν ἐθνῶν τέθεικά σε Ro 4:17 (Gen 17:5). ἕως ἂν θῶ τοὺς ἐχθρούς σου ὑποπόδιον τῶν ποδῶν σου until I make your enemies a footstool for your feet (Ps 109:1): Mt 22:44 v.l.; Lk 20:43; Ac 2:35; Hb 1:13; the same quotation introduced with ἄχρι οὗ θῇ 1 Cor 15:25; pass. Hb 10:13 (on this expr. cp. Plut., Mor. 1097c [HAlmqvist, Pl. u. das NT ’46, 104]). Consign, act. εἰ κόλασιν 1 Cl 11:1; pass. of those who refuse to believe the word εἰ ὸ̔ καὶ ἐτέθησαν 1 Pt 2:8; of Paul’s obligation to accept his destiny at Rome εἰς τοῦτο γὰρ ἐτέθην AcPl Ha 7, 15. Cp. 3a.
    β. make someth. (Mimnermus 1, 10 D.2 cause someth. to become someth. [adj.]: ‘God has made old age vexatious’) ἀδάπανον θήσω τὸ εὐαγγέλιον 1 Cor 9:18.
    ⓑ mid. w. a double acc. make someone someth. (Appian., Illyr. 13 §37 φίλον τίθεσθαί τινα; schol. on Pind., O. 1, 58b; 2 Macc 5:21; Ath. 12, 2. S. also Tyrtaeus [VII B.C.] 8, 5 D.3 of the man who is called upon to hate his own life [in battle]: ἀνὴρ ἐχθρὴν ψυχὴν θέμενος) Ac 20:28 (CClaereboets, Biblica 24, ’43, 370–87); 1 Cor 12:28. τίθεσθαι τινὰ εἲ τι consign someone to someth. ὀργήν 1 Th 5:9.—B. 832. DELG. M-M. EDNT. TW.

    Ελληνικά-Αγγλικά παλαιοχριστιανική Λογοτεχνία > τίθημι

  • 13 ὁ

    ὁ, ἡ, τό pl. οἱ, αἱ, τά article, derived fr. a demonstrative pronoun, ‘the’. Since the treatment of the inclusion and omission of the art. belongs to the field of grammar, the lexicon can limit itself to exhibiting the main features of its usage. It is difficult to set hard and fast rules for the employment of the art., since the writer’s style had special freedom of play here—Kühner-G. I p. 589ff; B-D-F §249–76; Mlt. 80–84; Rob. 754–96; W-S. §17ff; Rdm.2 112–18; Abel §28–32; HKallenberg, RhM 69, 1914, 642ff; FVölker, Syntax d. griech. Papyri I, Der Artikel, Progr. d. Realgymn. Münster 1903; FEakin, AJP 37, 1916, 333ff; CMiller, ibid. 341ff; EColwell, JBL 52, ’33, 12–21 (for a critique s. Mlt-H.-Turner III 183f); ASvensson, D. Gebr. des bestimmten Art. in d. nachklass. Epik ’37; RFink, The Syntax of the Greek Article ’53; JRoberts, Exegetical Helps, The Greek Noun with and without the Article: Restoration Qtly 14, ’71, 28–44; HTeeple, The Greek Article with Personal Names in the Synoptic Gospels: NTS 19, ’73, 302–17; Mussies 186–97.
    ① this one, that one, the art. funct. as demonstrative pronoun
    ⓐ in accordance w. epic usage (Hes., Works 450: ἡ=this [voice]) in the quot. fr. Arat., Phaenom. 5 τοῦ γὰρ καὶ γένος ἐσμέν for we are also his (lit. this One’s) offspring Ac 17:28.
    ⓑ ὁ μὲν … ὁ δέ the one … the other (Polyaenus 6, 2, 1 ὁ μὲν … ὁ δὲ … ὁ δε; PSI 512, 21 [253 B.C.]); pl. οἱ μὲν … οἱ δέ (PSI 341, 9 [256 B.C.]; TestJob 29:1) some … others w. ref. to a noun preceding: ἐσχίσθη τὸ πλῆθος … οἱ μὲν ἦσαν σὺν τοῖς Ἰουδαίοις, οἱ δὲ σὺν τοῖς ἀποστόλοις Ac 14:4; 17:32; 28:24; 1 Cor 7:7; Gal 4:23; Phil 1:16f. Also without such a relationship expressed τοὺς μὲν ἀποστόλους, τοὺς δὲ προφήτας, τοὺς δὲ εὐαγγελιστάς Eph 4:11. οἱ μὲν … ὁ δέ Hb 7:5f, 20f. οἱ μὲν … ἄλλοι (δέ) J 7:12. οἱ μὲν … ἄλλοι δὲ … ἕτεροι δέ Mt 16:14. τινὲς … οἱ δέ Ac 17:18 (cp. Pla., Leg. 1, 627a; 2, 658 B.; Aelian, VH 2, 34; Palaeph. 6, 5).—Mt 26:67; 28:17 οἱ δέ introduces a second class; just before this, instead of the first class, the whole group is mentioned (cp. X., Hell. 1, 2, 14, Cyr. 3, 2, 12; KMcKay, JSNT 24, ’85, 71f)= but some (as Arrian, Anab. 5, 2, 7; 5, 14, 4; Lucian, Tim. 4 p. 107; Hesych. Miles. [VI A.D.]: 390 Fgm. 1, 35 end Jac.).
    ⓒ To indicate the progress of the narrative, ὁ δέ, οἱ δέ but he, but they (lit. this one, they) is also used without ὁ μέν preceding (likew. Il. 1, 43; Pla., X.; also Clearchus, Fgm. 76b τὸν δὲ εἰπεῖν=but this man said; pap examples in Mayser II/1, 1926, 57f) e.g. Mt 2:9, 14; 4:4; 9:31; Mk 14:31 (cp. Just., A II, 2, 3). ὁ μὲν οὖν Ac 23:18; 28:5. οἱ μὲν οὖν 1:6; 5:41; 15:3, 30.—JO’Rourke, Paul’s Use of the Art. as a Pronoun, CBQ 34, ’72, 59–65.
    ② the, funct. to define or limit an entity, event, or state
    ⓐ w. nouns
    α. w. appellatives, or common nouns, where, as in Pla., Thu., Demosth. et al., the art. has double significance, specific or individualizing, and generic.
    א. In its individualizing use it focuses attention on a single thing or single concept, as already known or otherwise more definitely limited: things and pers. that are unique in kind: ὁ ἥλιος, ἡ σελήνη, ὁ οὐρανός, ἡ γῆ, ἡ θάλασσα, ὁ κόσμος, ἡ κτίσις, ὁ θεός (BWeiss [s. on θεός, beg.]), ὁ διάβολος, ὁ λόγος (J 1:1, 14), τὸ φῶς, ἡ σκοτία, ἡ ζωή, ὁ θάνατος etc. (but somet. the art. is omitted, esp. when nouns are used w. preps.; B-D-F §253, 1–4; Rob. 791f; Mlt-Turner 171). ἐν συναγωγῇ καὶ ἐν τῷ ἱερῷ J 18:20.—Virtues, vices, etc. (contrary to Engl. usage): ἡ ἀγάπη, ἡ ἀλήθεια, ἡ ἁμαρτία, ἡ δικαιοσύνη, ἡ σοφία et al.—The individualizing art. stands before a common noun that was previously mentioned (without the art.): τοὺς πέντε ἄρτους Lk 9:16 (after πέντε ἄρτοι vs. 13). τὸ βιβλίον 4:17b (after βιβλίον, vs. 17a), τοὺς μάγους Mt 2:7 (after μάγοι, vs. 1). J 4:43 (40); 12:6 (5); 20:1 (19:41); Ac 9:17 (11); Js 2:3 (2); Rv 15:6 (1).—The individ. art. also stands before a common noun which, in a given situation, is given special attention as the only or obvious one of its kind (Hipponax [VI B.C.] 13, 2 West=D.3 16 ὁ παῖς the [attending] slave; Diod S 18, 29, 2 ὁ ἀδελφός=his brother; Artem. 4, 71 p. 245, 19 ἡ γυνή=your wife; ApcEsdr 6:12 p. 31, 17 μετὰ Μωσῆ … ἐν τῷ ὄρει [Sinai]; Demetr. (?): 722 fgm 7 Jac. [in Eus., PE 9, 19, 4] ἐπὶ τὸ ὄρος [Moriah]) τῷ ὑπηρέτῃ to the attendant (who took care of the synagogue) Lk 4:20. εἰς τὸν νιπτῆρα into the basin (that was there for the purpose) J 13:5. ἰδοὺ ὁ ἄνθρωπο here is this (wretched) man 19:5. ἐκ τῆς παιδίσκης or ἐλευθέρας by the (well-known) slave woman or the free woman (Hagar and Sarah) Gal 4:22f. τὸν σῖτον Ac 27:38. ἐν τῇ ἐπιστολῇ 1 Cor 5:9 (s. ἐπιστολή) τὸ ὄρος the mountain (nearby) Mt 5:1; 8:1; 14:23; Mk 3:13; 6:46; Lk 6:12; 9:28 al.; ἡ πεισμονή this (kind of) persuasion Gal 5:8. ἡ μαρτυρία the (required) witness or testimony J 5:36.—The art. takes on the idea of κατʼ ἐξοχήν ‘par excellence’ (Porphyr., Abst. 24, 7 ὁ Αἰγύπτιος) ὁ ἐρχόμενος the one who is (was) to come or the coming one par excellence=The Messiah Mt 11:3; Lk 7:19. ὁ προφήτης J 1:21, 25; 7:40. ὁ διδάσκαλος τ. Ἰσραήλ 3:10 (Ps.-Clem., Hom. 5, 18 of Socrates: ὁ τῆς Ἑλλάδος διδάσκαλος); cp. MPol 12:2. With things (Stephan. Byz. s.v. Μάρπησσα: οἱ λίθοι=the famous stones [of the Parian Marble]) ἡ κρίσις the (last) judgment Mt 12:41. ἡ ἡμέρα the day of decision 1 Cor 3:13; (cp. Mi 4:6 Mt); Hb 10:25. ἡ σωτηρία (our) salvation at the consummation of the age Ro 13:11.
    ב. In its generic use it singles out an individual who is typical of a class, rather than the class itself: ὁ ἀγαθὸς ἄνθρωπος Mt 12:35. κοινοῖ τὸν ἄνθρωπον 15:11. ὥσπερ ὁ ἐθνικός 18:17. ὁ ἐργάτης Lk 10:7. ἐγίνωσκεν τί ἦν ἐν τῷ ἀνθρώπῳ J 2:25. τὰ σημεῖα τοῦ ἀποστόλου 2 Cor 12:12. ὁ κληρονόμος Gal 4:1. So also in parables and allegories: ὁ οἰκοδεσπότης Mt 24:43. Cp. J 10:11b, 12. The generic art. in Gk. is often rendered in Engl. by the indef. art. or omitted entirely.
    β. The use of the art. w. personal names is varied; as a general rule the presence of the art. w. a personal name indicates that the pers. is known; without the art. focus is on the name as such (s. Dssm., BPhW 22, 1902, 1467f; BWeiss, D. Gebr. des Art. b. d. Eigennamen [im NT]: StKr 86, 1913, 349–89). Nevertheless, there is an unmistakable drift in the direction of Mod. Gk. usage, in which every proper name has the art. (B-D-F §260; Rob. 759–61; Mlt-Turner 165f). The ms. tradition varies considerably. In the gospels the art. is usu. found w. Ἰησοῦς; yet it is commonly absent when Ἰ. is accompanied by an appositive that has the art. Ἰ. ὁ Γαλιλαῖος Mt 26:69; Ἰ. ὁ Ναζωραῖος vs. 71; Ἰ. ὁ λεγόμενος Χριστός 27:17, 22. Sim. Μαριὰμ ἡ μήτηρ τοῦ Ἰ. Ac 1:14. The art. somet. stands before oblique cases of indecl. proper names, apparently to indicate their case (B-D-F §260, 2; Rob. 760). But here, too, there is no hard and fast rule.—HTeeple, NTS 19, ’73, 302–17 (synopt.).
    γ. The art. is customarily found w. the names of countries (B-D-F §261, 4; W-S. § 18, 5 d; Rob. 759f); less freq. w. names of cities (B-D-F §261, 1; 2; Rob. 760; Mlt-Turner 170–72). W. Ἰερουσαλήμ, Ἱεροσόλυμα it is usu. absent (s. Ἱεροσόλυμα); it is only when this name has modifiers that it must have the art. ἡ νῦν Ἰ. Gal 4:25; ἡ ἄνω Ἰ. vs. 26; ἡ καινὴ Ἰ. Rv 3:12. But even in this case it lacks the art. when the modifier follows: Hb 12:22.—Names of rivers have the art. ὁ Ἰορδάνης, ὁ Εὐφράτης, ὁ Τίβερις Hv 1, 1, 2 (B-D-F §261, 8; Rob. 760; Mlt-Turner 172). Likew. names of seas ὁ Ἀδρίας Ac 27:27.
    δ. The art. comes before nouns that are accompanied by the gen. of a pronoun (μοῦ, σοῦ, ἡμῶν, ὑμῶν, αὐτοῦ, ἑαυτοῦ, αὐτῶν) Mt 1:21, 25; 5:45; 6:10–12; 12:49; Mk 9:17; Lk 6:27; 10:7; 16:6; Ro 4:19; 6:6 and very oft. (only rarely is it absent: Mt 19:28; Lk 1:72; 2:32; 2 Cor 8:23; Js 5:20 al.).
    ε. When accompanied by the possessive pronouns ἐμός, σός, ἡμέτερος, ὑμέτερος the noun always has the art., and the pron. stands mostly betw. art. and noun: Mt 18:20; Mk 8:38; Lk 9:26; Ac 26:5; Ro 3:7 and oft. But only rarely so in John: J 4:42; 5:47; 7:16. He prefers to repeat the article w. the possessive following the noun ἡ κρίσις ἡ ἐμή J 5:30; cp. 7:6; 17:17; 1J 1:3 al.
    ζ. Adjectives (or participles), when they modify nouns that have the art., also come either betw. the art. and noun: ἡ ἀγαθὴ μερίς Lk 10:42; τὸ ἅγιον πνεῦμα 12:10; Ac 1:8; ἡ δικαία κρίσις J 7:24 and oft., or after the noun w. the art. repeated τὸ πνεῦμα τὸ ἅγιον Mk 3:29; J 14:26; Ac 1:16; Hb 3:7; 9:8; 10:15. ἡ ζωὴ ἡ αἰώνιος 1J 1:2; 2:25. τὴν πύλην τὴν σιδηρᾶν Ac 12:10. Only rarely does an adj. without the art. stand before a noun that has an art. (s. B-D-F §270, 1; Rob. 777; Mlt-Turner 185f): ἀκατακαλύπτῳ τῇ κεφαλῇ 1 Cor 11:5. εἶπεν μεγάλῃ τῇ φωνῇ Ac 14:10 v.l.; cp. 26:24. κοιναῖς ταῖς χερσίν Mk 7:5 D.—Double modifier τὸ πῦρ τὸ αἰώνιον τὸ ἡτοιμασμένον τῷ διαβόλῳ Mt 25:41. τὸ θυσιαστήριον τὸ χρυσοῦν τὸ ἐνώπιον τοῦ θρόνου Rv 8:3; 9:13. ἡ πόρνη ἡ μεγάλη ἡ καθημένη 17:1.—Mk 5:36 τὸν λόγον λαλούμενον is prob. a wrong rdg. (B has τὸν λαλ., D τοῦτον τὸν λ. without λαλούμενον).—On the art. w. ὅλος, πᾶς, πολύς s. the words in question.
    η. As in the case of the poss. pron. (ε) and adj. (ζ), so it is w. other expressions that can modify a noun: ἡ κατʼ ἐκλογὴν πρόθεσις Ro 9:11. ἡ παρʼ ἐμοῦ διαθήκη 11:27. ὁ λόγος ὁ τοῦ σταυροῦ 1 Cor 1:18. ἡ ἐντολὴ ἡ εἰς ζωήν Ro 7:10. ἡ πίστις ὑμῶν ἡ πρὸς τὸν θεόν 1 Th 1:8. ἡ διακονία ἡ εἰς τοὺς ἁγίους 2 Cor 8:4.
    θ. The art. precedes the noun when a demonstrative pron. (ὅδε, οὗτος, ἐκεῖνος) belonging with it comes before or after; e.g.: οὗτος ὁ ἄνθρωπος Lk 14:30; J 9:24. οὗτος ὁ λαός Mk 7:6. οὗτος ὁ υἱός μου Lk 15:24. οὗτος ὁ τελώνης 18:11 and oft. ὁ ἄνθρωπος οὗτος Mk 14:71; Lk 2:25; 23:4, 14, 47. ὁ λαὸς οὗτος Mt 15:8. ὁ υἱός σου οὗτος Lk 15:30 and oft.—ἐκείνη ἡ ἡμέρα Mt 7:22; 22:46. ἐκ. ἡ ὥρα 10:19; 18:1; 26:55. ἐκ. ὁ καιρός 11:25; 12:1; 14:1. ἐκ. ὁ πλάνος 27:63 and oft. ἡ οἰκία ἐκείνη Mt 7:25, 27. ἡ ὥρα ἐκ. 8:13; 9:22; ἡ γῆ ἐκ. 9:26, 31; ἡ ἡμέρα ἐκ. 13:1. ὁ ἀγρὸς ἐκ. vs. 44 and oft.—ὁ αὐτός s. αὐτός 3b.
    ι. An art. before a nom. noun makes it a vocative (as early as Hom.; s. KBrugman4-AThumb, Griech. Gramm. 1913, 431; Schwyzer II 63f; B-D-F §147; Rob. 769. On the LXX Johannessohn, Kasus 14f.—ParJer 1:1 Ἰερεμία ὁ ἐκλεκτός μου; 7:2 χαῖρε Βαρούχι ὁ οἰκονόμος τῆς πίστεως) ναί, ὁ πατήρ Mt 11:26. τὸ κοράσιον, ἔγειρε Mk 5:41. Cp. Mt 7:23; 27:29 v.l.; Lk 8:54; 11:39; 18:11, 13 (Goodsp, Probs. 85–87); J 19:3 and oft.
    ⓑ Adjectives become substantives by the addition of the art.
    α. ὁ πονηρός Eph 6:16. οἱ σοφοί 1 Cor 1:27. οἱ ἅγιοι, οἱ πλούσιοι, οἱ πολλοί al. Likew. the neut. τὸ κρυπτόν Mt 6:4. τὸ ἅγιον 7:6. τὸ μέσον Mk 3:3. τὸ θνητόν 2 Cor 5:4. τὰ ἀδύνατα Lk 18:27. τὸ ἔλαττον Hb 7:7. Also w. gen. foll. τὰ ἀγαθά σου Lk 16:25. τὸ μωρόν, τὸ ἀσθενὲς τοῦ θεοῦ 1 Cor 1:25; cp. vs. 27f. τὸ γνωστὸν τοῦ θεοῦ Ro 1:19. τὰ ἀόρατα τοῦ θεοῦ vs. 20. τὸ ἀδύνατον τοῦ νόμου 8:3. τὰ κρυπτὰ τῆς αἰσχύνης 2 Cor 4:2.
    β. Adj. attributes whose noun is customarily omitted come to have substantive force and therefore receive the art. (B-D-F §241; Rob. 652–54) ἡ περίχωρος Mt 3:5; ἡ ξηρά 23:15 (i.e. γῆ). ἡ ἀριστερά, ἡ δεξιά (sc. χείρ) 6:3. ἡ ἐπιοῦσα (sc. ἡμέρα) Ac 16:11. ἡ ἔρημος (sc. χώρα) Mt 11:7.
    γ. The neut. of the adj. w. the art. can take on the mng. of an abstract noun (Thu. 1, 36, 1 τὸ δεδιός=fear; Herodian 1, 6, 9; 1, 11, 5 τὸ σεμνὸν τῆς παρθένου; M. Ant. 1, 1; Just., D. 27, 2 διὰ τὸ σκληροκάρδιον ὑμῶν καὶ ἀχάριστον εἰς αὐτόν) τὸ χρηστὸν τοῦ θεοῦ God’s kindness Ro 2:4. τὸ δυνατόν power 9:22. τὸ σύμφορον benefit 1 Cor 7:35. τὸ γνήσιον genuineness 2 Cor 8:8. τὸ ἐπιεικές Phil 4:5 al.
    δ. The art. w. numerals indicates, as in Il. 5, 271f; X. et al. (HKallenberg, RhM 69, 1914, 662ff), that a part of a number already known is being mentioned (Diod S 18, 10, 2 τρεῖς μὲν φυλὰς … τὰς δὲ ἑπτά=‘but the seven others’; Plut., Cleom. 804 [8, 4] οἱ τέσσαρες=‘the other four’; Polyaenus 6, 5 οἱ τρεῖς=‘the remaining three’; Diog. L. 1, 82 Βίας προκεκριμένος τῶν ἑπτά=Bias was preferred before the others of the seven [wise men]. B-D-F §265): οἱ ἐννέα the other nine Lk 17:17. Cp. 15:4; Mt 18:12f. οἱ δέκα the other ten (disciples) 20:24; Mk 10:41; lepers Lk 17:17. οἱ πέντε … ὁ εἷς … ὁ ἄλλος five of them … one … the last one Rv 17:10.
    ⓒ The ptc. w. the art. receives
    α. the mng. of a subst. ὁ πειράζων the tempter Mt 4:3; 1 Th 3:5. ὁ βαπτίζων Mk 6:14. ὁ σπείρων Mt 13:3; Lk 8:5. ὁ ὀλεθρεύων Hb 11:28. τὸ ὀφειλόμενον Mt 18:30, 34. τὸ αὐλούμενον 1 Cor 14:7. τὸ λαλούμενον vs. 9 (Just., D. 32, 3 τὸ ζητούμενον). τὰ γινόμενα Lk 9:7. τὰ ἐρχόμενα J 16:13. τὰ ἐξουθενημένα 1 Cor 1:28. τὰ ὑπάρχοντα (s. ὑπάρχω 1). In Engl. usage many of these neuters are transl. by a relative clause, as in β below. B-D-F §413; Rob. 1108f.
    β. the mng. of a relative clause (Ar. 4, 2 al. οἱ νομίζοντες) ὁ δεχόμενος ὑμᾶς whoever receives you Mt 10:40. τῷ τύπτοντί σε Lk 6:29. ὁ ἐμὲ μισῶν J 15:23. οὐδὲ γὰρ ὄνομά ἐστιν ἕτερον τὸ δεδομένον (ὸ̔ δέδοται) Ac 4:12. τινές εἰσιν οἱ ταράσσοντες ὑμᾶς Gal 1:7. Cp. Lk 7:32; 18:9; J 12:12; Col 2:8; 1 Pt 1:7; 2J 7; Jd 4 al. So esp. after πᾶς: πᾶς ὁ ὀργιζόμενος everyone who becomes angry Mt 5:22. πᾶς ὁ κρίνων Ro 2:1 al. After μακάριος Mt 5:4, 6, 10. After οὐαὶ ὑμῖν Lk 6:25.
    ⓓ The inf. w. neut. art. (B-D-F §398ff; Rob. 1062–68) is used in a number of ways.
    α. It stands for a noun (B-D-F §399; Rob. 1062–66) τὸ (ἀνίπτοις χερσὶν) φαγεῖν Mt 15:20. τὸ (ἐκ νεκρῶν) ἀναστῆναι Mk 9:10. τὸ ἀγαπᾶν 12:33; cp. Ro 13:8. τὸ ποιῆσαι, τὸ ἐπιτελέσαι 2 Cor 8:11. τὸ καθίσαι Mt 20:23. τὸ θέλειν Ro 7:18; 2 Cor 8:10.—Freq. used w. preps. ἀντὶ τοῦ, διὰ τό, διὰ τοῦ, ἐκ τοῦ, ἐν τῷ, ἕνεκεν τοῦ, ἕως τοῦ, μετὰ τό, πρὸ τοῦ, πρὸς τό etc.; s. the preps. in question (B-D-F §402–4; Rob. 1068–75).
    β. The gen. of the inf. w. the art., without a prep., is esp. frequent (B-D-F §400; Mlt. 216–18; Rob. 1066–68; DEvans, ClQ 15, 1921, 26ff). The use of this inf. is esp. common in Lk and Paul, less freq. in Mt and Mk, quite rare in other writers. The gen. stands
    א. dependent on words that govern the gen.: ἄξιον 1 Cor 16:4 (s. ἄξιος 1c). ἐξαπορηθῆναι τοῦ ζῆν 2 Cor 1:8. ἔλαχε τοῦ θυμιᾶσαι Lk 1:9 (cp. 1 Km 14:47 v.l. Σαοὺλ ἔλαχεν τοῦ βασιλεύειν).
    ב. dependent on a noun (B-D-F §400, 1; Rob. 1066f) ὁ χρόνος τοῦ τεκεῖν Lk 1:57. ἐπλήσθησαν αἱ ἡμέραι τοῦ τεκεῖν αὐτήν 2:6. ἐξουσία τοῦ πατεῖν 10:19. εὐκαιρία τοῦ παραδοῦναι 22:6. ἐλπὶς τοῦ σῴζεσθαι Ac 27:20; τοῦ μετέχειν 1 Cor 9:10. ἐπιποθία τοῦ ἐλθεῖν Ro 15:23. χρείαν ἔχειν τοῦ διδάσκειν Hb 5:12. καιρὸς τοῦ ἄρξασθαι 1 Pt 4:17. τ. ἐνέργειαν τοῦ δύνασθαι the power that enables him Phil 3:21. ἡ προθυμία τοῦ θέλειν zeal in desiring 2 Cor 8:11.
    ג. Somet. the connection w. the noun is very loose, and the transition to the consecutive sense (=result) is unmistakable (B-D-F §400, 2; Rob. 1066f): ἐπλήσθησαν ἡμέραι ὀκτὼ τοῦ περιτεμεῖν αὐτόν Lk 2:21. ὀφειλέται … τοῦ κατὰ σάρκα ζῆν Ro 8:12. εἰς ἀκαθαρσίαν τοῦ ἀτιμάζεσθαι 1:24. ὀφθαλμοὺς τοῦ μὴ βλέπειν 11:8. τὴν ἔκβασιν τοῦ δύνασθαι ὑπενεγκεῖν 1 Cor 10:13.
    ד. Verbs of hindering, ceasing take the inf. w. τοῦ μή (s. Schwyzer II 372 for earlier Gk; PGen 16, 23 [207 A.D.] κωλύοντες τοῦ μὴ σπείρειν; LXX; ParJer 2:5 φύλαξαι τοῦ μὴ σχίσαι τὰ ἱμάτιά σου): καταπαύειν Ac 14:18. κατέχειν Lk 4:42. κρατεῖσθαι 24:16. κωλύειν Ac 10:47. παύειν 1 Pt 3:10 (Ps 33:14). ὑποστέλλεσθαι Ac 20:20, 27. Without μή: ἐγκόπτεσθαι τοῦ ἐλθεῖν Ro 15:22.
    ה. The gen. of the inf. comes after verbs of deciding, exhorting, commanding, etc. (1 Ch 19:19; ParJer 7:37 διδάσκων αὐτοὺ τοῦ ἀπέχεσθαι) ἐγένετο γνώμης Ac 20:3. ἐντέλλεσθαι Lk 4:10 (Ps 90:11). ἐπιστέλλειν Ac 15:20. κατανεύειν Lk 5:7. κρίνειν Ac 27:1. παρακαλεῖν 21:12. προσεύχεσθαι Js 5:17. τὸ πρόσωπον στηρίζειν Lk 9:51. συντίθεσθαι Ac 23:20.
    ו. The inf. w. τοῦ and τοῦ μή plainly has final (=purpose) sense (ParJer 5:2 ἐκάθισεν … τοῦ ἀναπαῆναι ὀλίγον; Soph., Lex. I 45f; B-D-F §400, 5 w. exx. fr. non-bibl. lit. and pap; Rob. 1067): ἐξῆλθεν ὁ σπείρων τοῦ σπείρειν a sower went out to sow Mt 13:3. ζητεῖν τοῦ ἀπολέσαι = ἵνα ἀπολέσῃ 2:13. τοῦ δοῦναι γνῶσιν Lk 1:77. τοῦ κατευθῦναι τοὺς πόδας vs. 79. τοῦ σινιάσαι 22:31. τοῦ μηκέτι δουλεύειν Ro 6:6. τοῦ ποιῆσαι αὐτά Gal 3:10. τοῦ γνῶναι αὐτόν Phil 3:10. Cp. Mt 3:13; 11:1; 24:45; Lk 2:24, 27; 8:5; 24:29; Ac 3:2; 20:30; 26:18; Hb 10:7 (Ps 39:9); 11:5; GJs 2:3f; 24:1.—The apparently solecistic τοῦ πολεμῆσαι Ro 12:7 bears a Semitic tinge, cp. Hos 9:13 et al. (Mussies 96).—The combination can also express
    ז. consecutive mng. (result): οὐδὲ μετεμελήθητε τοῦ πιστεῦσαι αὐτῷ you did not change your minds and believe him Mt 21:32. τοῦ μὴ εἶναι αὐτὴν μοιχαλίδα Ro 7:3. τοῦ ποιεῖν τὰ βρέφη ἔκθετα Ac 7:19. Cp. 3:12; 10:25.
    ⓔ The art. is used w. prepositional expressions (Artem. 4, 33 p. 224, 7 ὁ ἐν Περγάμῳ; 4, 36 ὁ ἐν Μαγνησίᾳ; 4 [6] Esdr [POxy 1010 recto, 8–12] οἱ ἐν τοῖς πεδίοις … οἱ ἐν τοῖς ὄρεσι καὶ μετεώροις; Tat. 31, 2 οἱ μὲν περὶ Κράτητα … οἱ δὲ περὶ Ἐρατοσθένη) τῆς ἐκκλησίας τῆς ἐν Κεγχρεαῖς Ro 16:1. ταῖς ἐκκλησίαις ταῖς ἐν τῇ Ἀσίᾳ Rv 1:4. τῷ ἀγγέλῳ τῆς ἐν (w. place name) ἐκκλησίας 2:1, 8, 12, 18; 3:1, 7, 14 (on these pass. RBorger, TRu 52, ’87, 42–45). τοῖς ἐν τῇ οἰκίᾳ to those in the house Mt 5:15. πάτερ ἡμῶν ὁ ἐν τ. οὐρανοῖς 6:9. οἱ ἀπὸ τῆς Ἰταλίας Hb 13:24. οἱ ἐν Χριστῷ Ἰησοῦ Ro 8:1. οἱ ἐξ ἐριθείας 2:8. οἱ ἐκ νόμου 4:14; cp. vs. 16. οἱ ἐκ τῆς Καίσαρος οἰκίας Phil 4:22. οἱ ἐξ εὐωνύμων Mt 25:41. τὸ θυσιαστήριον … τὸ ἐνώπιον τοῦ θρόνου Rv 8:3; cp. 9:13. On 1:4 s. ref in B-D-F §136, 1 to restoration by Nestle. οἱ παρʼ αὐτοῦ Mk 3:21. οἱ μετʼ αὐτοῦ Mt 12:3. οἱ περὶ αὐτόν Mk 4:10; Lk 22:49 al.—Neut. τὰ ἀπὸ τοῦ πλοίου pieces of wreckage fr. the ship Ac 27:44 (difft. FZorell, BZ 9, 1911, 159f). τὰ περί τινος Lk 24:19, 27; Ac 24:10; Phil 1:27 (Tat. 32, 2 τὰ περὶ θεοῦ). τὰ περί τινα 2:23. τὰ κατʼ ἐμέ my circumstances Eph 6:21; Phil 1:12; Col 4:7. τὰ κατὰ τὸν νόμον what (was to be done) according to the law Lk 2:39. τὸ ἐξ ὑμῶν Ro 12:18. τὰ πρὸς τὸν θεόν 15:17; Hb 2:17; 5:1 (X., Resp. Lac. 13, 11 ἱερεῖ τὰ πρὸς τοὺς θεούς, στρατηγῷ δὲ τὰ πρὸς τοὺς ἀνθρώπους). τὰ παρʼ αὐτῶν Lk 10:7. τὸ ἐν ἐμοί the (child) in me GJs 12:2 al.
    ⓕ w. an adv. or adverbial expr. (1 Macc 8:3) τὸ ἔμπροσθεν Lk 19:4. τὸ ἔξωθεν Mt 23:25. τὸ πέραν Mt 8:18, 28. τὰ ἄνω J 8:23; Col 3:1f. τὰ κάτω J 8:23. τὰ ὀπίσω Mk 13:16. τὰ ὧδε matters here Col 4:9. ὁ πλησίον the neighbor Mt 5:43. οἱ καθεξῆς Ac 3:24. τὸ κατὰ σάρκα Ro 9:5. τὸ ἐκ μέρους 1 Cor 13:10.—Esp. w. indications of time τό, τὰ νῦν s. νῦν 2b. τὸ πάλιν 2 Cor 13:2. τὸ λοιπόν 1 Cor 7:29; Phil 3:1. τὸ πρῶτον J 10:40; 12:16; 19:39. τὸ πρότερον 6:62; Gal 4:13. τὸ καθʼ ἡμέραν daily Lk 11:3.—τὸ πλεῖστον at the most 1 Cor 14:27.
    ⓖ The art. w. the gen. foll. denotes a relation of kinship, ownership, or dependence: Ἰάκωβος ὁ τοῦ Ζεβεδαίου Mt 10:2 (Thu. 4, 104 Θουκυδίδης ὁ Ὀλόρου [sc. υἱός]; Plut., Timol. 3, 2; Appian, Syr. 26 §123 Σέλευκος ὁ Ἀντιόχου; Jos., Bell. 5, 5; 11). Μαρία ἡ Ἰακώβου Lk 24:10. ἡ τοῦ Οὐρίου the wife of Uriah Mt 1:6. οἱ Χλόης Chloë’s people 1 Cor 1:11. οἱ Ἀριστοβούλου, οἱ Ναρκίσσου Ro 16:10f. οἱ αὐτοῦ Ac 16:33. οἱ τοῦ Χριστοῦ 1 Cor 15:23; Gal 5:24. Καισάρεια ἡ Φιλίππου Caesarea Philippi i.e. the city of Philip Mk 8:27.—τό, τά τινος someone’s things, affairs, circumstances (Thu. 4, 83 τὰ τοῦ Ἀρριβαίου; Parthenius 1, 6; Appian, Syr. 16 §67 τὰ Ῥωμαίων) τὰ τοῦ θεοῦ, τῶν ἀνθρώπων Mt 16:23; 22:21; Mk 8:33; cp. 1 Cor 2:11. τὰ τῆς σαρκός, τοῦ πνεύματος Ro 8:5; cp. 14:19; 1 Cor 7:33f; 13:11. τὰ ὑμῶν 2 Cor 12:14. τὰ τῆς ἀσθενείας μου 11:30. τὰ τοῦ νόμου what the law requires Ro 2:14. τὸ τῆς συκῆς what has been done to the fig tree Mt 21:21; cp. 8:33. τὰ ἑαυτῆς its own advantage 1 Cor 13:5; cp. Phil 2:4, 21. τὸ τῆς παροιμίας what the proverb says 2 Pt 2:22 (Pla., Theaet. 183e τὸ τοῦ Ὁμήρου; Menand., Dyscolus 633 τὸ τοῦ λόγου). ἐν τοῖς τοῦ πατρός μου in my Father’s house (so Field, Notes 50–56; Goodsp. Probs. 81–83; difft., ‘interests’, PTemple, CBQ 1, ’39, 342–52.—In contrast to the other synoptists, Luke does not elsewhere show Jesus ‘at home’.) Lk 2:49 (Lysias 12, 12 εἰς τὰ τοῦ ἀδελφοῦ; Theocr. 2, 76 τὰ Λύκωνος; pap in Mayser II [1926] p. 8; POxy 523, 3 [II A.D.] an invitation to a dinner ἐν τοῖς Κλαυδίου Σαραπίωνος; PTebt 316 II, 23 [99 A.D.] ἐν τοῖς Ποτάμωνος; Esth 7:9; Job 18:19; Jos., Ant. 16, 302. Of the temple of a god Jos., C. Ap. 1, 118 ἐν τοῖς τοῦ Διός). Mt 20:15 is classified here by WHatch, ATR 26, ’44, 250–53; s. also ἐμός b.
    ⓗ The neut. of the art. stands
    α. before whole sentences or clauses (Epict. 4, 1, 45 τὸ Καίσαρος μὴ εἶναι φίλον; Prov. Aesopi 100 P. τὸ Οὐκ οἶδα; Jos., Ant. 10, 205; Just., D. 33, 2 τὸ γὰρ … [Ps 109:4]) τὸ Οὐ φονεύσεις, οὐ μοιχεύσεις κτλ. (quot. fr. the Decalogue) Mt 19:18; Ro 13:9. τὸ Καὶ μετὰ ἀνόμων ἐλογίσθη (quot. fr. Is 53:12) Lk 22:37. Cp. Gal 5:14. τὸ Εἰ δύνῃ as far as your words ‘If you can’ are concerned Mk 9:23. Likew. before indirect questions (Vett. Val. 291, 14 τὸ πῶς τέτακται; Ael. Aristid. 45, 15 K. τὸ ὅστις ἐστίν; ParJer 6:15 τὸ πῶς ἀποστείλης; GrBar 8:6 τὸ πῶς ἐταπεινώθη; Jos., Ant. 20, 28 ἐπὶ πείρᾳ τοῦ τί φρονοῖεν; Pel.-Leg. p. 20, 32 τὸ τί γένηται; Mel., Fgm. 8, 2 [Goodsp. p. 311] τὸ δὲ πῶς λούονται) τὸ τί ἂν θέλοι καλεῖσθαι αὐτό Lk 1:62. τὸ τίς ἂν εἴη μείζων αὐτῶν 9:46. τὸ πῶς δεῖ ὑμᾶς περιπατεῖν 1 Th 4:1. Cp. Lk 19:48; 22:2, 4, 23f; Ac 4:21; 22:30; Ro 8:26; Hs 8, 1, 4.
    β. before single words which are taken fr. what precedes and hence are quoted, as it were (Epict. 1, 29, 16 τὸ Σωκράτης; 3, 23, 24; Hierocles 13 p. 448 ἐν τῷ μηδείς) τὸ ‘ἀνέβη’ Eph 4:9. τὸ ‘ἔτι ἅπαξ’ Hb 12:27. τὸ ‘Ἁγάρ’ Gal 4:25.
    ⓘ Other notable uses of the art. are
    α. the elliptic use, which leaves a part of a sentence accompanied by the art. to be completed fr. the context: ὁ τὰ δύο the man with the two (talents), i.e. ὁ τὰ δύο τάλαντα λαβών Mt 25:17; cp. vs. 22. τῷ τὸν φόρον Ro 13:7. ὁ τὸ πολύ, ὀλίγον the man who had much, little 2 Cor 8:15 after Ex 16:18 (cp. Lucian, Bis Accus. 9 ὁ τὴν σύριγγα [sc. ἔχων]; Arrian, Anab. 7, 8, 3 τὴν ἐπὶ θανάτῳ [sc. ὁδόν]).
    β. Σαῦλος, ὁ καὶ Παῦλος Ac 13:9; s. καί 2h.
    γ. the fem. art. is found in a quite singular usage ἡ οὐαί (ἡ θλῖψις or ἡ πληγή) Rv 9:12; 11:14. Sim. ὁ Ἀμήν 3:14 (here the masc. art. is evidently chosen because of the alternate name for Jesus).
    ⓙ One art. can refer to several nouns connected by καί
    α. when various words, sing. or pl., are brought close together by a common art.: τοὺς ἀρχιερεῖς καὶ γραμματεῖς Mt 2:4; cp. 16:21; Mk 15:1. ἐν τοῖς προφήταις κ. ψαλμοῖς Lk 24:44. τῇ Ἰουδαίᾳ καὶ Σαμαρείᾳ Ac 1:8; cp. 8:1; Lk 5:17 al.—Even nouns of different gender can be united in this way (Aristoph., Eccl. 750; Ps.-Pla., Axioch. 12 p. 37a οἱ δύο θεοί, of Apollo and Artemis; Ps.-Demetr., Eloc. c. 292; PTebt 14, 10 [114 B.C.]; En 18:14; EpArist 109) κατὰ τὰ ἐντάλματα καὶ διδασκαλίας Col 2:22. Cp. Lk 1:6. εἰς τὰς ὁδοὺς καὶ φραγμούς 14:23.
    β. when one and the same person has more than one attribute applied to him: πρὸς τὸν πατέρα μου καὶ πατέρα ὑμῶν J 20:17. ὁ θεὸς καὶ πατὴρ τοῦ κυρίου Ἰ. Ro 15:6; 2 Cor 1:3; 11:31; Eph 1:3; 1 Pt 1:3. ὁ θεὸς καὶ πατὴρ (ἡμῶν) Eph 5:20; Phil 4:20; 1 Th 1:3; 3:11, 13. Of Christ: τοῦ κυρίου ἡμῶν καὶ σωτῆρος 2 Pt 1:11; cp. 2:20; 3:18. τοῦ μεγάλου θεοῦ καὶ σωτῆρος ἡμῶν Tit 2:13 (PGrenf II, 15 I, 6 [139 B.C.] of the deified King Ptolemy τοῦ μεγάλου θεοῦ εὐεργέτου καὶ σωτῆρος [ἐπιφανοῦς] εὐχαρίστου).
    γ. On the other hand, the art. is repeated when two different persons are named: ὁ φυτεύων καὶ ὁ ποτίζων 1 Cor 3:8. ὁ βασιλεὺς καὶ ὁ ἡγεμών Ac 26:30.
    ⓚ In a fixed expression, when a noun in the gen. is dependent on another noun, the art. customarily appears twice or not at all: τὸ πνεῦμα τοῦ θεοῦ 1 Cor 3:16; πνεῦμα θεοῦ Ro 8:9. ὁ λόγος τοῦ θεοῦ 2 Cor 2:17; λόγος θεοῦ 1 Th 2:13. ἡ ἡμέρα τοῦ κυρίου 2 Th 2:2; ἡμ. κ. 1 Th 5:2. ὁ υἱὸς τοῦ ἀνθρώπου Mt 8:20; υἱ. ἀ. Hb 2:6. ἡ ἀνάστασις τῶν νεκρῶν Mt 22:31; ἀ. ν. Ac 23:6. ἡ κοιλία τῆς μητρός J 3:4; κ. μ. Mt 19:12.—APerry, JBL 68, ’49, 329–34; MBlack, An Aramaic Approach3, ’67, 93–95.—DELG. M-M.

    Ελληνικά-Αγγλικά παλαιοχριστιανική Λογοτεχνία > ὁ

  • 14 δύναμαι

    δύναμαι (Hom.+) dep.; pres. 2 sg. δύνῃ and δύνασαι; impf. ἠδυνάμην (also TestJob; TestZeb 2:5; ParJer; Ath. 8, 1; Just. [after οὐκ]) and ἐδυνάμην (also Just.); fut. δυνήσομαι; pass. 1 aor. ἠδυνήθην (LXX; En 21:7; TestJud 9:4; GrBar 7:4; Jos., Ant. 12, 278; Ar. 10, 6 and 8), ἐδυνήθητε (Just., D. 16, 4), ἐδυνήθησαν (2 Macc 2:6), ἠδυνάσθην (LXX; En 14:19) and ἐδυνάσθην (Da 2:47 LXX.—B-D-F §66, 3; 79; 93; 101; Mlt-H. 188; 206; 234); pf. δεδύνημαι (Just.) to possess capability (whether because of personal or external factors) for experiencing or doing someth., can, am able, be capable.
    ⓐ w. inf. foll.
    α. pres. inf. (Poyaenus 8, 10, 3 φέρειν δύν.) οὐδεὶς δύναται δυσὶ κυρίοις δουλεύειν Mt 6:24; Lk 16:13.—Mt 9:15; 19:12; Mk 2:7, 19 al. καθὼς ἠδύναντο ἀκούειν Mk 4:33 (w. ref. to level of understanding; cp. Epict. 2, 24, 11). Expressed with strong emotion in rejection of what is heard τίς δύναται αὐτοῦ ἀκούειν Who can listen to such talk! (REB) J 6:60. οὐ δ. ἀναστὰς δοῦναί σοι I’m in no position to get up and grant your request Lk 11:7. οὐ δυνάμεθα … μὴ λαλεῖν we cannot remain silent τὶ about someth. Ac 4:20. In questions πῶς δύνασθε ἀγαθὰ λαλεῖν; how can you say good things? Mt 12:34. πῶς δύναται σατανᾶς σατανᾶν ἐκβάλλειν; how can Satan drive out Satan? Mk 3:23; cp. J 6:52; Lk 6:42.
    β. aor. inf. (IAndrosIsis, Kyme 4; Just. A I, 2, 4 ἀποκτείναι μὲν δύνασθε, βλάψαι δʼ οὔ; Ath. 15, 1 διακρῖναι οὐ δυνάμενοι) δύνασθαι … εἰσελθεῖν Mk 1:45.—2:4; 5:3; Lk 8:19; 13:11; 14:20 and oft. The impf. ἐδύνατο τοῦτο πραθῆναι this could have been sold Mt 26:9 (B-D-F §358, 1; cp. Wsd 11:19f).
    γ. likew. the impf. w. pf. inf. ἀπολελύσθαι ἐδύνατο he could have been set free Ac 26:32.
    ⓑ abs., whereby the inf. can easily be supplied (cp. Eur., Or. 889; Thu. 4, 105, 1; X., An. 4, 5, 11 al.; Sir 43:30; Bar 1:6; 1 Macc 6:3; 9:9, 60; 4 Macc 14:17b; ParJer 4:6 cod. C ἠδυνήθητε ἐπʼ αὐτῇ [s. ἰσχύω]; Just., A II, 15, 2 ἵνα εἰ δύναιντο μεταθῶνται ‘in the hope that they might possibly be converted’) Mt 16:3 (sc. διακρίνειν); 20:22b; Mk 10:39 (sc. πιεῖν); 6:19 (sc. ἀποκτεῖναι); cp. Lk 9:40; 16:26; 19:3; Ac 27:39; Ro 8:7. καίπερ δυνάμενος although he was able to do so 1 Cl 16:2. οὔπω γὰρ ἐδύνασθε (sc. χρῆσθαι τῷ βρώματι) you were not yet strong enough (=‘you were not yet up to it’) 1 Cor 3:2. ὑπὲρ ὸ̔ δύνασθε (sc. ἐνεγκεῖν) beyond your capability 10:13.
    ⓒ w. acc. foll., w. ποιεῖν to be supplied be capable of, have capacity for someth. (Maximus Tyr. 1, 2h τοῦτο δύναται λόγος; PRyl 77, 38 οὐ γὰρ δύναμαι κοσμητείαν; POxy 115, 10; 472 II, 22; Ath. 26, 3 τὶ δὲ χαλκὸς δύναται καθʼ αὐτόν; Just., A I, 12, 6 πράττετε ὸ̔ δύνασθε; 19, 5 μηδὲν ἄλλο δύνασθαι μηδὲ τὸν θεόν) οὐ δυνάμεθά τι κατὰ τ. ἀληθείας we can do nothing against the truth 2 Cor 13:8 (cp. PsSol 17:39 τίς δύναται πρὸς αὐτόν; ‘who is effectual against [the Lord]?’) οὐδὲ ἐλάχιστον δ. not capable of even the smallest thing Lk 12:26. εἴ τι δύνῃ if you can do anything (Vi. Aesopi I, 21 p. 279, 11 Eberh.: Αἴσωπε, εἴ τι δύνασαι, λέγε τῇ πόλει) Mk 9:22 (also perh.: if you possibly can, as X., Hell., 7, 5, 15; Heliod. 1, 19, 2; Ael. Aristid. 48, 1 K.=24 p. 465 D.); πλείονα δ. accomplish more IPhld 1:1 (Ammonius, Vi. Aristot. p. 11, 15 πολλὰ δ.; Just., A I, 45, 6 οὐ πλέον τι δύνασθε … τοῦ φονεύειν). Of God ὁ πάντα δυνάμενος the one who has all power (Lucian, Nav. 28 δύνανται πάντα οἱ θεοί; Iambl., Vi. Pyth. 28, 148; Philo, Abr. 268) Hm 12, 6, 3; cp. v 4, 2, 6.—DELG. M-M. TW.

    Ελληνικά-Αγγλικά παλαιοχριστιανική Λογοτεχνία > δύναμαι

  • 15 καιρός

    καιρός, οῦ, ὁ (Hes.+; loanw. in rabb.)
    ① a point of time or period of time, time, period, freq. with implication of being esp. fit for someth. and without emphasis on precise chronology
    ⓐ gener. (cp. Just., D. 32, 4 τὸν γὰρ καιρὸν [Da 7:26] ἑκατὸν ἔτη ἐξηγεῖσθε λέγεσθαι) κ. δεκτός a welcome time 2 Cor 6:2a (Is 49:8); cp. vs. 2b. καιροὶ χαλεποί difficult times 2 Ti 3:1. In ref. to times of crisis for the state λοιμικοῦ καιροῦ 1 Cl 55:1 (s. JFischer ad loc. note 322) καιροὶ καρποφόροι fruitful times or seasons (so Achmes 156, 15f: καρποφόρος is the καιρός in which the tree bears fruit, in contrast to late autumn, when there is no more) Ac 14:17 (OLagercrantz, ZNW 31, ’32, 86f proposes, on the basis of Mod. Gk., the mng., ‘weather’, but the pl. is against this mng.). καιροὶ ἐαρινοί 1 Cl 20:9.—ἔσται καιρὸς ὅτε there will come a time when 2 Ti 4:3; εἰς τίνα ἢ ποῖον κ. to what time or what sort of time (some, e.g. NRSV, interpret τίνα=the person, but cp. PTebt 25, 18 [117 B.C.] καὶ διὰ τίνος καὶ ἀπὸ ποίου ἐπιδείγματος; s. ποῖος 1aα, also ποτατός) 1 Pt 1:11. ἄχρι καιροῦ until (another) time, for a while Lk 4:13; Ac 13:11; ἐν καιρῷ ὀλίγῳ in a little time 1 Cl 23:4; ἐν παντὶ κ. at all times, always (Aristot. 117a, 35; Sir 26:4) Lk 21:36; Eph 6:18; Hm 5, 2, 3. κατὰ καιρόν from time to time, regularly (TestJob 36:4; Lucian, Hermot. 10; Plut., Mor. 984d) J 5:4 (s. 2 also); 1 Cl 24:2; GJs 3:3; πρὸς κ. for a limited time (perh. also for the present moment; cp. Strabo 6, 2, 3; Ps.-Plut., Fluv. 23; BGU 265, 20 [II A.D.]; 618, 19; 780, 14; Wsd 4:4; Philo, Post. Cai. 121; Jos., Bell. 6, 190; Tat. 13, 1) Lk 8:13; 1 Cor 7:5. πρὸς καιρὸν ὥρας (a combination of πρὸς κ. and πρὸς ὥραν [2 Cor 7:8; Gal 2:5; Phlm 15; J 5:35]) for a short time (cp. our ‘for a short space of time’) 1 Th 2:17.
    ⓑ a moment or period as especially appropriate the right, proper, favorable time ἐν καιρῷ at the right time (X., An. 3, 1, 39; Diod S 36, 7, 2; Appian, Bell. Civ. 3, 8 §29; SIG 1268 [Praecepta Delphica II, 6; III B.C.]) Mt 24:45; Lk 12:42 (cp. on both Ps 103:27, w. v.l.). καιρῷ (Thu. 4, 59, 3 v.l.; Diog. L. 1, 41) Lk 20:10 (v.l. ἐν κ.). τῷ καιρῷ Mk 12:2. ὁ καιρὸς ὁ ἐμός, ὁ καιρὸς ὁ ὑμέτερος the proper time for me (you) J 7:6, 8 (Eunap., Vi. Iambl. p. 459 Didot: the worker of miracles acts ὅταν καιρὸς ᾖ). νῦν κ. ταῦτα ὑμᾶς μαθεῖν οὐκ ἔστιν now is not the time for you to learn this AcPl Ha 1, 26 (Just., D. 8, 1 ἃ νῦν κ. οὐκ ἔστι λέγειν al.).—καιρὸν λαβεῖν find a favorable time, seize the opportunity (Lysias, C. Agor. 6; Cleanthes [III B.C.]: Stoic. I no. 573; Diod S 2, 6, 5; EpArist 248; Jos., Bell. 1, 527, Ant. 4, 10; cp. PTebt 332, 9). καιρὸν μεταλαβεῖν (s. μεταλαμβάνω 2) Ac 24:25. λαβεῖν κ. εὔθετον find a convenient opportunity Pol 13:1. κ. ἔχειν have opportunity (Thu. 1, 42, 3; Pla., Ep. 7, 324b; Plut., Lucull. 501 [16, 4]; PFlor 259, 3; 1 Macc 15:34; Jos., Ant. 16, 73; 335; Ath., R. 23 p. 77, 6; Did., Gen. 112, 10) Gal 6:10; Hb 11:15; 2 Cl 16:1; ISm 9:1; IRo 2:1. ὀλίγον καιρὸν ἔχειν Rv 12:12. ἐξαγοράζεσθαι τὸν κ. make the most of the opportunity Col 4:5; Eph 5:16 (s. ἐξαγοράζω 2). On Ro 12:11 v.l. s. δουλεύω 2aβ and b. κατὰ κ. Ro 5:6 is more naturally construed with ἀπέθανεν than with ἀσεβῶν (cp. κατὰ καιρὸν θεριζόμενος reaped in its proper time Job 5:26).—The concept of the appropriate time oft. blends with that of
    ② a defined period for an event. definite, fixed time. Abs. καιροί festal seasons (Ex 23:14, 17; Lev 23:4.—So perh. also beside θυσίαι in the Ins de Sinuri ed. LRobert ’45 no. 42) Gal 4:10 (κ. w. ἡμέρα as Polyaenus 8, 23, 17). τὰς τῶν καιρῶν ἀλλαγὰς καταδιαιρεῖν … ἃ μὲν εἰς ἑορτάς, ἃς δὲ εἰς πένθη to set up periods of fasting and mourning in accord with changes in seasons Dg 4:5.—Not infreq. w. a gen., which indicates the reason why the time is set apart (Pla., Leg. 4, 709c χειμῶνος καιρός; Aesop, Fab. 258 P.=255 H-H./206 Ch. ἀπολογίας κ., also oft. LXX; Philo, Spec. Leg. 1, 191 κ. εὐφροσύνης; Jos., Ant. 18, 74; Tat. 36, 1 κατʼ ἐκεῖνον αὐτὸν … τὸν τοῦ πολέμου κ.; Hippol., Ref. 9, 30, 27 κ. τῆς παρουσίας; Did., Gen. 175, 2 κ. τοῦ ἐξελθεῖν εἰς τὴν γῆν) κ. θερισμοῦ time of harvest Mt 13:30 (JosAs 2:19). κ. τῶν καρπῶν time when the fruit is ripe 21:34; cp. vs. 41. κ. σύκων time when the figs are ripe Mk 11:13 (ParJer 5:31; cp. Horapollo 2, 92 ὁ κ. τῶν ἀμπέλων). κ. μετανοίας time for repentance 2 Cl 8:2. κ. πειρασμοῦ Lk 8:13b. ὁ κ. τῆς ἀναλύσεως the time of death 2 Ti 4:6. κ. ἐπισκοπῆς σου Lk 19:44. κ. διορθώσεως Hb 9:10. κ. ἡλικίας 11:11. κ. τῆς ἡγεμονίας Ποντίου Πιλάτου the time of the procuratorship of P. P. IMg 11. κατὰ τὸν καιρὸν τοῦ μαρτυρίου at the time of martyrdom EpilMosq 2 (cp. Mel., HE 4, 26, 3 ᾧ Σάγαρις καιρῷ ἐμαρτύρησεν). ἐν τῷ ἑαυτοῦ καιρῷ (Num 9:7) 2 Th 2:6. ὁ κ. αὐτῶν the time set for the fulfillment of Gabriel’s words Lk 1:20; cp. Dg 11:5 (s. διαγγέλλω 2). ὁ κ. μου my time=the time of my death Mt 26:18. κ. τοῦ ἰαθῆναι time to be healed 2 Cl 9:7. κ. τοῦ ἄρξασθαι τὸ κρίμα 1 Pt 4:17; cp. the extraordinary ἦλθεν ὁ κ. τῶν νεκρῶν κριθῆναι καὶ δοῦναι = ἵνα κριθῶσιν οἱ νεκροὶ καὶ δῷς Rv 11:18.—Pl. (Num 9:3 κατὰ καιρούς; Tob 14:4 S πάντα συμβήσεται τοῖς καιροῖς αὐτῶν; Heraclit. Sto. 11 p. 18, 18=the periods of time between; Maximus Tyr. 1, 2f πολλοὶ κ.; TestNapht 7:1 δεῖ ταῦτα πληρωθῆναι κατὰ τοὺς καιροὺς αὐτῶν; Ar. 4, 2 κατὰ καιρούς) καιροὶ ἐθνῶν times of the Gentiles (in which they may inflict harm on God’s people or themselves be converted) Lk 21:24.—κατὰ καιρόν at the appropriate time (Arrian, Anab. 4, 5, 1; PSI 433, 4 [261 B.C.]; Just., A I, 19, 4; Mel., HE 4, 26, 3) J 5:4; 1 Cl 56:15 (Job 5:26). Also ἐν καιρῷ (Himerius, Or 13 [Ecl. 14], 3): ἐν καιρῷ αὐτοῦ B 11:6, 8 (Ps 1:3). καιρῷ ἰδίῳ in due time Gal 6:9. Pl. καιροῖς ἰδίοις at the right time 1 Ti 2:6; 6:15; Tit 1:3; cp. 1 Cl 20:4 (Just., D. 131, 4 πρὸ τῶν ἰδίων κ.).—κατὰ τὸν ἴδιον καιρόν vs. 10.—πεπλήρωται ὁ κ. the time (determined by God) is fulfilled Mk 1:15. Pl. (cp. Ps 103:19) ὁρίσας προστεταγμένους καιρούς he (God) has determined allotted times (MDibelius, SBHeidAk ’38/39, 2. Abh. p. 6f, ‘seasons’; cp. 1QM 10, 12–15; FMussner, Einige Parallelen [Qumran and Areopagus speech], BZ 1, ’57, 125–30) Ac 17:26; cp. κατὰ καιροὺς τεταγμένους 1 Cl 40:1; ὡρισμένοις καιροῖς καὶ ὥραις vs. 2; τοῖς προστεταγμένοις κ. vs. 4.
    ③ a period characterized by some aspect of special crisis, time
    ⓐ gener.: the present (time) Ro 13:11; 12:11 v.l. ὁ καιρός (i.e. the crisis involving Christians) ἀπαιτεῖ σε the times call upon you IPol 2:3 (Diod S 17, 27, 2 ὑπὸ τῶν καιρῶν προεκλήθησαν=they were called out by the [critical circumstances of the] times). Also ὁ νῦν κ. (PSI 402, 7 [III B.C.] ἐν τῷ νῦν καιρῷ) Ro 3:26; 8:18; 11:5; 2 Cor 8:14; B 4:1. κ. ὁ νῦν τῆς ἀνομίας the present godless time 18:2 (s. also b below). ὁ κ. ὁ ἐνεστηκώς (Polyb. 1, 60, 9; Jos., Ant. 16, 162) Hb 9:9; ἐν ἐκείνῳ τῷ κ. at that time, then (Gen 21:22; Is 38:1; τῷ κ. ἐκείνῳ TestSol D 8, 2) Mt 11:25; 12:1; 14:1; cp. Eph 2:12. Also κατʼ ἐκεῖνον τὸν κ. (Jos., Ant. 1, 171, Vi. 49; GJs 10:2.—Diod S 2, 27, 1 and Vi. Aesopi G 81 P. κατʼ ἐκείνους τοὺς καιρούς=at that time. Cp. κατʼ ἐκεῖνο καιροῦ Hippol., Ref. 9, 12, 10.) Ac 12:1; 19:23. ἔτι κατὰ καιρὸν ὑπὲρ ἀσεβῶν for those who at that time were still godless Ro 5:6, though κατὰ κ. here prob.=at the right time, as in mng. 1b above (s. B-D-F §255, 3). τῷ τότε τῆς ἀδικίας καιρῷ … τὸν νῦν τῆς δικαιοσύνης Dg 9:1; cp. 9:2. Of the future κατὰ τ. καιρὸν τοῦτον at this time Ro 9:9 (Gen 18:10, 14). Cp. EpilMosq 2 in 2 above. ἐν αὐτῷ τῷ κ. just at that time (2 Esdr 5:3) Lk 13:1. W. attraction of the relative ἐν ᾧ κ. at that time, then Ac 7:20. κατὰ τὸν καιρὸν ὸ̔ν καὶ πέρυσι at the same time as in the year preceding Hv 2, 1, 1.
    ⓑ One of the chief terms relating to the endtime: ὁ καιρός the time of crisis, the last times (FBusch, Z. Verständnis d. synopt. Eschatol. Mk 13 neu untersucht ’38; GDelling, D. Zeitverständn. des NTs ’40; WMichaelis, D. Herr verzieht nicht d. Verheissung ’42; WKümmel, Verheissung. u. Erfüllung ’45,3 ’56; OCullmann, Christus u. d. Zeit ’46 [tr. FFilson, Christ and Time ’50, 39–45; 79; 121]) ὁ κ. ἤγγικεν Lk 21:8. ὁ κ. ἐγγύς Rv 1:3; 22:10. οὐκ οἴδατε πότε ὁ καιρός ἐστιν Mk 13:33. Cp. Ro 13:11 (s. 3a above) if it is to be interpreted as eschatological (cp. Plut., Mor. 549f). πρὸ καιροῦ before the endtime and the judgment Mt 8:29; 1 Cor 4:5. ἐν καιρῷ 1 Pt 5:6. Also ἐν καιρῷ ἐσχάτῳ 1:5; D 16:2. Pl. πλήρωμα τῶν καιρῶν Eph 1:10. ἐπηρώτων … περὶ τῶν καιρῶν, εἰ ἤδη συντέλειά ἐστιν Hv 3, 8, 9. τὰ σημεῖα τ. καιρῶν the signs of the (Messianic) times Mt 16:3. τοὺς καιροὺς καταμάνθανε learn to understand the times IPol 3:2 (s. WBauer, Hdb. Suppl. vol. ad loc.) The Messianic times described as καιροὶ ἀναψύξεως Ac 3:20.—ἔσχατοι καιροί (or ὕστεροι καιροί 1 Ti 4:1) come before the ἔσχατος κ. IEph 11:1 (cp. ἐπʼ ἐσχάτων κ. AcPl Ha 8, 26 [restoration is certain=Ox 1601, 40/BMM recto 34]); χρόνοι ἢ καιροί times and seasons (cp. Iren. 1, 17, 2 [Harv. I 168, 9] and καιρῶν κατὰ χρόνους ἀλλαγή Theoph. Ant. 1, 6 [p. 70, 1]; Artem. 4, 2 p. 203, 25f the χρόνος is divided into καιροὶ καὶ ὧραι), which must be completed before the final consummation Ac 1:7 (Straton of Lamps. in FWehrli, Die Schule des Aristoteles, V Fgm. 10, 32f κατὰ τοὺς καιροὺς καὶ τοὺς χρόνους; quoted in JBarr, Biblical Words for Time, ’62, 33; see also Diog. L. 5, 64); cp. 1 Th 5:1. συντέμνειν τοὺς καιρούς shorten the (last) times B 4:3. Sim. in sg. ὁ καιρὸς συνεσταλμένος ἐστίν 1 Cor 7:29.—The expr. καιρὸν καὶ καιροὺς κ. ἥμισυ καιροῦ also belongs to the eschatol. vocab.; it means the apocalyptic time of 1 + 2 + ½ = 3½ years, during which acc. to Da 12:7 (cp. 7:25) a tyrranical enemy of God and God’s people is to reign on earth Rv 12:14 (in imagery of a serpentine monster, δράκων)—ὁ κ. οὗτος the present age (cp. αἰών 2a) Mk 10:30; Lk 12:56; 18:30. Also ὁ νῦν κ. B 4:1. As ruled by the devil: ὁ ἄνομος κ. 4:9. καταργεῖν τὸν κ. τοῦ ἀνόμου destroy the age of the lawless one 15:5. The soul seeks και[ρο]ῦ χρόνου αἰ̣ῶ̣νος ἀνάπαυσιν ἐ̣[ν] σιγῇ peace in silence, at the time of the aeon crisis GMary 463, 1.—On Dg 12:9 s. the editions of vGebh.-Harnack and Bihlmeyer.—JMánek, NTS 6, ’59, 45–51; JBarr, Biblical Words for Time, ’62.—B. 954. Schmidt, Syn. II 54–72. DELG. M-M. EDNT. TW. Sv.

    Ελληνικά-Αγγλικά παλαιοχριστιανική Λογοτεχνία > καιρός

  • 16 ὁρίζω

    ὁρίζω, [dialect] Ion. [pref] οὐρ- Hdt. (v. infr.): [tense] fut.
    A

    ὁριῶ Arist.Cat. 5b5

    , ([etym.] δι-) Isoc. 4.174 : [tense] aor.

    ὥρισα S.Ant. 452

    , Pl.Lg. 864e ; [dialect] Ion.

    οὔρισα Hdt.3.142

     : [tense] pf.

    ὥρικα D.26.24

    , Arist.Mete. 382a19 :—[voice] Med., [tense] fut.

    - ιοῦμαι Pl.Tht. 190e

    , Lg. 737d: [tense] aor.

    ὡρισάμην Id.Tht. 148a

    , Epicr.11.18, etc.:—[voice] Pass., [tense] fut.

    ὁρισθήσομαι Pl.Tht. 158d

    : [tense] aor.

    ὡρίσθην Id.Chrm. 171a

    : [tense] pf.

    ὥρισμαι Th.1.71

    , Pl.Smp. 182a, etc.; but in med. sense, E.Hec. 801, D.31.5 : ([etym.] ὅρος):— divide or separate from, as a border or boundary, c.acc. et dat.,

    ὁ Νεῖλος ὁ τὴν Ἀσίην οὐρίζων τῇ Λιβύῃ Hdt.2.16

     : c. acc. et gen., S.Ph. 636 :—[voice] Pass.,

    θύρᾳ βαλανωτῇ ὡρισμένην ἀπὸ τῆς ἀνδρωνίτιδος X.Oec. 9.5

     ; or
    b with two accs. joined by καί, separate,

    [λίμνη] οὐρίζει τήν τε Σκυθικὴν καὶ τὴν Νευρίδα γῆν Hdt.4.51

    , cf. 56,7.123, Arist.HA 501b16, OGI335.112 (Pergam., ii B. C.), Lyc.1289, etc.;

    ἐὰν.. κύκλος.. ὁρίζῃ τό τε ἀφανὲς καὶ τὸ φανερὸν ἡμισφαίριον Autol.Sph.4

     : hence

    ὁρίζων κύκλος Id.1.1

     ; v. ὁρίζων.
    2 bound,

    τὴν ἀρχὴν ὥριζεν αὐτῷ ἡ Ἐρυθρὰ θάλαττα X.Cyr.8.6.21

     ;

    τὰ δὲ πρὸς Τριβαλλοὺς.. Τρῆρες ὥριζον Th.2.96

     ; of a line (or surface) as limiting a surface (or solid), Arist. Metaph. 1017b17:—[voice] Pass.,

    Εὔβοια.. ὅροις ὑγροῖσιν ὡρισμένη E. Ion 295

     : metaph., ὡρίσθω μέχρι τοῦδε so far let it go and no further, Th.1.71.
    3 pass between or through,

    διδύμους πέτρας E.Med. 433

     (lyr.).
    4 part, divide,

    χειμὼν ἄλλοσ' ἄλλον ὥρισεν Id.Hel. 128

     ; ὁ. τινὰ ἀπὸ.. banish one from.., Id.Hec. 941 (lyr.):—[voice] Pass., ματρὸς ἐκ χερῶν ὁ. depart from.., Id. Ion 1459(lyr.), but very dub. in Ar.Ec. 202; cf. ἐξορίζω (A) 11, 111.
    II mark out by boundaries, mark out,

    βωμὸν ἱδρύσατο καὶ τέμενος περὶ αὐτὸν οὔρισε Hdt.3.142

    , cf. 6.108, S.Tr. 754, E.Hel. 1670, IG12.76.54, 42(1).76.19 ([voice] Pass., Epid., ii B.C.), etc.; v. infr. IV. 1: metaph., ὁ. τι ἔς τι limit one thing according to another, Th.3.82.
    2 trace out as a boundary, πόρον (of 10 tracing out the Bosporus), A.Supp. 546 (lyr.).
    III ordain, determine, lay down, αἶσα τόνδε σοὐρίζει (i.e. σοι ὁρίζει)

    μόρον Id.Ch. 927

     ( σοι πορίζει M1, σ' ὁ. M2) ;

    ἡμῖν ὥρισεν σωτηρίαν E.IT 979

     ;

    ἐς τήνδε παῖδα ψῆφον ὥρισαν φόνου Id.Hec. 259

     ;

    ἡ Δίκη.. ἐν ἀνθρώποισιν ὥρισεν νόμους S.Ant. 452

     ;

    [τὸν χρόνον] ὁ νόμος ὁ. Pl.Lg. 864e

     ;

    ἀριθμὸς ὁ ὁρίζων τὸ πολὺ καὶ τὸ ὀλίγον X.An.7.7.36

     ;

    τὸ δοῦλον γένος πρὸς τὴν ἐλάσσω μοῖραν ὥρισεν θεός E.Fr. 218

     ;

    ὁρίσατέ μοι μέχρι πόσων ἐτῶν δεῖ νομίζειν νέους X.Mem.1.2.35

     : c. inf.,

    ἄνακτες ὥρισαν.. θανεῖν ἐμὴν δέσποιναν οὐ ψήφῳ μιᾷ E. Ion 1222

    , cf. S.Fr.24 ; ὁ. τινὰ θεόν determine one to be a god, deify, AP12.158.7 (Mel.) ;

    ὁ. θάνατον εἶναι τὴν ζημίαν Lycurg.65

    , cf. Din.1.61 ([voice] Med.) ;

    θάνατον ὡρικέναι τὴν ζημίαν D.26.24

     :—[voice] Pass.,

    ὧραι ἑκάστοις εἰσὶν ὡρισμέναι Arist.HA 542a19

    , etc.; ἐπί τισι ὡρισμένοις on certain definite terms (cf. ῥητός), Id.Pol. 1285b22 ; ἀρχαὶ ἀριθμῷ ὡρισμέναι limited, definite, opp. ἄπειροι, Id.Metaph. 1002b18 ;

    τόποι ὡ. Id.Cael. 273

     a14 ;

    τὸ ὡρισμένον Id.Mete. 369b29

    .
    2 define a thing, Pl.Chrm. 171a ([voice] Pass.), X.Mem.4.6.4, al.: more freq. in [voice] Med. than [voice] Act., v. infr. IV. 3.
    IV [voice] Med., mark out for oneself, τίνα ὅρον ὁρίζῃ what criterion do you assign, Pl.Grg. 470b ; στήλας ὁ. set up stones as boundary marks, X.An.7.5.13 ;

    ὁ. χθόνα

     take possession of, take to oneself,

    A. Supp. 256

     ;

    γαῖα.. ἣν Πέλοψ ὁρίζεται E.Fr. 696

     ;

    ὁ. ἑαυτῷ μέρος τῆς οὐσίας Lys.17.6

     : with inf. added,

    ἱερὸν ὡρίσαντ' ἔχειν E.IT 969

     ;

    ὁρίζεσθαι βωμούς

     set up,

    S.Tr. 237

     (just like ὁρίζειν ib. 754) ; v. ὕπαστρος.
    2 determine for oneself, get or have a thing determined,

    ἃ ὡρίσω σὺ δίκαια D.19.241

    , cf. v.l. in Lys.2.19 : c. acc. et inf., αὐτὸν πολεμεῖν ὁρίζομαι I lay it down that.., D.9.19 ; τί ποτ' ἄρ' ὡρίσαντο καὶ τίνος γένους εἶναι τὸ φυτόν; Epicr.11.18.
    3 define a thing,

    τὴν ἡδονὴν ἀγαθὸν ὁ. Pl.R. 505c

    , cf.Sph. 246b ;

    ὁ. τὰς ἀρετὰς ἀπαθείας τινάς Arist.EN 1104b24

    , al. ;

    ἡδονῇ τε καὶ ἀγαθῷ ὁ. τὸ καλόν Pl.Grg. 475a

    ;

    τὸ ζῆν ὁ. δυνάμει αἰσθήσεως Arist.EN 1170a16

    , al.: c. acc. et inf.,

    ὁ. δικαίους εἶναι τοὺς εἰδότας κτλ. X.Mem.4.6.6

    , cf. Pl.Tht. 190e, etc.:— [voice] Pass., to be defined,

    [ἡ αἰδὼς] ὁρίζεται φόβος τις ἀδοξίας Arist.EN 1128b11

     ; οἷς αἱ φιλίαι ὁρίζονται ib. 1166a2 ;

    τὸ ὁριζόμενον Id.Top. 141b24

    , al.

    Greek-English dictionary (Αγγλικά Ελληνικά-λεξικό) > ὁρίζω

  • 17 κατατίθημι

    κατατίθημι, [tense] fut. - θήσω: Hom. freq. uses the [dialect] Ep. [tense] aor. forms, [voice] Act. κάτθεμεν, κάτθετε, κάτθεσαν, inf. κατθέμεν ([dialect] Dor. κατθέμειν prob. in Epich.71, [dialect] Aeol.
    A

    κά (θ) θηκε Schwyzer647a

     (Naucratis, vi B.C.)), [voice] Med. κατθέμεθα, κατθέσθην, κατθέμενοι (sg.

    κάτθετο A.R.3.867

    ); also καταθείομεν, [tense] aor. subj. for καταθῶμεν, Od.21.264; καταθείομαι, [tense] aor. subj. [voice] Med. for καταθῶμαι, Il.22.111, Od.19.17:—place, put, lay down, folld. by various Preps.,

    κ. ἄρνας ἐπὶ χθονός Il.3.293

    ;

    κόρυθ' ἐπὶ χθονί 6.473

    ; κ. τινὰ ἐν Λυκίης δήμῳ or εἰς Ἰθάκην, set him down in.., 16.683, Od.16.230;

    τινὰ ἐν λεχέεσσι Il.18.233

    ;

    τεύχε' ἐς θάλαμον Od.24.166

    ;

    ἐς μέγαρον ἐπὶ θρόνου 20.96

    ;

    κλισίην τινὶ παρὰ πυρί 19.55

    ;

    τι ὑπὸ ζυγά 13.20

    ; τι ἐκ καπνοῦ take down out of the smoke, 16.288, 19.7.
    2 put down, offer as a prize,

    ἄπυρον κατέθηκε λέβητα Il.23.267

    , cf. 885 (tm.);

    κ. ἄεθλα Od.24.91

    ; but κ. ἄεθλον ordain a contest, 19.572; εἰς τὴν ἀγορὰν γράμματα κ. set up as a public notice, Pl.Lg. 946d; so also κ. τι ἐς μέσον put it down in the midst, i.e. for common use, E.Cyc. 547, cf. Ar.Ec. 602; οὐσίαν, χρήματα κ., ib. 855, 871;

    τὰ ὅπλα εἰς τὸ μέσον X.Cyr.2.1.14

    ; but ἐς μέσον Πέρσῃσι κ. τὰ πρήγματα communicate power to them, give them a common share of it, Hdt. 3.80;

    ἐς μέσον Κῴοισι κ. τὴν ἀρχήν Id.7.164

    ;

    τὸ αὑτῶν ἔργον ἅπασι κοινὸν κ. Pl.R. 369e

    ; κ. εἰς τὸ μέσον or εἰς τὸ κοινόν, propose for common discussion, Id.Phlb. 14b, Cra. 384c.
    3 put down as payment, pay down, Hdt.9.120, Ar.Ra. 176, Nu. 246, Th.1.27, Pl.Prt. 314b, Lg. 921d, etc.;

    τέλη Antipho 5.77

    ;

    μετοίκιον Lys.31.9

    ;

    τὸ ὄφλημα D. 21.99

    , cf. 151;

    τὰς συμβολάς Antiph.26.8

    ; put down as paid (in accounts), X. Oec.9.8; τί.. τουτοινὶ καταθῶ σοι .. ; what shall I pay you for these? Ar. Pax 1214: generally, pay, perform what one has promised,

    νικῶντί γε χάριν κ. Pi.N.7.76

    ; ἃ δ' ὑπέσχεο ποῖ καταθήσεις; S. OC 227 (anap.):—alsoin [voice] Med., v.infr.11.7.
    b dedicate, Schwyzer647a (Naucratis, vi B.C.), 682 (2) (Cypr.), al.
    4 deposit, παρακαταθήκην ὲς .. Hdt.5.92.

    ή; ἐνέχυρα IG5(2).344.18

     (Orchom.Arc., iii B.C.):— in this sense usu. in [voice] Med., cf. 11.4.
    b mortgage, Leg.Gort.6.19, Test.Epict.2.13, etc.
    5 deposit in the tomb, bury, v.l. in Ev.Marc. 15.46.
    6 sow seed, POxy.1031.17 (iii A.D.).
    7 κ. ὁδόν lay down, make a road, Pi.P.5.90.
    8 dish up, serve, Epich.71.
    II [voice] Med., lay down from oneself, put off, lay aside, esp. of arms,

    τεύχεα.., τὰ μὲν κατέθεντ' ἐπὶ γαίῃ Il.3.114

    , cf. Od.22.141 (hence, comically,

    θυμὸν κατάθου παρὰ τὴν ὀργὴν ὥσπερ ὁπλίτης Ar.Av. 401

    );

    χλαίνας μὲν κατέθεντο κατὰ κλισμούς Od.17.86

    ; ζώναν καταθηκαμένα, of a maiden, Pi.O.6.39; θοἰμάτιον, etc., Ar.Pl. 926, etc.; τὴν χλαμύδα (of the ἔφηβος) prob. in Philem.34; τὴν μοναρχίαν lay down, Plu.Fab.9.
    2 metaph., put an end to, settle,

    τὸν πόλεμον Th.1.121

    , Lys.33.6, D.19.264:—[voice] Pass., ξυμφορᾶς μετρίως κατατιθεμένης being arranged on tolerable terms, Th.4.20.
    b put aside, leave out of the question,

    τοὺς ποιητάς Pl.Prt. 348a

    , cf. Ti. 59c, Democr.3; κ. ἐν ἀμελείᾳ treat negligently, X.Mem.1.4.15.
    3 lay down in a place; of the dead, bury, Od.24.190;

    κ. πηδάλιον ὑπὲρ καπνοῦ Hes.Op.45

    ;

    τὰς μαχαίρας ἐνθαδί Ar.Eq. 489

    ; [ τὰ στρώματα] Id.Ra. 166; ὤμοισι κατ' ἄμβροτα θήκατο τεύχη on one's shoulders, Q.S.12.303; put on shore, disembark, Luc.Alex.57; ποῖ δὴ ἡμᾶς ὁ ἀνὴρ -θήσεται; Plu.Caes.37: metaph., πολλὰ αἱ μακραὶ ἁμέραι κατέθεντο λύπας ἐγγυτέρω have brought them nearer.., S.OC 1216 (lyr.).
    4 deposit for oneself, lay by, lay up in store (v.supr.1.4), [γαστέρας] ἐπὶ δόρπῳ for supper, Od.18.45;

    ἔντεα ἐς θάλαμον 19.17

    ;

    ὅπλα εἰς τὰς ἄκρας X.Cyr.7.5.34

    ;

    βίον Hes.Op. 601

    ; σμικρὸν ἐπὶ σμικρῷ ib. 361;

    καρποὺς ἐς φορβήν Hdt.1.202

    ;

    παραθήκην Id.6.73

    ;

    χρήματα Antipho Soph.54

    ;

    θησαυρὸν παισί Thgn.409

    ;

    θησαυροὺς ἐν οἴκῳ X. Cyr.8.2.15

    ;

    μυρίους δαρεικοὺς εἰς τὸ ἴδιον ἐμοί Id.An.1.3.3

    ; [ σῖτον] hoarditup in hope of high prices, Lys.22.9.
    b metaph., κλέος lay up store of glory, Hdt.7.220, 9.78, Pl.Smp. 208c;

    ἀΐδιον δόξαν κ. Th. 4.87

    ;

    κ. ἀποστροφήν τινι X. An.7.6.34

    : freq. χάριτα or χάριν κατατίθεσθαι τινι or πρός τινα, lay up a store of gratitude or favour, Hdt.6.41, 7.178, Antipho 5.61, Th.1.33, D.59.21, etc.;

    εὐεργεσίαν κ. ἐς βασιλέα Th.1.128

     (so in [voice] Pass.,

    μεγάλων μοι κατατεθεισῶν ἐς αὐτὸν εὐεργεσιῶν Hdn.3.6.2

    , cf. 1.4.3); also

    ἔχθραν καταθέσθαι πρὸς ἐκείνους ὑπὲρ αὐτῶν Lys.2.22

    ;

    κατέθετο μῖσος διπλάσιον τῆς οὐσίας Men.626

    ; but κ. ὀργὴν εἴς τινας vent one's fury upon.., X. Cyn.10.8.
    5 deposit in a place of safety,

    τοὺς πρέσβεις κατέθεντο εἰς Αἴγιναν Th.3.72

    ;

    τὴν λείαν ἐς τοὺς Βιθυνούς X.HG1.3.2

    ;

    κ. εἰς τὸ οἴκημα D.56.4

    ;

    οἴκαδε Pl.Prt. 314a

    ;

    διαθήκην παρά τινι Is.6.27

    ;

    φιλίαν παρὰ θεούς X.An.2.5.8

    ; [

    Διόνυσον] ἐν Δρακάνῳ Theoc.26.34

    :—[voice] Pass., of prisoners, ἐν τῷ δεσμωτηρίῳ κατατεθῶσιν Lex ap.D.24.63, cf. D.C.58.1.
    6 lay up in memory or as a memorial, χρὴ.. γνώμην ταύτην ( ταύτῃ Bgk.)

    καταθέσθαι Thgn.717

    ;

    μνημεῖον παρά τινι Pl.Tht. 209c

    ; κ. εἰς μνήμην record, register, Id.Lg. 858d;

    κ. τι ἐς βιβλίον D.61.2

    ;

    γνώμην -θέσθαι εἰς μέσον D.H.Rh.9.4

    .
    7 pay (cf. 1.3),

    ἐκφόριον BGU1059.22

     (i B.C.), cf. PTeb.329.7 (ii A.D.), etc.
    b employ, spend, τὴν ἀκμὴν.. πρὸς τί κατατιθέμενος on what he is employing the prime of life, Apollod. Com.13.4;

    τὸν βίον εἴς τι Phld.Rh.1.244

     S.; κ. τὴν σχολὴν εἰς καλόν τι employ one's leisure in.., Plu.2.135d;

    τὴν τοῦ λέγειν δύναμιν εἰς τὴν τῶν ἀδικουμένων βοήθειαν D.S.9.13

    ; σπουδὴν-τιθέμενοι Polystr.p.19 W.
    8 impose,

    ὄνομα Parm.19.3

    , cf. 8.39; but μορφὰς κατέθεντο δύο γνώμας ὀνομάζειν recorded their decision, decided to name, ib.53.
    9 in Law, depose, aver,

    ἐν ὑπομνήμασι PLips.35.16

     (iv A.D.), cf. Cod.Just.1.5.16.1, etc.
    b = συγκατατίθεμαι, Eust. 1261.19.
    c make a testamentary disposition,

    κ. διαθηκιμαίαν βούλησιν PMasp.151.43

    , al. (vi A.D.).—Freq. in Hom. and familiar [dialect] Att.; rare in Trag.

    Greek-English dictionary (Αγγλικά Ελληνικά-λεξικό) > κατατίθημι

  • 18 πρῶτος

    πρῶτος, η, ον (Hom.+; loanw. in rabb.).
    ① pert. to being first in a sequence, inclusive of time, set (number), or space, first of several, but also when only two persons or things are involved (=πρότερος; exx. in Hdb. on J 1:15; Rdm.2 71f; Thackeray 183; s. also Mlt. 79; 245; B-D-F §62; Rob. 516; 662; and s. Mt 21:31 v.l.).
    ⓐ of time first, earliest, earlier
    α. as adj. ἀπὸ τῆς πρώτης ἡμέρας ἄχρι τοῦ νῦν Phil 1:5; cp. Ac 20:18 (on the absence of the art. [also Phil 1:5 v.l.] s. B-D-F §256; Rob. 793). ἡ πρώτη ἀπολογία 2 Ti 4:16 (MMeinertz, Worauf bezieht sich die πρώτη ἀπολογία 2 Ti 4:16?: Biblica 4, 1923, 390–94). ἡ πρ. διαθήκη Hb 9:15. τὰ πρῶτα ἔργα Rv 2:5. ἡ ἀνάστασις ἡ πρώτη 20:5f. ἡ πρώτη ὅρασις Hv 3, 10, 3; 3, 11, 2; 4. ἡ ἐκκλησία ἡ πρ. 2 Cl 14:1.—Subst. τὰ πρ. … τὰ ἔσχατα (Job 8:7): γίνεται τὰ ἔσχατα χείρονα τῶν πρώτων Mt 12:45; cp. Lk 11:26; 2 Pt 2:20; Hv 1, 4, 2. οἱ πρῶτοι (those who came earlier, as Artem. 2, 9 p. 93, 19 those who appeared earlier) Mt 20:10; cp. vs. 8. ἀπέστειλεν ἄλλους δούλους πλείονας τῶν πρώτων 21:36. Cp. 27:64. πρῶτος ἐξ ἀναστάσεως νεκρῶν the first to rise from the dead Ac 26:23. ὁ πρῶτος the first one J 5:4; 1 Cor 14:30. On the self-designation of the Risen Lord ὁ πρ. καὶ ὁ ἔσχατος Rv 1:17; 2:8; 22:13; s. ἔσχατος 2b (πρ. of God: Is 44:6; 48:12).—As a predicate adj., where an adv. can be used in English (ParJer 1:8 εἰ μὴ ἐγὼ πρῶτος ἀνοίξω τὰς πύλας; B-D-F §243; Rob. 657), as the first one = first ἦλθεν πρῶτος he was the first one to come = he came first J 20:4; cp. vs. 8. πρῶτος Μωϋσῆς λέγει Ro 10:19. Ἀβραὰμ πρῶτος περιτομὴν δούς Abraham was the first to practice circumcision B 9:7. οἱ ἄγγελοι οἱ πρῶτοι κτισθέντες the angels who were created first Hv 3, 4, 1; Hs 5, 5, 3.—1 Ti 2:13; 1J 4:19; AcPlCor 2:9.—ἐν ἐμοὶ πρώτῳ in me as the first 1 Ti 1:16.—Used w. a gen. of comparison (Ocelus Luc. 3 ἐκεῖνο πρῶτον τοῦ παντός ἐστιν=prior to the All; Manetho 1, 329; Athen. 14, 28 p. 630c codd.) πρῶτός μου ἦν he was earlier than I = before me J 1:15, 30 (PGM 13, 543 σοῦ πρῶτός εἰμι.—Also Ep. 12 of Apollonius of Tyana: Philostrat. I p. 348, 30 τὸ τῇ τάξει δεύτερον οὐδέποτε τῇ φύσει πρῶτον). So perh. also ἐμὲ πρῶτον ὑμῶν μεμίσηκεν 15:18 (s. β below) and πάντων πρώτη ἐκτίσθη Hv 2, 4, 1.—As a rule the later element is of the same general nature as the one that precedes it. But it can also be someth. quite different, even its exact opposite: τὴν πρώτην πίστιν ἠθέτησαν 1 Ti 5:12. τὴν ἀγάπην σου τὴν πρώτην ἀφῆκες Rv 2:4.—Used elliptically ἡ πρώτη (i.e. ἡμέρα sim. Polyb. 5, 19, 1; 18, 27, 2 τῇ πρώτῃ) τῶν ἀζύμων Mt 26:17. πρώτῃ σαββάτου on the first day of the week Mk 16:9. In some of the passages mentioned above the idea of sequence could be predom.
    β. the neuter πρῶτον as adv., of time first, in the first place, before, earlier, to begin with (Peripl. Eryth. 4; Chariton 8, 2, 4; ApcEsdr 3:11; Just., D. 2, 4) πρῶτον πάντων first of all Hv 5:5a. ἐπίτρεψόν μοι πρῶτον ἀπελθεῖν καὶ θάψαι let me first go and bury Mt 8:21. συλλέξατε πρῶτον τὰ ζιζάνια gather the weeds first 13:30. Cp. 17:10, 11 v.l.; Mk 7:27; 9:11f; 13:10; Lk 9:59, 61; 12:1 ( first Jesus speaks to his disciples, and only then [vs. 15] to the people. If one prefers to take πρ. w. what follows, as is poss., it has mng. 2a); 14:28, 31; J 7:51; 18:13; Ac 26:20; Ro 15:24 al. in NT; B 15:7; Hv 3, 1, 8; 3, 6, 7; 3, 8, 11; 5:5b. τότε πρῶτον then for the first time Ac 11:26 D. πρῶτον … καὶ τότε first … and then (Sir 11:7; Jos., Ant. 13, 187) Mt 5:24; 7:5; 12:29; Mk 3:27; Lk 6:42; IEph 7:2. τότε is correlative w. πρῶτον without καί J 2:10 v.l. Likew. πρῶτον … εἶτα (εἶτεν) first … then (Just., D. 33, 2 al.; s. εἶτα 1) Mk 4:28; 1 Ti 3:10; B 6:17. πρῶτον … ἔπειτα (ἔπειτα 2) 1 Cor 15:46; 1 Th 4:16. πρῶτον … μετὰ ταῦτα Mk 16:9, s. vs. 12. πρῶτον … εἶτα … μετὰ ταῦτα 1 Cl 23:4; 2 Cl 11:3 (in both cases the same prophetic saying of unknown origin). πρῶτον … ἐν τῷ δευτέρῳ Ac 7:12.—Pleonastically πρῶτον πρὸ τοῦ ἀρίστου Lk 11:38.—W. gen. (Chariton 5, 4, 9 cod. πρῶτον τ. λόγων=before it comes to words) ἐμὲ πρῶτον ὑμῶν μεμίσηκεν it hated me before ( it hated) you J 15:18 (but s. 1aα).—W. the art. τὸ πρῶτον (Hom. et al.; Jos., Ant. 8, 402; 14, 205) the first time J 10:40; 19:39; at first (Diod S 1, 85, 2; Jos., Ant. 2, 340) 12:16; 2 Cl 9:5. τὰ πρῶτα (Hom. et al.; Appian, Syr. 15 §64; Ps.-Phoc. 8) the first time, at first MPol 8:2.
    ⓑ of number or sequence (the area within which this sense is valid cannot be marked off w. certainty from the area 1aα)
    α. as adj. Mt 21:28; 22:25; Mk 12:20; Lk 14:18; 16:5; 19:16; 20:29; J 19:32; Ac 12:10; 13:33 v.l.; Rv 4:7; 8:7; 21:19; Hs 9, 1, 5. τὸ πρῶτον … τὸ δεύτερον (Alex. Aphr., An. p. 28, 9 Br.) Hb 10:9. On πρώτης τῆς μερίδος Μακεδονίας πόλις Ac 16:12 s. μερίς 1 and RAscough, NTS 44, ’98, 93–103.—Since πρῶτος can stand for πρότερος (s. 1 at beg.; also Mlt-Turner 32), it by no means follows from τὸν μὲν πρῶτον λόγον Ac 1:1 that the writer of Luke and of Ac must have planned to write a third book (Zahn, NKZ 28, 1917, 373ff, Comm. 1919, 16ff holds that he planned to write a third volume; against this view s. EGoodspeed, Introd. to the NT ’37, 189; Haenchen, et al.—Athenaeus 15, 701c mentions the first of Clearchus’ two books on proverbs with the words ἐν τῷ προτέρῳ περὶ παροιμιῶν, but 10, 457c with ἐν τῷ πρώτῳ περὶ παροιμιῶν. Diod S 1, 42, 1 the first half of a two-part work is called ἡ πρώτη βίβλος and 3, 1, 1 mentions a division into πρώτη and δευτέρα βίβ. In 13, 103, 3 the designation for the first of two works varies between ἡ πρώτη σύνταξις and ἡ προτέρα ς. See Haenchen on Ac 1:1).—πρῶτος is also used without any thought that the series must continue: τὸν πρῶτον ἰχθύν the very first fish Mt 17:27. αὕτη ἀπογραφὴ πρώτη ἐγένετο Lk 2:2, likewise, does not look forward in the direction of additional censuses, but back to a time when there were none at all (Ael. Aristid. 13 p. 227 D. παράκλησις αὕτη [=challenge to a sea-fight] πρώτη ἐγένετο; for interpolation theory s. JWinandy, RB 104, ’97, 372–77; cp. BPearson, CBQ, ’99, 262--82).—τὰ τείχη τὰ πρῶτα Hs 8, 6, 6 does not contrast the ‘first walls’ w. other walls; rather it distinguishes the only walls in the picture (Hs 8, 7, 3; 8, 8, 3) as one edifice, from the tower as the other edifice.
    β. adv., the neuter πρῶτον of sequence in enumerations (not always clearly distinguished fr. sense 1aβ) first πρῶτον ἀποστόλους, δεύτερον προφήτας, τρίτον … 1 Cor 12:28 (Mitt-Wilck. I/2, 20 II, 10ff [II A.D.] τὸ πρ. … τὸ δεύτερον … τὸ τρίτον. Without the art. 480, 12ff [II A.D.]; Diod S 36, 7, 3; Tat. 40, 1). See Hb 7:2; Js 3:17.—Not infrequently Paul begins w. πρῶτον μέν without continuing the series, at least in form (B-D-F §447, 4; Rob. 1152. For πρ. without continuation s. Plat., Ep. 7, 337b, Plut., Mor. 87b; Jos., Ant. 1, 182; Ath. 27, 1 πρῶτα μέν) Ro 1:8; 3:2; 1 Cor 11:18. S. also 2 Cl 3:1.
    ⓒ of space outer, anterior σκηνὴ ἡ πρώτη the outer tent, i.e. the holy place Hb 9:2; cp. vss. 6, 8.
    ② pert. to prominence, first, foremost, most important, most prominent
    ⓐ adj.
    α. of things (Ocellus [II B.C.] 56 Harder [1926] πρώτη κ. μεγίστη φυλακή; Ael. Aristid. 23, 43 K.=42 p. 783 D.: πόλεις; Ezk 27:22; PsSol 17:43; χρυσίον τὸ πρῶτον τίμιον; JosAs 15:10) ἡ μεγάλη καὶ πρώτη ἐντολή Mt 22:38; cp. Mk 12:29. ἐντολὴ πρώτη πάντων vs. 28 (OLehmann, TU 73, ’59, 557–61 [rabb.]; CBurchard, ZNW 61, ’70, cites JosAs 15:10; 18:5). Without superl. force ἐντολὴ πρώτη ἐν ἐπαγγελίᾳ a commandment of great importance, with a promise attached Eph 6:2 (the usual transl. ‘first commandment w. a promise’ [NRSV, REB et al.] loses sight of the fact that Ex 20:4–6=Dt 5:8–10 has an implied promise of the same kind as the one in Ex 20:12=Dt 5:16. πρ. here is best taken in the same sense as in Mk 12:29 above). στολὴν τὴν πρώτην the special robe Lk 15:22 (JosAs 15:10).—ἐν πρώτοις among the first = most important things, i.e. as of first importance 1 Cor 15:3 (Pla., Pol. 522c ὸ̔ καὶ παντὶ ἐν πρώτοις ἀνάγκη μανθάνειν; Epict., Ench. 20; Mitt-Wilck I/2, 14 II, 9 ἐν πρώτοις ἐρωτῶ σε; Josh 9:2d).
    β. of persons (Dio Chrys. 19 [36], 35 πρ. καὶ μέγιστος θεός; TestAbr B 4 p. 108, 18 [Stone p. 64]; ApcSed 5:2; Jos., Ant. 15, 398; Just., A I, 60, 5 al. τὸν πρῶτον θεόν) ὸ̔ς ἂν θέλῃ ἐν ὑμῖν εἶναι πρῶτος whoever wishes to be the first among you Mt 20:27; Mk 10:44; cp. 9:35. πρῶτος Σίμων Mt 10:2 is not meant to indicate the position of Simon in the list, since no other numbers follow, but to single him out as the most prominent of the twelve. W. gen. ὧν (=τῶν ἁμαρτωλῶν) πρῶτός εἰμι 1 Ti 1:15. Pl. (οἱ) πρῶτοι in contrast to (οἱ) ἔσχατοι Mt 19:30; 20:16; Mk 9:35; 10:31; Lk 13:30; Ox 654, 25f (cp. GTh 4; sim. Sallust. 9 p. 16, 21f τοῖς ἐσχάτοις … τοῖς πρώτοις; s. ἔσχατος 2).—αἱ πρώται prominent women (in the phrase γυναικῶν τε τῶν πρώτων οὐκ ὀλίγαι) Ac 17:4 (s. New Docs 1, 72). οἱ πρῶτοι the most prominent men, the leading men w. gen. of place (Jos., Ant. 7, 230 τῆς χώρας) οἱ πρ. τῆς Γαλιλαίας Mk 6:21; cp. Ac 13:50 (in phrasing sim. to πολλὰς μὲν γυναῖκας εὐγενεῖς καὶ τῶν πρώτων ἀνδρῶν ἤισχυναν=‘they dishonored many well-born women as well as men of high station’ Theopomp.: 115 Fgm. 121 Jac. p. 563, 33f), or of a group (Strabo 13, 2, 3 οἱ πρ. τῶν φίλων; Jos., Ant. 20, 180) οἱ πρ. τοῦ λαοῦ (Jos., Ant. 11, 141) Lk 19:47; cp. Ac 25:2; 28:17. On ὁ πρῶτος τῆς νήσου vs. 7 (πρῶτος Μελιταίων IGR I, 512=IG XIV, 601; cp. CB I/2, 642 no. 535 ὁ πρῶτος ἐν τῇ πόλει; p. 660 no. 616; SEG XLI, 1345, 14f; cp. CIL X, 7495, 1; s. Hemer, Acts 153, n. 152; Warnecke, Romfahrt 119ff) s. Πόπλιος.
    ⓑ adv. πρῶτον of degree in the first place, above all, especially (Jos., Ant. 10, 213) ζητεῖτε πρῶτον τὴν βασιλείαν Mt 6:33. Ἰουδαίῳ τε πρῶτον καὶ Ἕλληνι Ro 1:16; cp. 2:9f.—Ac 3:26; 2 Pt 1:20; 3:3. Of the Macedonian Christians ἑαυτοὺς ἔδωκαν πρῶτον τῷ κυρίῳ καὶ ἡμῖν they gave themselves first of all to the Lord, and (then) to us 2 Cor 8:5. παρακαλῶ πρῶτον πάντων first of all I urge 1 Ti 2:1.—B. 939. DELG. M-M. EDNT. TW. Sv.

    Ελληνικά-Αγγλικά παλαιοχριστιανική Λογοτεχνία > πρῶτος

  • 19 σκάνδαλον

    σκάνδαλον, ου, τό (s. σκανδαλίζω; non-bibl. pap; PLond 1338, 25; 1339, 10 [both 709 A.D.]; LXX, Aq., Sym., Theod.; PsSol 4:23 [but not in Test12Patr, EpArist, Philo, Joseph., apolog.], then Christian wr. Later word for σκανδάληθρον [Aristoph. et al.]; s. Hesych. and Phot. s.v.).
    ① a device for catching someth. alive, trap (PCairZen 608, 7 [III B.C.], where written σκάνδαδον) w. παγίς, used metaph. (Josh 23:13; Ps 140:9; 1 Macc 5:4; Is 8:14 Sym. and Theod.) Ro 11:9 (Ps 68:23). σκ. ἐν αὐτῷ οὐκ ἔστιν in such a pers. there is no reason for falling i.e., as the next vs. indicates, the pers. can see what lies along the path 1J 2:10 (Moffatt ‘no pitfall’; s. AVicentCernuda, EstBîbl 27, ’68, 153–75, 215–32); but s. 3.
    ② an action or circumstance that leads one to act contrary to a proper course of action or set of beliefs, temptation to sin, enticement to apostasy, false belief, etc., fig. ext. of 1 (Ezk 7:19 Aq. and Sym.; Wsd 14:11) Mt 18:7abc; Lk 17:1; B 4:9. τὸ τέλειον σκ. the final temptation 4:3. βαλεῖν σκάνδαλον ἐνώπιον τῶν υἱῶν Ἰσραήλ entice the sons of Israel to sin Rv 2:14. σκάνδαλα ποιεῖν bring about temptations (to sin) Ro 16:17. τιθέναι τινὶ σκάνδαλον put a temptation in someone’s way 14:13 (on τιθέναι σκ. cp. Jdth 5:1); in place of the dat. κατά τινος 1 Cl 35:8 (Ps 49:20).—Also of persons (PsSol 4:23; 1 Macc 5:4): Jesus censures Peter, as Satan σκάνδαλον εἶ ἐμοῦ you are tempting me to sin Mt 16:23. In ἀπεχόμενοι σκανδάλων καὶ τῶν ψευδαδέλφων κτλ. Pol 6:3, σκ. is prob. best taken as one who tempts others to sin (cp. Pistis Sophia 105; 106 [p. 173–75 CSchmidt] ὡς σκάνδαλον καὶ ὡς παραβάτης; AcJ 64 [Aa II/1 p. 182, 14f] of a woman ἡ σκάνδαλον γενομένη ἀνδρί; 79 [p. 190, 11]).—To those who cannot come to a decision to believe on him, Jesus is a σκάνδαλον (σκανδαλίζω 1b). In line w. OT imagery (Is 8:14, where Aq., Sym., Theod.—in contrast to the LXX—have our word) Jesus is called πέτρα σκανδάλου Ro 9:33; 1 Pt 2:8 (on the relation of these two passages to each other s. RHarris, Testimonies I 1916, 18f; 26f).
    ③ that which causes offense or revulsion and results in opposition, disapproval, or hostility, fault, stain etc. (Sir 7:6; 27:23). σκ. ἐν αὐτῷ οὐκ ἔστιν in him there is no stain or fault 1J 2:10 (cp. Jdth 5:20); but s. 1. Of the cross ὅ ἐστιν σκάνδαλον τοῖς ἀπιστοῦσιν which is revolting to those who have no faith IEph 18:1. The crucified Christ is a σκ. to Judeans 1 Cor 1:23. τὸ σκάνδαλον τοῦ σταυροῦ the stumbling-block of the cross, i.e. that which, in the preaching about the cross, arouses opposition Gal 5:11. συλλέξουσιν ἐκ τῆς βασιλείας αὐτοῦ πάντα τὰ σκ. they will gather out of his kingdom everything that is offensive Mt 13:41 (this interpr., which refers τὰ σκ. to things, would correspond to the scripture passage basic to this one, i.e. Zeph 1:3, where Sym. has our word in the combination τὰ σκάνδαλα σὺν [τοῖς] ἀσεβέσι. But the fact that Mt continues w. καὶ τοὺς ποιοῦντας τὴν ἀνομίαν could require us to take τὰ σκ. to mean persons; s. 2 above).—To bibl. in TW add RKnox, Trials of a Translator ’49, 66–73; AHumbert, Biblica 35, ’54, 1–28 (synoptics).—DELG. M-M. DBS XII 49–66. EDNT. TW. Sv.

    Ελληνικά-Αγγλικά παλαιοχριστιανική Λογοτεχνία > σκάνδαλον

  • 20 κεῖμαι

    κεῖμαι impf. 3 sg. ἔκειτο; fut. 3 pl. κείσονται (Tat. 31, 1) (Hom.+)
    ① to be in a recumbent position, lie, recline; can serve as passive of τίθημι, of pers.: w. indication of place ἔν τινι in someth., of a child ἐν φάτνῃ Lk 2:12, 16; of a dead person (Hom. et al.; also in Palest. [PhilolWoch 49, 1929, 247] and Alexandrian [Sb 1397] grave ins; PRyl 114, 17 τοῦ σώματος κειμένου) w. οὗ or ὅπου (ApcMos 33; PGM 4, 2038) Mt 28:6; Lk 23:53; J 20:12.
    ② to be in a place so as to be on someth., lie, of things ἐπί τι on someth. 2 Cor 3:15. Also ἐπάνω τινός (TestAbr A 12 p. 91, 1 [Stone p. 30] ἐπάνω τῆς πραπέζης) Mt 5:14 (κ. of location of a place since Hdt., Thu.; SIG 685, 46 [139 B.C.]; Tob 5:6 S ἐν τῷ ὄρει; Jos., Ant. 9, 7).—Abs. (as Hom. et al.; Josh 4:6) of a throne, a bench stand (Hdt. 1, 181, 5 κλίνη κ.; Arrian, Anab. 6, 29, 6 τράπεζα κ.; Chariton 5, 4, 5; Polyaenus 4, 3, 24 and Paus. 2, 31, 3 θρόνος κ.) Rv 4:2; Hv 3, 1, 4. Of cloths lie (there) Lk 24:12 v.l.; J 20:5, 6, 7.—21:9. Of vessels stand (there) (X., Oec. 8, 19; Paus. 9, 31, 3 τρίποδες; cp. 1 Esdr 6:25; Jer 24:1) 2:6; 19:29. σκάφην GJs 18:2 (codd.). Of goods be laid up, be stored up Lk 12:19 (Hom. et al.; cp. PSI 365, 20 [251/250 B.C.] ὁ σῖτος ἐπὶ τῆς ἅλω κείμενος).—Of a foundation be laid 1 Cor 3:11. ἡ πόλις τετράγωνος κεῖται is laid out as a square Rv 21:16. κ. πρός τι be laid at someth. the ax at the roots (ready for felling of the tree) Mt 3:10; Lk 3:9. κ. πρός w. acc. also means be very close to someone in ὁ ἄγγελος τ. πνεύματος τοῦ προφητικοῦ ὁ κείμενος πρὸς αὐτόν (i.e. τ. ἄνθρωπον) Hm 11:9 (Ox 5 recto, 3 reads: ἐπʼ αὐτῷ).
    ③ In a variety of transferred senses involving esp. abstractions to exist, have place, or be there (for someth.)
    ⓐ be appointed, set, destined εἴς τι for someth. εἰς πτῶσιν καὶ ἀνάστασιν for the fall and rising Lk 2:34. εἰς ἀπολογίαν τοῦ εὐαγγελίου Phil 1:16. εἰς τοῦτο 1 Th 3:3.—κ. ἐπί τινος be put in charge of someth. of the angel of punishment ἐπὶ τῆς τιμωρίας in charge of the punishment Hs 6, 3, 2.
    ⓑ be given, exist, be valid of legal matters (legal t.t. since Eur.; Thu. et al.; s. also BGU 1002, 14 [55 B.C.] πᾶσαι αἱ κατʼ αὐτῶν κείμεναι συνγραφαί; PTebt 334, 7 of a marriage contract κατὰ τ. κειμένην ἡμῖν συνγραφήν; 2 Macc 4:11; κειμένου νόμου Just., D. 123, 1) τινί for someone of law (Menand., PDidot I, 14 p. 329 S. ἔστʼ ἀνδρὶ κ. γυναικὶ κείμενος νόμος; Dio Chrys. 64 [14], 13; OGI 111, 30 [II B.C.] ὁ κείμενος νόμος; pap; EpArist 15; Philo, Det. Pot. Ins. 18 νόμος κεῖται; Jos., Ant. 4, 182 ὑμῖν κεῖται=are there for you) 1 Ti 1:9. Of powers κ. ἐπί τινι exist for someth., relate or apply to someth. Hm 6, 1, 1.
    ⓒ occur, appear, be found (Hellanicus [V B.C.] 4 Fgm. 93 Jac. αὕτη [i.e. Πιτάνη] παρʼ Ἀλκαίῳ κεῖται=is found in Alcaeus) ἐν παραβολαῖς B 17:2. διὰ τί ὁ υἱὸς τοῦ θεοῦ εἰς δούλου τρόπον κεῖται ἐν τῇ παραβολῇ; why does the Son of God appear in the parable as a slave? Hs 5, 5, 5; cp. 5, 6, 1.
    ⓓ find oneself, be, in a certain state or condition (Hdt. 8, 102 al.; Menand., Fgm. 576, 2 Kö. τὴν ἐν ἑτέρῳ κειμένην ἁμαρτίαν; PTebt 27 I, 7 [113 B.C.] ἐν περιστάσει κειμένων; 2 Macc 3:11; 4:31, 34; 3 Macc 5:26) ὁ κόσμος ἐν τῷ πονηρῷ κ. the world lies in (the power of) the evil one 1J 5:19 (also probable is the mng. κ. ἔν τινι be dependent on someone [Soph., Oed. R. 247f; Polyb. 6, 15, 6]).—B. 834. DELG. M-M. TW.

    Ελληνικά-Αγγλικά παλαιοχριστιανική Λογοτεχνία > κεῖμαι

См. также в других словарях:

  • You have two cows — Above: two cows You have two cows is the beginning phrase for a series of political joke definitions. Contents 1 History …   Wikipedia

  • To set out — Set Set (s[e^]t), v. t. [imp. & p. p. {Set}; p. pr. & vb. n. {Setting}.] [OE. setten, AS. setton; akin to OS. settian, OFries. setta, D. zetten, OHG. sezzen, G. setzen, Icel. setja, Sw. s[ a]tta, Dan. s?tte, Goth. satjan; causative from the root… …   The Collaborative International Dictionary of English

  • Wait 'til You Have Kids — Wait til You Have Kids!! was a game show on the Family Channel. It was hosted by Tom Parks and announced by Burton Richardson. The show, produced by Jay Wolpert, premiered on September 30, 1996 and lasted until January 31, 1997 with two cycles of …   Wikipedia

  • We Must Have Been Out of Our Minds — Infobox Single Name = We Must Have Been Out Of Our Minds Artist = George Jones and Melba Montgomery from Album = A side = B side = Released = April 1963 (U.S.) Format = 7 Recorded = 1962 Nashville, Tennessee Genre = Country Length = 2:38 Label =… …   Wikipedia

  • set forth — you have set forth a very credible argument Syn: present, describe, set out, detail, delineate, explain, expound; state, declare, announce; submit, offer, put forward, advance, propose, propound …   Thesaurus of popular words

  • Out of Control (Girls Aloud album) — Out of Control Studio album by Girls Aloud Released 3 November 2008 …   Wikipedia

  • Set — (s[e^]t), v. t. [imp. & p. p. {Set}; p. pr. & vb. n. {Setting}.] [OE. setten, AS. setton; akin to OS. settian, OFries. setta, D. zetten, OHG. sezzen, G. setzen, Icel. setja, Sw. s[ a]tta, Dan. s?tte, Goth. satjan; causative from the root of E.… …   The Collaborative International Dictionary of English

  • Set — (s[e^]t), v. t. [imp. & p. p. {Set}; p. pr. & vb. n. {Setting}.] [OE. setten, AS. setton; akin to OS. settian, OFries. setta, D. zetten, OHG. sezzen, G. setzen, Icel. setja, Sw. s[ a]tta, Dan. s?tte, Goth. satjan; causative from the root of E.… …   The Collaborative International Dictionary of English

  • set*/*/*/ — [set] (past tense and past participle set) verb I 1) [T] to put someone or something in a position, or to be in a particular place or position Tea s ready, he told them and set down the tray.[/ex] She set the baby on the floor to play.[/ex] 2)… …   Dictionary for writing and speaking English

  • set — /set/, v., set, setting, n., adj., interj. v.t. 1. to put (something or someone) in a particular place: to set a vase on a table. 2. to place in a particular position or posture: Set the baby on his feet. 3. to place in some relation to something …   Universalium

  • You Say Party — Background information Origin Abbotsford, British Columbia Genres …   Wikipedia

Поделиться ссылкой на выделенное

Прямая ссылка:
… Нажмите правой клавишей мыши и выберите «Копировать ссылку»